JP2021151572A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To increase the interest of a game.SOLUTION: In a game machine equipped with display means capable of displaying multiple types of images, one of the multiple types of images is an icon indicating that a game ball has entered a start port, an icon may be displayed when the game ball enters the start port during a first period, and an icon may not be displayed even when the game ball enters the start port during a second period after the first period.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 53

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine capable of performing a display effect using a display device when a gaming ball wins a prize at the starting port (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

In such a gaming machine, it is possible to perform a display effect using a character image, a pattern, or the like.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-202930 Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-198339 Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-182376

However, even with the above-mentioned gaming machines, there is still room for improvement in the technology for improving the interest of the game.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to improve the interest of the game.

The present invention has been made to solve at least a part of the above-mentioned problems, and can be realized as the following application examples. It should be noted that the reference numerals and supplementary explanations in parentheses in this column indicate the correspondence with the embodiments described later in order to assist the understanding of the present invention, and do not limit the present invention in any way. ..

[Application example 1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is an icon indicating that the game ball has entered the starting port.
If the game ball enters the starting port during the first period, the icon is displayed, and in the second period after the first period, the game ball enters the starting port. However, the icon may not be displayed,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Application example 2]
The gaming machine described in Application Example 1
In the second period, the icon may not be additionally displayed even if the game ball enters the starting port while the display of the icon displayed in the first period is maintained.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Application example 3]
The gaming machine according to the application example 1 or the application example 2.
In the second period, the icon may disappear after the corresponding winning lottery has been performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Application example 4]
The gaming machine according to any one of Application Examples 1 to 3,
In the second period, if the hold icon is won in the corresponding winning lottery, it may be continuously displayed even during the winning game.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Application example 5]
The gaming machine according to the application example 4.
In the second period, when the hold icon is won in the corresponding winning lottery, depending on the winning type, the holding icon may be continuously displayed even during the winning game execution, or may disappear without being continuously displayed. be,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Application example 6]
The gaming machine according to any one of Application Examples 1 to 5.
In the first period, when the game ball enters the starting port, the icon may be displayed at a timing delayed from the entry.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a front view of a gaming machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the detail of the grand prize apparatus. It is an enlarged view of the display. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the main control board side of a game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the sub-control board side of a game machine. It is a figure for demonstrating the main ROM and the main RAM. It is a figure for demonstrating a sub ROM and a sub RAM. It is a figure for demonstrating various random numbers used in a game machine. It is a figure for demonstrating the special symbol hit detection table and the like. It is 1st figure for demonstrating the hit type determination table. It is a 2nd figure for demonstrating the hit type determination table. It is a figure for demonstrating the fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a figure for demonstrating the ordinary symbol hit detection table and the like. It is a figure for demonstrating the electric chew opening pattern determination table. It is a figure for demonstrating the big prize opening opening pattern determination table. It is a flowchart of a main control main process. It is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing on the main side. It is a flowchart of a start port sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of a normal operation process. It is a flowchart of a special operation process. It is a flowchart of a special symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of a special symbol hit detection process. It is a 1st flowchart of a special symbol variation pattern selection process. It is the 2nd flowchart of the special symbol variation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart of game state management process 1. It is a flowchart of the process during special symbol change. It is a flowchart of a special symbol determination process. It is a flowchart of game state management process 2. It is a figure for demonstrating the setting table of the time saving counter. It is a flowchart of a game state reset process. It is a flowchart of special electric accessory processing 1. It is a flowchart of a game state setting process. It is the first flowchart of the special electric accessory processing 2. It is a 2nd flowchart of the special electric accessory processing 2. It is a flowchart of V opening / closing member control processing. It is a flowchart of V area sensor detection processing. It is a flowchart which shows the sub-control main process. It is a flowchart of the sub-side timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of the received command analysis process. It is a flowchart of the variation effect start processing. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the movement of the 1st movable accessory 14 in the advancing direction. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the 2nd aspect of the 1st movable accessory 14. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the 2nd aspect of the 2nd movable accessory 15. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the display effect of an illumination panel 18. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the light emitting effect of a frame lamp 66. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the decorative member 10. It is a 1st explanatory view which illustrates the movement of the 3rd movable accessory 17 in the advancing direction. It is a 2nd explanatory view which illustrates the movement of the 3rd movable accessory 17 in the advancing direction. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the combination effect production. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the display content change effect A when a condition is satisfied. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the display content change effect B at the time of condition satisfaction. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the display content change effect C when a condition is satisfied. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the icon display effect A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the icon display effect B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the icon display effect C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the hit type expectation degree suggestion effect A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the hit type expectation degree suggestion effect B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the hit type expectation degree suggestion effect C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the icon delay display effect A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the icon delay display effect B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the icon delay display effect C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the time saving number-of-time notification effect A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the time saving number-of-time notification effect B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the time saving number-of-time notification effect C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the decorative pattern irregular start stop effect A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the decorative pattern irregular start stop effect B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the decorative pattern irregular start stop effect C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the scroll background effect A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the scroll background effect B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the scroll background effect C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the image superimposition button effect A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the image superimposition button effect B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the image superimposition button effect C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the character selection effect A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the character selection effect B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the character selection effect C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the display effect A by the effect device. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the display effect B by the effect device. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the display effect C by the effect device.

<First Embodiment>
1. 1. Structure of the gaming machine Based on FIGS. 1 and 2, the structure of the gaming machine 1 as an embodiment of the present invention will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the gaming machine 1. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing details of the grand prize device 36. In the following, the left-right direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described so as to match the left-right direction seen by the player facing the gaming machine 1. Further, the front direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as a direction from the gaming machine 1 toward the player, and the rear direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as a direction from the player toward the gaming machine 1.

The gaming machine 1 is a pachinko gaming machine that launches a game ball based on a player's firing operation, and when the game ball wins a prize in a specific winning device, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the player based on the winning. be. The gaming machine 1 includes a gaming machine frame 50 and a gaming board 2, and the gaming board 2 is attached to the inside of the gaming machine frame 50. The gaming machine frame 50 includes a front frame (front frame portion) 53, an outer frame (base frame portion) forming an outer shell portion of the gaming machine, and an inner frame to which the gaming board 2 is attached inside the outer frame. I have. The front frame (front frame portion) 53 is a vertically rectangular unit arranged on the front side of the outer frame and the inner frame, and has a handle 60, a ball striking plate (upper plate) 61, and a surplus ball tray (lower plate). ) 62, an effect button 63, a sword member 64, a sword button 65, a frame lamp 66, a speaker 67, and a select button 68. An opening is formed in the center of the front frame 53, and the game area 3 of the game board 2 can be visually recognized through the opening.

The handle 60 is arranged at the lower end on the right side of the front frame 53, and launches the game ball with a firing intensity according to the rotation angle. The hit ball supply plate (upper plate) 61 is provided below the front frame 53 and stores game balls. The surplus ball receiving plate (lower plate) 62 is arranged below the hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) 61, and stores game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply plate 61. The effect button 63 is an operation unit arranged in the vicinity of the hit ball supply plate (upper plate) 61, and is operated (pressed) by the player at the time of the effect executed as the game progresses. The sword member 64 is an operation unit that imitates the shape of a sword, and can be pushed downward by the player during a production or the like that is executed as the game progresses. The sword button 65 is an operation unit provided at the upper end portion of the sword member 64, that is, the end portion of the handle of the sword, and is operated (pressed) by the player at the time of production performed as the game progresses. NS. The sword member 64 is configured to be capable of performing two different operations, a first operation of pushing the entire sword member 64 downward and a second operation of pressing the sword button 65 at the tip. The frame lamp 66 is arranged around the opening of the front frame 53, and emits light during a game or the like. The speakers 67 are arranged on the upper left and upper right of the front frame 53 to produce sound during a game or the like.

The game board 2 includes a game area 3, a rail member 4, a board lamp 5, an image display device 7, a first board movable body 14, a second board movable body 15, and an illumination panel (light guide plate) 18. , Fixed winning device (navel) 19, first variable winning device 31, second variable winning device 22, gate (through chucker) 28, electric chew 29, electric chew winning opening 34, and large winning device ( It includes an attacker) 36, a general winning opening (ordinary winning opening) 27, an out opening 16, and indicators 40.

The game area 3 is an area in which the game ball launched by the operation of the handle 60 flows down, and a plurality of game nails for guiding the game ball are projected. The rail member 4 is arranged at the left end of the game area 3 and guides the game ball launched by the operation of the handle 60 toward the upper side of the game area 3. The board lamp 5 is arranged on the back side of the game area 3, and irradiates light from the back side of the game area 3. Here, a part of the board lamp 5 is also provided inside each of the first board movable body 14 and the second board movable body 15, and the first board movable body 14 and the second board movable body 15 are provided. Is configured to be capable of producing light emission in a specific manner.

The image display device 7 is provided near the center of the game area 3 and includes a display screen 7a. The image display device 7 may be a liquid crystal display device, or may be another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 has an effect symbol display area in which the effect symbols (decorative symbols) 8L, 8C, 8R) are variably displayed (also referred to as variable display), and a hold image in which the hold images 9A and 9B are displayed. It has a display area and a hold digestion image display area on which the hold digestion image 9C is displayed. The hold images 9A and 9B are images representing hold, and are also called hold icons. The hold digestion image 9C is an image representing the hold, and is also referred to as a hold icon. The hold icon and the hold icon are collectively referred to as a hold icon or an icon.

The effect symbol display area includes three symbol display areas of "left", "middle", and "right". The left effect symbol 8L is displayed in the symbol display area on the left. The middle effect symbol 8C is displayed in the symbol display area inside. The right effect symbol 8R is displayed in the symbol display area on the right. The effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are composed of a plurality of symbols representing numbers from "1" to "9", for example. The variable display of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, which will be described later. The image display device 7 has the first special symbol and the first special symbol displayed by the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b, which will be described later, depending on the combination of the effect symbols displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas. The result of the variable display of the second special symbol (the result of the big hit small hit lottery) can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player.

For example, when a big hit is won, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed with doublet such as "777". If it is out of alignment, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed at a random number such as "637". This makes it easier for the player to grasp the progress of the game. The player can grasp the result of the big hit / small hit lottery by the first special symbol display 41a, the second special symbol display 41b, and the image display device 7. The position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed. Further, the variation display of the effect symbol may be a mode of scrolling in the vertical direction or another mode. Further, when a small hit is won, the effect symbol may be stopped and displayed at a predetermined chance such as "135", or the effect symbol may be stopped and displayed at a random number. What kind of combination of effect symbols is stopped and displayed according to each lottery result is not limited to the above, and can be arbitrarily set. Hereinafter, the effect of displaying the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is also referred to as "variable effect of the effect symbol" or simply "variable effect" and "variable display". In this decorative symbol variation effect, the effect in the period from the start of the change of the special symbol to the final stop (also referred to as the special symbol variation period) is counted as one variation effect (one cycle of variation effect). .. Therefore, even if the decorative symbol may be temporarily stopped during the period from the start of fluctuation of the special symbol to the fixed stop, the effect of the temporary stop is included in the variation effect of the decorative symbol.

The image display device 7 can display on the display screen 7a a jackpot effect performed in parallel with the jackpot game (second special game), a demo effect for waiting for customers, and the like, in addition to the effect symbol variation effect. In the effect symbol variation effect, in addition to the effect symbol, an effect image such as a background image or a character image may be displayed. Further, the image display device 7 can indicate that the special symbol is changing or the lottery result of the special symbol in addition to the effect symbol (fourth symbol, not shown). May be displayed on the display screen 7a. The identification display (fourth symbol) may be displayed by a light emitter such as an LED provided in the game area 3.

The reserved image display area displays a first reserved display area for displaying the reserved image 9A according to the number of stored images of the first special figure reserved, which will be described later, and a reserved image 9B according to the number of stored images for the second special figure reserved, which will be described later. Includes a second hold display area. By displaying the reserved images 9A and 9B, the number of stored first special figure hold displayed on the first special figure hold indicator 43a, which will be described later, and the second special figure hold displayed on the second special figure hold indicator 43b. The number of memories of can be displayed to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. The reserved digestion image display area includes a reserved digestion display area for displaying the reserved digestion image 9C. The hold digestion image 9C corresponds to the effect symbols (effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently changing on the display screen 7a, and depending on the display of the hold digestion image 9C, the first special figure hold or the second special figure hold Can be displayed to the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the image is digested (“digestion of special figure hold” described later).

On the left and right sides of the image display device 7, a movable first board movable body 14 (also referred to as a first movable accessory 14), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is provided. The first movable accessory 14 is configured such that two semiring-shaped members arranged on the left and right sides can move in the left-right direction. The first movable accessory 14 is normally stationary at the retracted positions (FIG. 1) on the left and right sides of the image display device 7, and moves from the retracted position toward the center of the display screen 7a so as to be close to each other (the first movable accessory 14 is stationary). It is possible to move forward) and stand still at the advance position in front of the display screen 7a. The first movable accessory 14 forms a ring-shaped decorative portion when the left and right members are united at the advanced position, and covers a part of the image display device 7.

On the upper side of the image display device 7, a movable second board movable body 15 (also referred to as a second movable accessory 15), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is provided. The second movable accessory 15 is configured such that a rectangular member (decorative portion) described as "OARO" can be moved in the vertical direction. The second movable accessory 15 is normally stationary at the retracted position (FIG. 1) above the image display device 7, and moves (advances) downward from the retracted position toward the center of the display screen 7a to be displayed. It is possible to stand still at the advance position in front of the screen 7a. The second movable accessory 15 covers a part of the image display device 7 when stopped at the advanced position.

A stage portion 11 is formed in the lower portion of the image display device 7. The stage portion 11 has a shape capable of guiding a game ball rolling on the upper surface of the stage portion 11 to the first starting port 20, which will be described later. A warp portion 12 is provided at the lower left of the center decoration body 10. The warp portion 12 includes an inlet portion through which the game ball flows in and an outlet portion through which the game ball flows out, and the game ball flowing in from the inlet portion is discharged from the outlet portion to the stage portion 11.

The illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 is a transparent flat plate member attached to the central opening of the front frame 53, and the game area 3 of the game board 2 can be visually recognized through the illumination panel 18. That is, the illumination panel 18 is arranged in front of the image display device 7, and the image displayed on the image display device 7 is visible through the illumination panel 18. The illumination panel 18 is configured to be able to display a predetermined image on the main surface by irradiating the end surface with LED light. The illumination panel 18 is configured to be able to display a plurality of types of images in a plurality of types of colors depending on the irradiation direction and color of the LED light.

The fixed winning device (navel) 19 is arranged below the image display device 7 in the game area 3, and includes a first starting opening (first starting winning opening, first entry opening, fixed starting opening) 20. The winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 is an opportunity for the first special symbol lottery (big hit small hit lottery). In other words, the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 is an opportunity for acquiring a random number or the like per special symbol and determining a big hit.

The first variable winning device 31 is arranged below the gate 28 in the game area 3, and includes a first starting opening (first starting winning opening, first entering ball opening) 30. The first starting port 30 includes an opening / closing member (first starting port opening / closing member) 32 that allows or hinders the acceptance of the game ball by a swing-type opening / closing operation. The opening / closing member 32 is driven by the first non-electric accessory 33. A game ball can enter the first starting port 30 when the opening / closing member 32 is in the open state. The winning of the game ball to the first starting port 30 is an opportunity for the first special symbol lottery (big hit small hit lottery). In other words, the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 30 is an opportunity for acquiring a random number or the like per special symbol and determining a big hit.

The second variable winning device 22 is arranged below the first starting opening 20 in the game area 3, and includes a second starting opening (second starting winning opening, second winning opening, variable starting opening) 21. The winning of the game ball to the second starting port 21 is an opportunity for the second special symbol lottery (big hit small hit lottery). The second variable winning device 22 includes a movable member 23 that can move forward and backward, and opens and closes the second starting port 21 by the operation of the movable member 23. The movable member 23 is driven by the second non-electric accessory 24. A game ball can enter the second starting port 21 when the movable member 23 is in the open state (advanced state). The second variable winning device 22 only needs to be easier to enter the second starting port 21 when the movable member 23 is in the open state than when it is in the closed state (retracted state), and is in the closed state. Occasionally, it may be possible to enter the second starting port 21.

The gate (through chucker) 28 is arranged on the right side of the image display device 7 in the game area 3, and is configured so that the game ball can pass through. The passage of the game ball to the gate 28 is an opportunity for a normal symbol lottery to determine whether or not to drive the electric chew 29 to open the electric chew winning opening 34. In other words, the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 is an opportunity for the acquisition of a random number per normal symbol, the hit determination, and the like.

The electric chew 29 is a movable member arranged below the gate 28 that can advance and retreat back and forth, and opens and closes the electric chew winning opening 34 by advancing and retreating. The electric chew winning opening 34 allows a game ball to enter when the electric chew 29 is in the open state (advanced state), and it becomes difficult to enter the game ball when the electric chew 29 is in the closed state (evacuated state).

The electric chew winning opening 34 includes a first winning opening 75, a second winning opening 76, and a distribution member 77 inside (see FIG. 14). The game ball that has entered the electric chew winning opening 34 is entered into either the first winning opening 75 or the second winning opening 76 by the distribution member 77. When the ball enters the first winning opening 75, the weight of the entered game ball drives the first non-electric accessory 33 to open the opening / closing member 32. As a result, the first starting port 30 is in a state where the ball can enter. When the game ball enters the first starting port 30, the opening / closing member 32 is closed by the weight of the ball that has entered. When the ball enters the second winning opening 76, the weight of the entered game ball drives the second non-electric accessory 24 to open the movable member 23. As a result, the second starting port 21 is in a state where the ball can enter. When the game ball enters the second starting port 21, the movable member 23 is closed by the weight of the entered game ball. The first non-electric accessory 33 and the second non-electric accessory 24 are so-called non-electric chews. The distribution member 77 distributes the game balls so that the game balls that have entered the electric chew winning opening 34 are entered into either the first winning opening 75 or the second winning opening 76.

Here, the "special symbol lottery" means that when a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 20, 30 or the second starting port 21, a random number for determining a special symbol is acquired, and the acquired random number is used in advance. It refers to a process of determining whether or not a jackpot is a big hit and whether or not it is a small hit by comparing it with a value corresponding to a predetermined "big hit" or "small hit". The lottery results of the "big hit" and the "small hit" are not immediately notified to the player, and the special symbol is variablely displayed on the first special symbol display 41a or the second special symbol display 41b, which will be described later. Then, when the predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, the special symbol corresponding to the lottery result is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), and the player is notified of the lottery result. In the image display device 7, a symbol matching game is played in which the effect symbol is variablely displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol, and the symbol matching game more effectively notifies the player of the lottery result of the big hit.

Further, in the "ordinary symbol lottery", when the game ball passes through the gate 28, a random number for determining the ordinary symbol is acquired, and the acquired random number is compared with a value corresponding to a predetermined "hit". By doing so, it refers to a process of determining whether or not a hit is made. Regarding the lottery result of this ordinary symbol, the lottery result is not immediately notified when the game ball passes through the gate 28, and the ordinary symbol display 42, which will be described later, displays the variation of the ordinary symbol and determines the predetermined variation. When the time has passed, the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result is confirmed (lit or turned off), and the player is notified of the lottery result.

The large winning device (second attacker, second special variable winning device) 36 is arranged below the first starting opening 30 in the game area 3, and includes a large winning opening (special winning opening) 35. The large winning opening 35 includes an opening / closing member (special winning opening opening / closing member, movable member) 37 that hinders or allows acceptance of a game ball by a shutter-type opening / closing operation. The opening / closing member 37 is driven by the large winning opening solenoid 38. The large winning opening 35 allows a game ball to enter when the opening / closing member 37 is in the open state.

The grand prize device 36 internally includes a V region (specific region) 39, a V region sensor 39a, a non-V region (non-specific region) 70, a non-V region sensor 70a, a grand prize opening sensor 35a, and a V. An opening / closing member 71 and a V opening / closing member solenoid 73 are provided. The V region (specific region) 39 and the non-V region (non-specific region) 70 are configured as regions inside the grand prize device 36 through which a game ball that has passed through the grand prize opening 35 can pass. The large winning opening sensor 35a is arranged upstream of the V region 39 and the non-V region 70, and detects the winning of the game ball into the large winning opening 35. The V region sensor 39a is arranged in the V region 39 and detects the passage of the game ball into the V region 39. The non-V region sensor 70a is arranged in the non-V region 70 and detects the passage of the game ball into the non-V region 70. The V opening / closing member 71 distributes the game ball that has passed through the large winning opening 35 to either the V region 39 or the non-V region 70. The V opening / closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening / closing member 71. The V opening / closing member 71 is configured to rotate (clockwise and counterclockwise with respect to the game board 2), and when the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is energized, the V opening / closing member 71 rotates clockwise from the origin position to V the game ball. It is in the first state (rotational state) of distributing to the region 39, and is in the second state (stopped state) of distributing the game ball to the non-V area 70 located at the origin when the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is not energized. The V opening / closing member 71 is not limited to the rotational movement, and may have a function of distributing the game ball that has passed through the first winning opening 30 to either the V region 39 or the non-V region 70. It may be configured to move in the left-right direction with respect to the game board 2. That is, when the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is energized, the game ball is distributed to the V region 39 (first state), and when the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is not energized, the game ball is distributed to the non-V region 70. (Second state) may be configured.

FIG. 2A shows a state in which the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is energized. When the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is energized, the V opening / closing member 71 is in a state of allowing the game ball to pass through the V region 39 (first state). When the V opening / closing member 71 is in the first state, the game ball that has won the large winning opening 35 passes through the large winning opening sensor 35a and then passes through the V region 39 (route A in FIG. 2A). The route of this game ball is called the "first route". FIG. 2B shows a state in which the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is not energized. When the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is not energized, the V opening / closing member 71 is in a state of hindering the passage of the game ball into the V region 39 (second state). When the V opening / closing member 71 is in the second state, the game ball that has won the large winning opening 35 passes through the large winning opening sensor 35a, and then rolls on the upper surface of the V opening / closing member 71 and passes through the non-V region 70. (Route B in FIG. 2B). The route of this game ball is called a "second route". In the gaming machine 1, the passage of the gaming ball into the V region 39 triggers the execution of the jackpot game (second special gaming) described later. That is, the winning or losing lottery of the big hit is also performed depending on whether or not the passing of the game ball into the V region 39 is successful. The jackpot won by the lottery of the first special symbol or the lottery of the second special symbol described above is also referred to as a "type 1 jackpot", and the jackpot won by the passage of the game ball into the V area 39 is also referred to as a "type 2 jackpot".

Returning to FIG. 1, two ordinary winning openings 27 are provided in the lower part of the game area 3. The number of ordinary winning openings 27 can be set arbitrarily. The out port 16 is provided in the lower part of the game area 3, and the game ball that has not won a prize in any of the winning ports is discharged to the outside of the game area 3. The indicators 40 are arranged at the lower right of the game board 2. Details of the indicators 40 will be described later.

The game area 3 includes a left game area 3A on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and a right game area 3B on the right side. The method of firing the game ball so that the game ball flows down in the left game area 3A is called "left hit". On the other hand, a method of launching a game ball so that the game ball flows down in the right game area 3B is called "right-handed hit". In the gaming machine 1, it is possible to aim for a prize in the first starting port 20 by hitting left. On the other hand, it is configured so that it is possible to pass through the gate 28 by hitting right, and to win a prize in the first starting port 30, the second starting port 21, and the large winning opening 35.

FIG. 3 is an enlarged view of the display devices 40. The indicators 40 include a first special symbol indicator 41a, a second special symbol indicator 41b, a normal symbol indicator 42, a first special symbol hold indicator 43a, and a second special symbol hold indicator 43b. , The general figure hold indicator 44, and the like. The first special symbol display 41a variably displays the first special symbol. The second special symbol display 41b variably displays the second special symbol. The ordinary symbol display 42 variably displays the ordinary symbol. The first special figure hold indicator 43a displays the number of stored operations of the first special symbol display 41a (first special figure hold). The second special figure hold indicator 43b displays the number of stored operations of the second special symbol display 41b (second special figure hold). The normal figure hold indicator 44 displays the number of stored operations hold (normal figure hold) of the normal symbol display 42. The variable display of the first special symbol is performed when the game ball is won in the first starting ports 20 and 30. The variable display of the second special symbol is performed when the game ball is won in the second starting port 21. Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are also collectively referred to as "special symbol". Further, the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b are also collectively referred to as "special symbol display 41". Further, the first special figure holding indicator 43a and the second special drawing holding indicator 43b are also collectively referred to as "special figure holding indicator 43".

The special symbol display 41 displays a special symbol (identification information) in a variable manner (variable display) and then stops and displays a lottery (special symbol) based on winning a prize in the first starting port 20, 30 or the second starting port 21. The result of the winning lottery, the big hit small hit lottery) will be notified. The stop-displayed special symbol (stop symbol, special symbol derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one special symbol selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by a special symbol lottery. If the stop symbol is a special symbol (big hit symbol) in a predetermined jackpot stop mode, the jackpot 35 is opened with an open pattern according to the type of jackpot symbol displayed as stopped (type of winning jackpot). A jackpot game (second special game) is performed. In addition, when the stop symbol is a special symbol (small hit symbol) in a predetermined small hit stop mode, an open pattern corresponding to the type of the small hit symbol displayed as stopped (the type of the winning small hit) is used. A small hit game (first special game) that opens the large winning opening 35 is performed. The opening pattern of the large winning opening 35 in the first special game or the second special game will be described later.

The special symbol display 41 is composed of eight LEDs arranged side by side, and displays a special symbol according to the result of a lottery per special symbol depending on the lighting mode thereof. For example, if you win a jackpot (one of the multiple types of jackpots described below), you will see "○○ ●● ○○ ●●" (○: lit, ●: off) from the left, 1 and 2. , The 5th and 6th LEDs are lit to display the jackpot symbol. In addition, when a small hit (one of multiple types of small hits described later) is won, the 5th and 6th LEDs from the left are lit, such as "●●●● ○○ ●●". Display the small hit symbol. If there is a loss, a lost pattern such as "●●●●●●● ○" is displayed, in which only the LED on the far right is lit. A mode in which all the LEDs are turned off may be adopted as a lost pattern. Before the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the special symbol is variablely displayed (variable display) over a predetermined variable time. In the variable display mode, for example, each LED may be turned on so that light repeatedly flows from left to right. The mode of the variable display is not limited to the above mode as long as each LED is not stopped and displayed (lighting display in a specific mode), and any lighting mode can be used. For example, in the variable display mode, all the LEDs may blink at the same time.

In the game machine 1, when a game ball is won (winning) in the first starting port 20, 30 or the second starting port 21, the value of various random numbers such as a random number per special symbol acquired for the winning (winning ball). Numerical information) is temporarily stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 (FIG. 6). Specifically, if a prize is won in the first start ports 20 and 30, it is stored in the first special figure hold storage area 85a (FIG. 6) as the first special figure hold, and the prize is given to the second start port 21. If there is, it is stored in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b (FIG. 6) as the second special figure reservation. There is an upper limit to the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage area 85, and the upper limit values in the present embodiment are four for the first special figure reservation storage area 85a and the second special figure reservation storage area. There are four 85b. The special figure hold stored in the special figure hold storage area 85 is digested when the special symbol can be variably displayed based on the special figure hold. "Digestion of special symbol hold" means to determine a random number or the like per special symbol corresponding to the special symbol hold and execute variable display of the special symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting ports 20, 30 or the second starting port 21 cannot be performed immediately after the winning, that is, the variable display of the special symbol is performed. Even if there is a prize during the execution of the game or the special game (big hit game or small hit game), the right to the big hit small hit lottery for the prize can be reserved up to a predetermined number. The number of special figure hold indicators is displayed on the special figure hold indicator 43. The first special figure holding indicator 43a is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and the second special figure holding indicator 43b is composed of, for example, four LEDs. Each special figure hold indicator 43 displays the number of special figure hold by turning on the LEDs for the number of special figure hold.

The variable display of the normal symbol is performed when the game ball passes through the gate 28. The normal symbol display 42 notifies the result of the normal symbol lottery based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 by displaying the normal symbol in a variable manner (variable display) and then stopping the display. The normal symbol that is stopped and displayed (normal symbol, normal symbol that is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one ordinary symbol selected from a plurality of types of ordinary symbols by the ordinary symbol lottery. When the normal symbol is a predetermined specific normal symbol (ordinary symbol in a predetermined stop mode, that is, a normal hit symbol), the first start port 30 and the second start are started in an open pattern according to the current gaming state. An auxiliary game is performed in which the mouth 21 is opened. The opening patterns of the first starting port 30 and the second starting port 21 will be described later.

The ordinary symbol display 42 is composed of three LEDs, and displays ordinary symbols according to the result of the ordinary symbol lottery depending on the lighting mode thereof. For example, when the lottery result is a win, a normal hit symbol in which the first and second LEDs from the left are lit is displayed, such as "○○ ●" (○: on, ●: off). If the lottery result is lost, a normal lost symbol such as "● ○ ●" in which only the LED in the middle is lit is displayed. A mode in which all the LEDs are turned off may be adopted as a normal loss pattern. Before the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner over a predetermined fluctuation time. In the variable display mode, for example, each LED may be turned on so that light repeatedly flows from left to right. The mode of the variable display is not limited to the above mode as long as each LED is not stopped and displayed (lighting display in a specific mode), and any lighting mode can be used. For example, in the variable display mode, all the LEDs may blink at the same time.

In the game machine 1, when the game ball passes through the gate 28, the value of the random number per normal symbol acquired for the passage is temporarily stored in the normal figure hold storage area 86 (FIG. 6) as the normal figure hold. NS. There is an upper limit to the number of normal figure reservations that can be stored in the normal figure reservation storage area 86, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is one. The normal figure hold stored in the normal figure hold storage area 86 is digested when the variable display of the normal symbol based on the normal figure hold becomes possible. The digestion of the normal symbol hold means to determine a random number per normal symbol corresponding to the normal symbol hold and execute variable display of the normal symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in the game machine 1, when the variable display of the normal symbol based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 cannot be performed immediately after the passage, that is, the prize is won during the execution of the variable display of the normal symbol or the execution of the auxiliary game. Even if there is, the right of ordinary symbol lottery for passing the predetermined number can be reserved up to the predetermined number. The number of the normal figure hold is displayed on the normal figure hold indicator 44. The normal figure hold indicator 44 is composed of, for example, one LED, and displays the number of normal figure hold by turning on the LEDs as many as the number of the normal figure hold.

2. Electrical configuration of the gaming machine The electrical configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 and 5. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration on the main control board side of the gaming machine 1. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration on the sub-control board side of the gaming machine 1. The gaming machine 1 includes a main control board 80 (FIG. 4), a sub control board 90 (FIG. 5), an image control board 100 (FIG. 5), a lamp control board 107 (FIG. 5), and a voice control board 106 (FIG. 5). FIG. 5) and a payout control board 110 (FIG. 4) are provided. The main control board 80 is a game control board that controls game profits such as a big hit / small hit lottery and a transition of a game state, and constitutes a main control unit. The sub-control board 90 is an effect control board that controls the effect to be executed as the game progresses, and constitutes a sub-control unit together with the image control board 100, the lamp control board 107, and the voice control board 106. The sub control unit can be configured as long as it includes at least the sub control board 90.

The main control board 80 includes a game control microcomputer 81 and an input / output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the main control board 80, and controls the progress of the game of the game machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a main ROM 83 that stores a program for controlling the progress of the game, a main RAM 84 that is used as a work memory, and a main CPU 82 that executes a program stored in the main ROM 83. Includes. The details of the data stored in the main ROM 83 and the details of the storage area provided in the main RAM 84 will be described later. The main ROM 83 may be configured as an external ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits / receives data to / from another board or the like via an input / output circuit (I / O port unit) 87. The input / output circuit 87 may be built in the game control microcomputer 81.

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via the input / output circuit 87 and the relay board 88. The main control board 80 inputs signals output from each sensor and outputs signals to each solenoid. As the sensors connected via the relay board 88, the first start port sensor 20a, the second start port sensor 21a, the gate sensor 28a, the first start port sensor 30a, the grand prize opening sensor 35a, the V area sensor 39a, and the like. A non-V region sensor 70a and a normal winning opening sensor 27a are exemplified. It is connected via the relay board 88. The first start port sensor 20a is provided inside the first start port 20, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the first start port 20. The second start port sensor 21a is provided inside the second start port 21, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the second start port 21. The gate sensor 28a is provided inside the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28. The first start port sensor 30a is provided inside the first start port 30, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the first start port 30. The large winning opening sensor 35a is provided inside the large winning opening 35, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the large winning opening 35. The V region sensor 39a is provided in the V region 39 inside the large winning opening 35, and detects a game ball that has passed through the V region 39. The non-V region sensor 70a is provided in the non-V region 70 inside the large winning opening 35, and detects a game ball that has passed through the non-V region 70. The ordinary winning opening sensor 27a is provided inside the ordinary winning opening 27, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the ordinary winning opening 27.

Examples of the solenoids include an electric chew solenoid 29a, a distribution member solenoid 77a, a large winning opening solenoid 38, and a V opening / closing member solenoid 73. The electric chew solenoid 29a drives the electric chew 29. The distribution member solenoid 77a drives the distribution member 77. The grand prize opening solenoid 38 drives the opening / closing member 37 of the grand prize device 36. The V opening / closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening / closing member 71 of the large winning opening 35.

The indicators 40 are connected to the main control board 80 via the input / output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special symbol hold indicator 43a, a second special symbol hold indicator 43b, and a normal symbol display. The display control of the display 44 is performed.

The payout control board 110 is connected to the main control board 80 via the input / output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110, and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring. The prize ball payout device 120, the ball rental ball payout device 130, and the card unit 135 are connected to the payout control board 110, and the launch device 112 is connected via the launch control circuit 111. The prize ball payout device 120 pays out the prize balls. The payout control board 110 drives the prize ball motor 121 of the prize ball payout device 120 to pay out the prize balls based on the signal from the game control microcomputer 81. The prize balls to be paid out are detected by the prize ball sensor 122 for counting. The ball rental payout device 130 pays out the ball rental. The payout control board 110 drives the ball lending motor 131 of the ball lending device 130 to pay out the ball lending based on the signal from the card unit 135 connected to the gaming machine 1. The ball lending to be paid out is detected by the ball lending sensor 132 for counting. The card unit 135 is arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 1 and outputs information regarding ball lending based on information such as an inserted prepaid card. The launcher 112 includes a handle 60 (FIG. 1), a launch motor 113, a touch switch 114, and a launch volume 115. When the player operates the handle 60, the launching device 112 detects the contact of the handle 60 by the touch switch 114, and detects the rotation amount of the handle 60 by the firing volume 115. Then, the launch motor 113 is driven so that the game ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the launch volume 115.

A sub control board 90 (FIG. 5) is connected to the main control board 80 via an input / output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90 is a unidirectional communication connection capable of only transmitting a signal from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90. That is, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) (not shown) as a communication direction regulating means is interposed between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90.

The sub-control board 90 includes an effect control microcomputer 91 and an input / output circuit 95. The effect control microcomputer 91 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the sub control board 90, and controls the effect of the game of the gaming machine 1 according to a program. The effect control microcomputer 91 is a sub ROM 93 that stores a program or the like for controlling the effect as the game progresses, a sub RAM 94 that is used as a work memory, and a sub that executes a program stored in the sub ROM 93. The CPU 92 and the like are included. The details of the data stored in the sub ROM 93 and the details of the storage area provided in the sub RAM 94 will be described later. The sub ROM 93 may be configured as an external ROM. The effect control microcomputer 91 transmits / receives data to / from another board or the like via an input / output circuit (I / O port unit) 95. The input / output circuit 95 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 91. The image control board 100, the voice control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the relay board 108 are connected to the sub control board 90 via an input / output circuit 95.

The image control board 100 includes an image control microcomputer 101, an input circuit 105a, and an output circuit 105b. The image control microcomputer 101 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the image control board 100, and controls the display of the image display device 7 according to a program. The image control microcomputer 101 includes a CPU 102, a ROM 103, and a RAM 104. In the ROM 103, in addition to a program for performing display control, still image data and moving image data displayed on the image display device 7, specifically, characters, items, figures, characters, numbers, symbols, etc. (effect patterns are displayed). Image data such as) and background images are stored. The RAM 104 is used as a memory for expanding image data. The CPU 102 executes the program stored in the ROM 103. The effect control microcomputer 91 causes the image control microcomputer 101 to control the display of the image display device 7 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The image control microcomputer 101 reads image data from the ROM 103 based on a command from the effect control microcomputer 91, and performs display control based on the read image data.

A speaker 67 is connected to the voice control board 106, and the effect control microcomputer 91 receives voice, music, and sound effects from the speaker 67 via the voice control board 106 based on a command received from the main control board 80. Etc. are output. Acoustic data such as audio output from the speaker 67 is stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90. The voice control board 106 may be equipped with a CPU, and the CPU may be made to execute voice control based on a command. Further, the voice control board 106 may mount a ROM, or may store acoustic data in the ROM. Further, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100, and the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 may execute voice control. Further, the acoustic data may be stored in the ROM 103 of the image control board 100.

The frame lamp 66, the panel lamp 5, the first movable accessory 14, and the second movable accessory 15 are connected to the lamp control board 107, and control these. Based on the command received from the main control board 80, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 (the lamps of the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15) via the lamp control board 107. Control the lighting of lamps such as). That is, the effect control microcomputer 91 creates light emission pattern data (data that determines lighting / extinguishing, emission color, etc., also referred to as lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5. The light emission of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 is controlled according to the data. The data stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90 is used to create the light emission pattern data. The effect control microcomputer 91 operates the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The effect control microcomputer 91 creates operation pattern data (drive data) that determines the operation modes of the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15, and these movable accessories are created according to the operation pattern data. Control the operation. The data stored in the sub ROM 93 is used to create the operation pattern data. The lamp control board 107 may be equipped with a CPU, and the CPU may be used to execute command-based lamp lighting control and movable accessory operation control. In this case, the lamp control board 107 may mount a ROM, and the ROM may store data related to a light emission pattern and an operation pattern.

An effect button detection switch 63a and a select button detection switch 68a are connected to the relay board 108. The effect button detection switch 63a detects that the effect button 63 has been pressed. When the effect button 63 is pressed, a switch signal is output from the effect button detection switch 63a to the sub control board 90 via the relay board 108. The select button detection switch 68a detects that the select button 68 has been pressed. Further, the sub-control board 90 can cause the effect button 63 and the select button 68 to execute the light emission effect via the relay board 108.

3. 3. Data structure of the gaming machine The data structure of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 and 7. FIG. 6A is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the main ROM 83. FIG. 6B is a diagram for explaining a storage area provided in the main RAM 84. FIG. 7A is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the sub ROM 93. FIG. 7B is a diagram for explaining a storage area provided in the sub RAM 94.

The main ROM 83 (FIG. 6 (A)) includes a special symbol hit determination table T1, a reach determination table T2, a special symbol hit type determination table T3, a special symbol variation pattern determination table T4, and a normal symbol hit determination table T5. A normal symbol hit type determination table T6, a normal symbol variation pattern determination table T7, an electric chew opening pattern determination table T8, and a large winning opening opening pattern determination table T9 are stored. These determination tables are referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) executed by the game control microcomputer 81. The specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

The main RAM 84 (FIG. 6B) includes a command set area 84a, a flag set area 84b, a counter set area 84c, a special operation status set area 84d, a special figure hold storage area 85, and a normal figure hold storage. A region 86 is provided. The command set area 84a is an area (output buffer) in which commands output from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side are set in the main control main process (described later), and is a fluctuation start command, a fluctuation stop command, and an opening. Command, round specification command, ending command, game state specification command, V passage command, pre-judgment command, customer waiting wait command, hold ball number command, normal symbol fluctuation start command, normal symbol fluctuation stop command, normal symbol opening command, normal The symbol ending command etc. are set. The flag set area 84b is an area in which a flag indicating the state of the game machine or the game state is set in the main control main process (described later), and is a jackpot flag, a jackpot end flag, a small hit flag, a small hit end flag, and V. A flag, a ceiling flag, a time saving flag, a V opening / closing member operation flag, etc. are set. The counter set area 84c is an area in which a counter used in the main control main process (described later) is set, and is a random number counter, a round counter, a ceiling counter, a first time reduction counter, a second time reduction counter, a third time reduction counter, and the like. Is set. The special operation status set area 84d is an area in which the status in the special operation process (FIG. 20) described later is set. The special figure reservation storage area 85 includes a first special figure reservation storage area 85a in which the first special figure reservation is stored and a second special figure reservation storage area 85b in which the second special figure reservation is stored. In the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, the first to fourth storage areas (holding information) for storing random number value groups (holding information) such as random numbers per special symbol corresponding to the first to fourth items of the first special figure reservation are stored. Is provided. The second special figure reservation storage area 85b is provided with first to fourth storage areas for storing random value groups (hold information) corresponding to the first to fourth items of the second special figure reservation. The normal figure hold storage area 86 is provided with a first storage area for storing a random number value group (hold information) such as a random number per normal symbol corresponding to the first normal figure hold. In addition to the above area, the main RAM 84 is provided with a hit type set buffer in which special figure stop symbol data is set, a drive data buffer in which drive data for driving the decorative movable body 15 is set, and the like. Has been done. The information stored in the main RAM 84 is not cleared even when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off and on, and is maintained as it is. That is, the status of the above commands, flags, counters, status information, and hold information does not change even when the power is turned off and on, and the information is maintained. On the other hand, the information stored in the main RAM 84 is reset by the ram clear of the gaming machine 1. When reset, the ceiling flag is set to "ON" and the other flags are set to "OFF" as the initial state of the flag. Further, as an initial state of the counter, a predetermined value (for example, 500) is set in the ceiling counter, and "0" is set in the other counters.

The sub ROM 93 (FIG. 7A) stores a variable effect pattern determination table T51, a stop symbol pattern determination table T52, a time saving effect scenario determination table T54, and a look-ahead effect pattern determination table T55. These determination tables are referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91 in the sub-control main process (described later) executed by the effect control microcomputer 91. The specific contents of each decision table will be described later.

The sub-RAM 94 (FIG. 7B) is provided with a command storage area 94a, an effect command set area 94b, a pre-determination information storage area 94c, and a counter set area 94d. The command storage area 94a is an area (input buffer) in which commands input from the main control unit side are stored in the sub-control main process (described later), and is a fluctuation start command, a fluctuation stop command, an opening command, and a round designation command. , Ending command, game state specification command, V passage command, pre-judgment command, customer waiting standby command, hold ball number command, normal symbol fluctuation start command, normal symbol fluctuation stop command, normal symbol opening command, normal symbol ending command, etc. Stored. The effect command set area 94b is an area (output buffer) in which commands output from the sub control board 90 to the image control board 100, the lamp control board 107, and the voice control board 106 are set in the sub control main process (described later). Yes, variable effect start command, variable effect end command, opening effect start command, round effect start command, ending effect start command, normal symbol variable effect start command, normal symbol variable effect end command, normal symbol opening effect start command, normal symbol The ending production start command etc. are set. The pre-determination information storage area 94c stores pre-determination information in the sub-control main process (described later). The counter set area 94d is an area in which a counter used in the sub-control main process (described later) is set, and is a random number counter, a first special figure hold effect counter, a second special figure hold effect counter, and a normal figure hold effect counter. , The first time saving effect counter, the second time saving effect counter, the third time saving effect counter, the ceiling effect counter, and the like are set. Of the information stored in the sub-RAM 94, except for the evening-over effect counter (not shown), the information is not cleared even when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off and on, and is maintained as it is. That is, the state of the above command, the counter other than the evening effect counter, and the pre-judgment information does not change even when the power is turned off and on, and the information is maintained. The evening-over effect counter is reset by turning the power of the gaming machine 1 off and on, and 0 is set as the initial state. The information stored in the sub RAM 94 is reset by the ram clear of the gaming machine 1. When reset, a predetermined value (for example, 500) is set in the ceiling effect counter and 0 is set in the other counters as the initial state of the counter.

FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining various random numbers used in the gaming machine 1. FIG. 8A shows a random number acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 on the main control unit side, and FIG. 8B shows a random number acquired by the effect control microcomputer 91 on the sub control unit side. There is. The game control microcomputer 81 includes "special symbol per random number", "special symbol per type random number", "reach random number", "variable pattern random number", "ordinary symbol per random number", and "ordinary symbol per type". It is configured to acquire "random numbers" at the timings described later. The "special symbol per random number" is a random number used for a lottery of big hit, small hit, loss (sudden time reduction), or loss (big hit small hit lottery), and takes a value in the range of 0 to 65535. The "special symbol hit type random number" is a random number used for a lottery (winning type determination) of the winning big hit or small hit type, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "reach random number" is a random number used to determine whether or not to generate reach in the effect symbol variation effect indicating the result when the big hit / small hit determination is lost, and is in the range of 0 to 127. Takes the value of. Reach is a state in which there is only one effect symbol that is variablely displayed among a plurality of effect symbols (decorative symbols), and it depends on which symbol the variable display effect symbol is stopped and displayed. It is a state (for example, a state of "7 ↓ 7") in which a combination of production symbols indicating a big hit and a small hit is won. The effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the reach state may be displayed as if it is shaking in the display screen 7a. The “variation pattern random number” is a random number used to determine a fluctuation pattern including a fluctuation time, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "random number per ordinary symbol" is a random number used in a winning lottery (ordinary symbol lottery) as to whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening the first variable winning device 31 and the second variable winning device 22, and is from 0 to 255. Takes a value in the range of. The "ordinary symbol per type random number" is a random number used in the lottery (winning type determination) of the winning type won in the ordinary symbol lottery, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 65535. "Random number per special symbol", "Random number type per special symbol", "Reach random number", and "Fluctuating pattern random number" are acquired based on the entry into the starting port (first starting port 20 or second starting port 21). Will be done. The random number value group acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 20 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, and the random number value group acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 21 is stored. It is stored in the second special figure reserved storage area 85b. The "random number per ordinary symbol" and the "random number per type per ordinary symbol" are acquired based on the passage of the gate 28. The acquired random value per normal symbol and the random value per type of normal symbol are stored in the normal symbol reservation storage area 86.

The effect control microcomputer 91 is configured to acquire a "variable effect pattern random number", a "time saving effect scenario random number", and a "look-ahead effect random number" at a timing described later. The “variable effect pattern random number” is a random number used to determine the variable effect pattern, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "chance-up random number" is a random number used to determine the chance-up effect at the time of the variable effect, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The “look-ahead effect random number” is a random number used to determine the look-ahead effect at the time of the variable effect, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The “variation effect pattern random number” is acquired based on the fact that the variation start command is output from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side. The acquired random number value is stored in the sub RAM 94. The "chance-up random number" is acquired based on the fact that the fluctuation start command is output from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side. The acquired random number value is stored in the sub RAM 94. The "look-ahead effect random number" is acquired based on the output of the pre-determination command from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side. The acquired random number value is stored in the sub RAM 94.

FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining the special symbol hit determination table T1 and the reach determination table T2. FIG. 9A shows a diagram for explaining the special symbol hit determination table T1, and FIG. 9B shows a diagram for explaining the reach determination table T2.

In the special symbol hit determination table T1, the random value per special symbol (any of 0 to 65535) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) is "big hit", "small hit", and "loss". (Sudden time reduction) ”or“ Loss ”is a table that is referred to to determine whether it corresponds to. In FIG. 9A, in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1), when the random number value per special symbol is "0 to 210", it is determined as "big hit" and the random number value per special symbol is " If it is "1000 to 10500", it is judged as "small hit", and if the random number value per special symbol is "2000 to 22100", it is judged as "missing (sudden time reduction)" and the random number value per special symbol is In the case of a numerical value other than the above among 0 to 65535, it is shown that it is determined to be "missing". Further, in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2), when the random number value per special symbol is "0 to 210", it is determined as "big hit", and the random number value per special symbol is 0 to 65535 as described above. In the case of a numerical value other than, it is shown that it is judged as a "small hit".

In the reach determination table T2, the reach random number value (any of 0 to 127) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to "with reach" or "without reach". It is a table referred to for determining whether or not. In FIG. 9B, when the reach random number value is “0 to 13” in the “non-time saving state”, it is determined that there is “reach”, and the reach random number value is a numerical value other than “0 to 13” (14 to 13). In the case of "127)", it is shown that it is determined as "no reach". Further, in the "time saving state", when the reach random number value is "0 to 5", it is determined that there is "reach", and when the reach random number value is "a numerical value other than 0 to 5 (6 to 127)". Is shown to be determined as "no reach". The contents of the "time saving state" and the "non-time saving state" will be described later. In the reach determination table T2, the time-saving state is less likely to reach when lost than the non-time-saving state. This is to speed up the digestion speed of the special figure hold by selecting more non-reach loss with a short fluctuation time in the time saving state.

The special symbol per type determination table T3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the special symbol per type determination table T3 in the lottery of the special figure 1. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining the special symbol per type determination table T3 in the lottery of the special figure 2. The special symbol hit type determination table T3 is set to "big hit type" or "big hit type" according to the special symbol hit type random value (any of 0 to 127) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later). It is a table referred to for determining "small hit type" and "special symbol type". In FIG. 10, when the “big hit” is won in the lottery of the special figure 1 in the “non-time saving state” and the special symbol hit type random value is “0 to 15”, the big hit type is “5R time saving 150 times big hit”. The stop symbol of the special figure 1 (the stop symbol of the special figure 1) which is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41a is determined to be the "time saving symbol 1". When the special symbol hit type random value is "16 to 127", the jackpot type is determined to be "5R time saving 100 times jackpot", and the special figure 1 stop symbol is determined to be "time saving symbol 2". On the other hand, in the case of "small hit winning" in the lottery of special figure 1 in the "non-time saving state", the small hit type is different regardless of the special symbol hit type random value (any of 0 to 127). It is determined that "3R normal small hit symbol (V passage is practically impossible)", and the special figure 1 stop symbol is determined to be "small hit symbol 1 without time reduction".

When a "big hit" is won in the lottery of special figure 1 in the "time saving state", the jackpot type is "3R time saving 100 times big hit" regardless of the random value of the type per special symbol (regardless of 0 to 127). Is determined, and the special figure 1 stop symbol is determined to be "time saving symbol 3". On the other hand, in the case of "small hit winning" in the lottery of special figure 1 in the "time saving state", the small hit type is "regardless of the random value of the special symbol per type random value (any of 0 to 127)". It is determined that "3R normal small hit (substantially impossible to pass V)", and the special figure 1 stop symbol is determined to be "small hit symbol 2 without time reduction".

In FIG. 11, when the “big hit” is won in the lottery of the special figure 2 in the “non-time saving state”, the big hit type is “3R” regardless of the special symbol hit type random value (any of 0 to 127). It is determined that the time reduction is one big hit, and the stop symbol of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 stop symbol) that is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 41b is determined to be the time reduction symbol 1. On the other hand, when "small hit winning" is won in the lottery of special figure 2 in "non-time saving state", when the special symbol hit type random value is "0 to 63", the small hit type is "3R time saving 1 time small". It is determined that "hit (V can pass)", and the special figure 2 stop symbol of special figure 2 is determined to be "small hit symbol 1 with time reduction" on the second special symbol display 41b. When the special symbol hit type random value is "64 to 127", the small hit type is determined to be "3R normal small hit (V can pass)", and the special figure 2 stop symbol is "time reduction no small hit symbol 1". Is determined.

When the special figure 2 lottery in the "time saving state" is "big hit winning", if the special symbol hit type random value is "0 to 79", the big hit type is determined to be "5R time saving 1 big hit". Special figure 2 The stop symbol is determined to be "time saving symbol 2". When the random value of the type per special symbol is "80 to 127", the jackpot type is determined to be "3R time reduction 1 time jackpot", and the special figure 2 stop symbol is determined to be "time reduction symbol 3". On the other hand, when "small hit winning" is won in the lottery of special figure 2 in "time saving state", when the special symbol hit type random value is "0 to 63", the small hit type is "3R time saving 1 small hit". (V can pass) ”is determined, and the special figure 2 stop symbol is determined to be“ time saving small hit symbol 2 ”. When the special symbol hit type random value is "64 to 127", the small hit type is determined to be "3R normal small hit (V can pass)", and the special figure 2 stop symbol is "time reduction no small hit symbol 2". Is determined. By referring to the special symbol per type determination table T3, in addition to the "special symbol stop symbol data" corresponding to the special symbol stop symbol (special symbol 1 stop symbol and special symbol 2 stop symbol), the "opening" of the special game (OP) command, "round designation command", and "ending (ED) command" can also be specified. The specific contents of each big hit and each small hit will be described later.

FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4. The special symbol variation pattern determination table T4 is a table referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 for determining the variation pattern according to the variation pattern random value (0 to 127) acquired in the main control main process (described later). Is. In FIG. 12, for example, when the first starting ports 20 and 30 are won in the non-time saving state, the special symbol hit determination table T1 determines "big hit", and the fluctuation pattern random value is "111-127", It is shown that the variation pattern is determined to be "P2". Further, for example, in the non-time saving state, the first starting ports 20 and 30 are won, the special symbol hit determination table T1 determines "missing", the reach determination table T2 determines "no reach", and the number of reserved balls is increased. In the case of "1 to 2", it is shown that the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P6" regardless of the fluctuation pattern random value (any of 0 to 127). Further, for example, when the second starting port 21 is won in the time saving state and it is determined as "small hit" in the special symbol hit determination table T1, regardless of the fluctuation pattern random value (any of 0 to 127). ), It is shown that the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P14". As shown in FIG. 12, if the fluctuation pattern is determined, the fluctuation time is also determined. In addition, when it becomes a reach, it is also determined whether the reach becomes a normal reach or a super reach (SP reach). Also, when it comes to super reach, it is also decided whether or not there is a pseudo-ream.

FIG. 13 (A) shows a diagram for explaining the ordinary symbol hit determination table T5, and FIG. 13 (B) shows a diagram for explaining the ordinary symbol hit type determination table T6. In 13 (C), a diagram for explaining the ordinary symbol variation pattern determination table T7 is shown. In the normal symbol hit determination table T5, the random value per normal symbol (any of 0 to 255) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to "hit" or "misses". It is a table that is referred to to determine whether it is applicable. In FIG. 13 (A), in the lottery of the normal symbol (normal figure) in the "non-time saving state", when the random number value per normal symbol is "0 to 2", it is determined as "hit" and the normal symbol hit disorder. When the numerical value is "a numerical value other than the above among 0 to 254", it is shown that it is determined to be "missing". In the lottery of ordinary symbols (ordinary symbols) in the "time saving state", if the random number value per ordinary symbol is "0 to 254", it is judged as "hit" and the random number value per ordinary symbol is "0 to 254". In the case of "a numerical value other than the above", it is shown that it is determined to be "missing".

The normal symbol hit type determination table T6 includes "hit type" and "hit type" according to the normal symbol hit type random value (any of 0 to 65535) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later). It is a table referred to for determining "type of ordinary symbol". In FIG. 13 (B), when a winner is won in the lottery of a normal figure in the "non-time saving state", the winning type is "short open" regardless of the random value of the normal symbol per type (any of 0 to 65535). It is shown that the normal symbol stop symbol is determined to be "winning symbol 1". On the other hand, in the case of winning in the lottery of the general drawing in the "time saving state", the reference portion of the determination table T6 differs depending on the trigger when the gaming state becomes the time saving state. Specifically, among a time reduction (time reduction after big hit), during the time reduction state executed after winning the special figure 1 lottery, and during b time reduction (play time) and c time reduction (sudden time reduction) When winning in the lottery, as shown in "Special Figure 1 Time Saving State" in FIG. 13 (B), when the random value of the type per normal symbol is "0 to 65300", the winning type is "long open 1". The stop symbol (normal symbol stop symbol) of the normal symbol that is determined and stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display 42 is determined to be "hit symbol 2". When the normal symbol hit type random value is "65301 to 65535", the hit type is determined to be "long open 2", and the normal symbol stop symbol is determined to be "win symbol 3". a. Of the time saving (time saving after big hit), when winning in the lottery of the regular figure during the time saving state executed after winning the special figure 2 lottery, as shown in "Special figure 2 time saving state" of FIG. 13 (B). In addition, regardless of the random value of the normal symbol per type (any of 0 to 65535), the hit type is determined to be "long open 2", and the stop symbol of the normal symbol that is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display 42. (Normal symbol stop symbol) is determined to be "hit symbol 3".

The ordinary symbol variation pattern determination table T7 is a table referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 for determining the variation time of the ordinary figure according to the lottery result and the winning type of the ordinary figure in the main control main process (described later). Is. In FIG. 13C, for example, when the lottery result of the normal map in the non-time saving state is "hit" and the hit type is "short open", the fluctuation time of the normal map is determined to be "1 second". Is shown. Further, for example, it is shown that when the lottery result of the normal map in the time saving state is "missing", the fluctuation time of the normal map is determined to be "1 second".

FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining the electric chew opening pattern determination table T8. The electric chew opening pattern determination table T8 is used by the game control microcomputer 81 to determine the opening pattern of the electric chew 29 according to the normal figure stop symbol (normal figure stop symbol data) in the main control main process (described later). This is the referenced table. In FIG. 14A, for example, when the normal symbol stop symbol is “hit symbol 1”, the open pattern of the electric chew 29 is determined to be “open pattern 11”, and for example, the normal symbol stop symbol is “hit symbol”. At the time of "3", it is shown that the opening pattern is determined to be "opening pattern 13".

When the opening pattern of the electric chew 29 is the "opening pattern 11", it is difficult to win a game ball in either the first variable winning device 31 or the second variable winning device 22. In the "open pattern 12", it is easy to win the game ball in the first variable winning device 31, but it is difficult to win the game ball in the second variable winning device 22. In the "open pattern 13", it is difficult to win the game ball in the first variable winning device 31, while it becomes easy to win the game ball in the second variable winning device 22. The mechanism will be described below.

FIG. 14B shows the contents of each opening pattern 11 to 13. In the opening pattern 11, after winning the regular drawing lottery, the electric chew 29 having an opening (OP) time of 0.01 seconds, an opening time of 0.02 seconds, and an ending (ED) time of 0.01 seconds is opened once. In the opening pattern 12, the electric chew 29 having an opening (OP) time of 0.01 seconds, an opening time of 3 seconds, and an ending (ED) time of 0.01 seconds is opened once. In the opening pattern 13, the electric chew 29 having an opening (OP) time of 5 seconds, an opening time of 3 seconds, and an ending (ED) time of 0.01 seconds is opened once. However, the opening of the electric chew 29 is closed even if the opening time remains when a predetermined number of game balls are won.

FIG. 14C shows the opening patterns 11 to 13 and the moving direction of the game ball. The electric chew winning opening 34 is provided with a first winning opening 75, a second winning opening 76, and a distribution member 77 inside. The game ball that has entered the electric chew winning opening 34 is entered into either the first winning opening 75 or the second winning opening 76 by the distribution member 77. The distribution member 77 is in a state in which the game ball enters the first winning opening 75 and does not enter the second winning opening 76 for 4 seconds from the opening (OP) time after winning the general drawing lottery (first state). To maintain. After that, the direction is switched so that the game ball does not enter the first winning opening 75 for 5 seconds, and the state of entering the second winning opening 76 (second state) is maintained. After that, the direction is switched again and the first state is reached. In the opening pattern 11, since the opening time (advancement position time) of the electric chew 29 is 0.02 seconds, the game ball flowing down the right game area 3B cannot be drawn into the electric chew winning opening 34. Therefore, even if the electric chew 29 executes the opening pattern 11, the game ball does not win the electric chew winning opening 34. In the opening pattern 12, the electric chew 29 is opened (moved to the advance position) for 3 seconds after the opening (OP) time of 0.01 seconds. Since the distribution member 77 is in the first state in which the game ball enters the first winning opening 75 and does not enter the second winning opening 76 for 4 seconds from the opening (OP) time, the electric chew 29 is open. The game ball that has entered the electric chew winning opening 34 always enters the first winning opening 75. When the ball enters the first winning opening 75, the weight of the entered game ball drives the first non-electric accessory 33 to open the opening / closing member 32. As a result, the first starting port 30 is in a state where the ball can enter. When the game ball enters the first starting port 30, the opening / closing member 32 is closed by the weight of the ball that has entered. In the opening pattern 13, the electric chew 29 is opened (moved to the advance position) for 3 seconds after the opening (OP) time of 5 seconds. The distribution member 77 maintains the first state for 4 seconds from the opening (OP) time, and then prevents the game ball from entering the first winning opening 75 and enters the second winning opening 76. Since the state is switched to the state, the game ball that has entered the electric chew winning opening 34 while the electric chew 29 is open always enters the second winning opening 76. When the ball enters the second winning opening 76, the weight of the entered game ball drives the second non-electric accessory 24 to open the movable member 23. As a result, the second starting port 21 is in a state where the ball can enter. When the game ball enters the second starting port 21, the movable member 23 is closed by the weight of the entered game ball.

FIG. 15 is a diagram for explaining the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T9. In the game control microcomputer 81, in the main control main process (described later), the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T9 shows the first large winning opening 30 and the large winning opening according to the special figure stop symbol (special figure stop symbol data). It is a table referred to for determining the opening pattern of 35. In FIG. 15A, when the special figure stop symbol data is “11H”, “12H”, and “25H”, the opening pattern of the first large winning opening 30 and the large winning opening 35 is determined to be “opening pattern 21”. , When the special symbol stop symbol data is "15H", "21H", "26H", the open pattern is determined to be "open pattern 22", and when the special symbol stop symbol data is "13H", "16H", it is open. It is shown that the pattern is determined to be "open pattern 23", and when the special figure stop symbol data is "22H", "13H", "27H", "28H", the open pattern is determined to be "open pattern 24". Has been done.

FIG. 15B shows the contents of each opening pattern 21 to 24. In the opening pattern 21, after the opening (OP) for 6 seconds, the large winning opening 35 having an opening number of 1 time and an opening time of 29.5 seconds is opened in the 1st to 5th rounds. The V-opening / closing member 71 remains closed. In the opening pattern 22, after the opening (OP) for 6 seconds, the large winning opening 35 with an opening number of 1 time and an opening time of 29.5 seconds is opened at the 1st to 3rd rounds. The V-opening / closing member 71 remains closed. In the opening pattern 23, after the opening (OP) for 4 seconds, the large winning opening 35 with an opening number of 1 time and an opening time of 29.5 seconds is opened at the 1st to 3rd rounds. After the opening (OP), the V opening / closing member 71 is opened / closed at a predetermined timing. In the opening pattern 24, after the opening (OP) for 0.01 seconds, the large winning opening 35 having an opening number of 1 time and an opening time of 29.5 seconds is opened at the 1st to 3rd rounds. After the opening (OP), the V opening / closing member 71 is opened / closed at a predetermined timing. The opening of the large winning opening 35 is closed even if the opening time remains when a predetermined number of game balls have been won (specified number of winnings, maximum of 9).

4. Explanation of jackpots, etc. In game machine 1, there are "big hits", "small hits", and "misses" as a result of a special symbol lottery (big hits and small hits lottery). In the case of "big hit", the "big hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. In the case of "small hit", the "small hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. At the time of "missing", the "missing symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. When the jackpot is won, a "big hit game (second special game)" that opens the jackpot 35 is executed with an opening pattern corresponding to the type of special symbol (type of jackpot) that is stopped and displayed. If you win a small hit, the big winning opening 35 will be opened once (1st round) with an opening pattern according to the type of special symbol (type of small hit) that is stopped and displayed. ) ”Is executed. Then, when the game ball enters the V area 39 inside the large winning opening 35 during the execution of the small hit game, the large winning (2nd and 3rd rounds) is won in the opening pattern according to the type of the winning small hit. A "big hit game (second special game)" that opens the mouth 35 is executed. The jackpot game executed based on the result of the special symbol lottery being a jackpot winning is also referred to as a "type 1 jackpot game". Further, the jackpot game executed based on the passage of the game ball into the V region 39 is also referred to as a "two-kind jackpot game". In addition, big hit games and small hit games are also called "special games". This special game may include a round in which the large winning opening is opened multiple times in one round.

The jackpot game consists of multiple round games (unit open games) that open the big prize opening 35, an opening (OP) before the first round game starts, and an ending after the final round game ends. (ED) and are included. Each round game starts with the end of the opening or the end of the previous round game and ends with the start of the next round game. The closing time (interval time) of the large winning opening 35 between round games is included in the open round game before the closing. The small hit game is a small hit open game that opens the first (1R) large winning opening 35, an opening before the small hit open game is started (interval before opening), and a small hit open game is completed. Includes the later ending (interval after closure).

There are multiple types of jackpots. Here, as the jackpot type, "5R time reduction 150 times jackpot", "5R time reduction 100 times jackpot", "5R time reduction 1 time jackpot", and "3R time reduction 1 time jackpot" are set. These jackpots are jackpots that control the game state to the "time saving state and high base state" described later after executing the jackpot game (type 1 jackpot game) in which the jackpot 35 is opened over 5R or 3R. On the other hand, these hits differ in the number of time reductions at which the "time reduction state and high base state" after the big hit game ends. Here, the "time reduction number" is the number of variable display (variable display) of the special symbol that can be executed in the "time reduction state and high base state" after the jackpot game, and is preset for each jackpot type. For example, in "5R time reduction 150 times jackpot", the number of time reductions is 150 times, and in "5R time reduction 100 times jackpot", the number of time reductions is 100 times. It should be noted that the "time saving state and high base state" ends when the big hit is won and the big hit game is executed even before the time saving number of times is achieved.

There are multiple types of small hits. Here, "3R normal small hit (V pass is practically impossible)", "3R normal small hit (V pass is possible)", and "3R time reduction 1 time small hit (V pass is possible)" are set as the small hit type. .. In the small hit, first, the small hit game is executed, and when the game ball passes through the V area 39 (V passage), the big hit game (two kinds of big hit games) is executed. Therefore, in the small hit, the opening of the large winning opening 35 as a small hit game corresponds to the 1st R, and the big hit game that opens the large winning opening 35 over 2R, which is executed after the V is passed, is the 2R and 3R. Corresponds to the eyes. If there is no V passage in the small hit game, the big hit game is not executed. Here, the "3R normal small hit (V-passing practically impossible)" is a small hit that V-passing is practically impossible. On the other hand, "3R normal small hit (V passable)" and "3R time saving 1 time small hit (V passable)" are small hits that can pass V. Whether or not V can pass during the small hit game can be set by the operation pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 and the opening pattern of the opening / closing member 37 of the grand prize device 36. Specifically, it is as follows.

In each of the above small hits, the large winning opening 35 is opened once for 29.5 seconds in the small hit game after winning (FIG. 15). On the other hand, the opening time in the small hit game differs depending on the small hit type. Specifically, "3R normal small hit (V passage practically impossible)" (opening pattern 23) has an opening time of 4 seconds, "5R time reduction 1 time small hit", "3R time reduction 1 time small hit", The opening time of the "3R normal small hit" (opening pattern 23) is 0.01 seconds. The reason why the opening time of the small hit game differs depending on the small hit type is to change the opening timing of the large winning opening 35 with respect to the V opening / closing member 71 that has been moving in a constant motion from the start of this opening. be. Here, the V opening / closing member 71 is opened for 3 seconds after the opening for 0.01 seconds when the small hit game is started. In the opening pattern 23, since the large winning opening 35 is opened 4 seconds after the small hit game is started, the V opening / closing member 71 is closed about 1 second before the large winning opening 35 is opened. Therefore, in the "3R normal small hit (V passage is practically impossible)", V passage during the small hit game is substantially impossible. On the other hand, in the opening pattern 23, the big winning opening 35 and the V opening / closing member 71 are opened at the same time 0.01 seconds after the small hit game is started, both of them continue to be opened for 3 seconds, and after the V opening / closing member 71 is closed, the opening pattern 23 is large. The winning opening 35 will be closed. Therefore, in "5R time reduction 1 time small hit", "3R time reduction 1 time small hit", and "3R normal small hit", it is possible to pass V during the small hit game.

In the gaming machine 1, there are "wins" and "losses" as a result of the ordinary symbol lottery (winning lottery). In the case of "hit", the "hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display 42. At the time of "missing", the "missing symbol" is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display 42. If a hit is won, a "hit game (normal game)" as an auxiliary game for opening the electric chew 29 is executed with an opening pattern corresponding to the type of normal symbol (type of hit) displayed as a stop. In this hit game (ordinary game), the electric chew may be opened multiple times in one round. The winning game (ordinary game) includes one round game (unit open game), an opening (OP) before the round game starts, and an ending (ED) after the round game ends. .. There are multiple types of hits. Here, "long opening 1", "long opening 2", and "short opening" are set as the hit types. These hits have different fluctuation times, opening times, opening times, and ending times.

5. Description of game state The game control microcomputer 81 of the game machine 1 can execute "variation time reduction control" for each of the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display 41 and the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display 42. Is. Here, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 controls the fluctuation time reduction with respect to the special symbol of the special symbol display 41 is referred to as a "time reduction state", and the state in which the fluctuation time reduction control is not performed is simply a "non-time reduction state". ". In the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the derivation display of the display result) is shorter than that in the non-time saving state. In the game control microcomputer 81, a special symbol variation pattern determination table T4 (FIG. 12) is defined so that a variation pattern having a shorter variation time is often selected in the time saving state than in the non-time saving state. The fluctuation pattern is determined using. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 executes the fluctuation time reduction control for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41, the special symbol is variable as compared with the case where the fluctuation time reduction control is not executed. It becomes easier to select a short fluctuation time as the fluctuation time of the display. As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace of digestion of the special figure hold becomes faster, and an effective prize (a prize that can be memorized as the special figure hold) to the starting port is likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to aim for a big hit under the smooth progress of the game.

The game control microcomputer 81 executes the fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42 in synchronization with the fluctuation time shortening control for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41. That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbol in the time saving state, and does not execute it in the non-time saving state.

The game control microcomputer 81 is usually used in a time reduction (time reduction after a big hit), during a time reduction state executed after winning the special figure 1 lottery, and in b time reduction (play time) and c time reduction (sudden time reduction). When winning in the lottery in the figure, as shown in "Special Figure 1 Time saving state" in FIG. 13 (B), the winning type is often determined to be "long opening 1", and rarely "long opening 2". judge. When the "long opening 1" is set, the winning of the first starting port 30 is facilitated, and the winning of the second starting port 21 is made difficult. At the time of "long opening 2", it is difficult to win a prize in the first starting port 30, and it is easy to win a prize in the second starting port 21. a. Of the time saving (time saving after big hit), when winning in the lottery of the regular figure during the time saving state executed after winning the special figure 2 lottery, as shown in "special figure 2 time saving state" of FIG. 13 (B). In addition, the hit type is always determined to be "long opening 2", making it difficult to win the first starting port 30 and facilitating winning the second starting port 21.

As described above, the gaming machine 1 executes a time reduction (time reduction after big hit), b time reduction (play time), and c time reduction (sudden time reduction). In a time reduction (time reduction after big hit), the game state is switched to time reduction after the big hit game. b The time reduction (play time) is such that the game state is switched to the time reduction state when the number of fluctuations reaches the specified number of times (for example, 500 times) in the normal state. In the c time reduction (sudden time reduction), the game state is switched to the time reduction state when the fixed stop is performed with a specific loss symbol in the normal state. Specifically, in the c time reduction (sudden time reduction), when the determination based on the random number value per special symbol becomes "loss (sudden time reduction)" in the normal state, the gaming state is switched to the time reduction state after the determination of the specific lost symbol is stopped.

In the gaming machine 1, the gaming state after the jackpot game executed by winning the “〇R time saving 〇 times big hit” and “〇R time saving 〇 times small hit” is the “time saving state and high base state”. The "time saving state and high base state" ends when a predetermined number of times of variable display (variable display) of the special symbol is executed, or when a jackpot is won and the jackpot game is executed. The game state after the big hit game executed by winning the "○ R normal small hit" is the "non-time saving state and low base state". This gaming state is also called a "normal gaming state". When playing the gaming machine 1 for the first time, the gaming state after the power is turned on is this normal gaming state. Here, the "time saving state and high base state" is also simply referred to as "time saving state", and the "non-time saving state and low base state" is also simply referred to as "non-time saving state".

In the high base state (time saving state), it is more advantageous to allow the game ball to enter the right game area 3B (FIG. 1) by hitting right. The electric chew 29 is easier to open than in the low base state (non-time saving state), and it is easier to win the first starting port 30 and the second starting port 21 than to win the first starting port 20. This is because it is. For this reason, in the high base state, the game ball is passed through the gate 28, which is a trigger for the normal symbol lottery, and the game ball is hit right to the first start port 30 and the second start port 21 to win a prize. As a result, it is possible to obtain a large number of starting prizes (winning to the starting port) rather than hitting left. On the other hand, in the low base state, it is more advantageous to allow the game ball to enter the left game area 3A (FIG. 1) by hitting the left side. Compared to the high base state, the electric chew 29 is less likely to be opened, and it is easier to win the first starting port 20 than to win the first starting port 30 and the second starting port 21. Is. For this reason, in the low base state, a left-handed strike is performed so that the game ball can be won in the first starting port 20. This allows you to get a lot of starting prizes rather than hitting right.

6. Operation of Game Control Microcomputer 81 The operation of the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 (FIG. 4) will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 to 36. Counters, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. that appear in the operation description of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the main RAM 84. As described below, the game control microcomputer 81 can be used as a hit / fail determination means, a symbol control means, a hit game execution means, a game state control means, and a hit type selection means by reading a program stored in the main ROM 83. Function.

[Main control main processing]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the main control main process. When the power of the game machine 1 is turned on, the game control microcomputer 81 reads a program for executing the main control main process from the main ROM 83. In the main control main process, the game control microcomputer 81 first makes initial settings (step S001). In the initial setting, for example, the main CPU 82 is set, various flags, statuses, counters, and the like are reset. The initial value of the flag is "1", that is, "ON" for the ceiling flag, and "0", that is, "OFF" for the other flags. The initial value of the status is "1". The initial value of the counter is a predetermined value (for example, 500) for the ceiling counter, and "0" for the other counters. The initial setting is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed after that.

After the initial setting, the game control microcomputer 81 prohibits the interrupt of the interrupt process (step S002), and performs the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (step S003). In this normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 uses various random number counter values (random number value per special symbol, type random number value per special symbol, reach random number value, etc.) shown in FIG. 8 (A). The variable pattern random number value, the random number value per ordinary symbol, and the random number value per ordinary symbol) are added and updated by 1. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" or may be randomly changed. Further, each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated by using a known random number generation circuit including a counter IC or the like.

After the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 permits the interrupt of the interrupt process (step S004). While the interrupt is enabled, the main timer interrupt process (step S005) can be executed. The main timer interrupt process is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the main CPU 82 in a predetermined cycle (for example, a 4 msec cycle). That is, the main timer interrupt process is executed every predetermined cycle (for example, 4 msec cycle). Then, from the end of the main timer interrupt process to the start of the next main timer interrupt process, various counter value update processes by the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process are repeatedly executed. .. If an interrupt pulse is input to the main CPU 82 in the interrupt disabled state, the main timer interrupt process is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled.

[Main timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the main timer interrupt process (FIG. 16: step S005). In the main-side timer interrupt processing, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs random number update processing (step S101). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 updates various random number counter values shown in FIG. 8A. This random number update process is the same as the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process performed in the main control main process (FIG. 16) described above. That is, the update processing of various random number counter values is performed during the execution period of the main timer interrupt processing and other periods (the period from the end of the main timer interrupt processing to the start of the next main timer interrupt processing). It is done in both.

After the random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs an input process (step S102). In the input process, the game control microcomputer 81 reads the detection signals detected by various sensors attached to the game machine 1, and outputs the payout data for paying out the prize balls according to the type of the winning opening in the main RAM 84. Set in the buffer. The various sensors are, for example, a first starting port sensor 20a, a second starting port sensor 21a, a first large winning opening sensor 30a, a large winning opening sensor 35a, and a normal winning opening sensor 27a (FIG. 4).

After the input process, the game control microcomputer 81 has a start port sensor detection process (step S103), a normal operation process (step S104), a special operation process (step S105), a V opening / closing member control process (step S106), and a V area. The sensor detection process (step S107) is executed in order. Details of these processes will be described later. After the V-region sensor detection process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a hold ball number process (step S108). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the number of special figure 1 reserved balls, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls, and the number of ordinary symbol reserved balls stored in the main RAM 84. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the hold ball number command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84. The hold ball number command is a command for notifying the sub-control board 90 of the hold ball number, and includes information on the special figure 1 hold ball number, the special figure 2 hold ball number, and the normal symbol hold ball number. .. After setting the hold ball number command, the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

After processing the number of reserved balls, the game control microcomputer 81 performs output processing (step S109). In the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the command or the like set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 to the sub control board 90 in each of the above processes. After the output processing, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processing (step S110). In other processing, for example, the second special figure holding indicator 43b is controlled to a display mode showing the number based on the number of special figure 2 reserved balls described later, and the first special figure is based on the number of special figure 1 reserved balls. The hold indicator 43a is controlled in a display mode indicating the number.

[Starting port sensor detection process]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the start port sensor detection process (FIG. 17: step S103). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate 28 (step S201). This determination is made based on whether or not the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 28a. If the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (step S201: NO), the process skips to step S205. When the game ball passes through the gate 28 (step S201: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of normally symbol reserved balls is "1 (upper limit value)" (step S202). The number of ordinary symbol hold balls is the number of normal symbol hold balls, and more specifically, the value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 for counting the number of normal symbol hold balls. If the number of normally symbol reserved balls is "1" (step S202: YES), the process skips to step S205. When the number of normal symbol reserved balls is "0" (step S202: NO), after adding "1" to the number of normal symbol reserved balls (step S203), the normal symbol random number acquisition process is performed (step S204). Here, in the game control microcomputer 81, the value of the random number counter per ordinary symbol (FIG. 8: the value of the label-TRND-H) and the value of the type counter per the ordinary symbol (FIG. 8: the value of the label-TRND-HS). ) Is acquired, and the acquired random number value group is stored in the first storage area of the normal figure reservation storage area 86 of the main RAM 84.

In step S205, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the second starting port 21. This determination is made based on whether or not the game ball is detected by the second start port sensor 21a. If the game ball has not won a prize in the second starting port 21 (step S205: NO), the process skips to step S210. When the game ball wins a prize (step S205: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is “1 (upper limit value)” (step S206). The special figure 2 reserved ball number is the number of the second special figure reserved, and more specifically, it is the value of the counter provided in the main RAM 84 for counting the number of the second special figure reserved. If the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is “1” (step S206: YES), the process skips to step S210. When the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is "0" (step S206: NO), after adding "1" to the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 (step S207), the random number acquisition process related to the special figure 2 is performed (step S208). ). Here, the value of the random number counter per special symbol (FIG. 8: the value of the label-TRND-A), the value of the random number counter of the type per special symbol (FIG. 8: the value of the label-TRND-AS), and the value of the reach random number counter (FIG. 8: the value of the reach random number counter). FIG. 8: Label-TRND-RC value) and fluctuation pattern random number counter value (FIG. 8: Label-TRND-T1 value) are acquired. The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random number value group in the first storage area of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b. The game control microcomputer 81 temporarily stores the acquired random number value group in a buffer (predetermination buffer) different from the second special figure reservation storage area 85b for the special figure 2 pre-determination process described later (pre-determination buffer). Hold). After the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 2 pre-determination process (step S209). In the special figure 2 pre-determination process, the game control microcomputer 81 makes a jackpot pre-determination with reference to the jackpot determination table T1. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 uses the jackpot determination table T1 to be referred to and the jackpot random number value to predetermine whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot. When the result of the jackpot pre-determination is "big hit", the game control microcomputer 81 performs the jackpot type pre-determination. In the jackpot type pre-determination, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires the jackpot type random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs pre-determination of the jackpot type based on the acquired jackpot type random value and the jackpot type determination table T5. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the fluctuation pattern advance determination. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a variation pattern random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process, and a reach random number value. do. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 creates a pre-determination command. The pre-judgment command includes a jackpot pre-judgment result (in the case of a jackpot, a jackpot type pre-judgment result), and a fluctuation pattern pre-judgment result. The game control microcomputer 81 sets the created pre-determination command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process.

In step S210, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 20. This determination is made based on whether or not the game ball is detected by the first start port sensor 20a. When the game ball has not won a prize in the first starting port 20 (step S210: NO), this process ends. When a game ball wins in the first starting port 20 (step S210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is "4 (upper limit value)" (step S210: YES). Step S211). The special figure 1 hold ball number is the number of the first special figure hold, and more specifically, it is the value of the counter provided in the main RAM 84 for counting the number of the first special figure hold. If the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is “4” (step S211: YES), this process ends. When the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is "3" or less (step S211: NO), after adding "1" to the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 (step S212), the random number acquisition process related to the special figure 1 is performed (step). S213). Here, similarly to the above-mentioned special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (step S208), the value of the random number counter per special symbol, the value of the random number counter of the type per special symbol, the value of the reach random number counter, and the value of the variable pattern random number counter are set. get. The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random number value group in the storage area corresponding to the current number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 among the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a. The game control microcomputer 81 temporarily stores (holds) the acquired random number value group in a buffer (predetermination buffer) different from the first special figure reservation storage area 85a for the special figure 1 pre-determination process. Let me. After the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 1 pre-determination process (step S214). The special figure 1 pre-determination process is the same as the above-mentioned special figure 2 pre-determination process.

[Normal operation processing]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart of a normal operation process (FIG. 17: step S104). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the electric chew 29 is operating (step S501). When the electric chew 29 is in operation (step S501: YES), the process proceeds to step S540. When the electric chew 29 is not in operation (step S501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the stop display of the normal symbol is in progress (whether the fluctuation stop time has elapsed) (step S502). When the stop display of the normal symbol is being displayed (step S502: YES), the process proceeds to step S531. When the stop display of the normal symbol is not in progress (step S502: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the normal symbol is changing (step S503). When the normal symbol is changing (step S503: YES), the process proceeds to step S521. When the normal symbol is not changing (step S503: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0" (step S504). When the number of reserved balls is "0" (step S504: YES), this process ends. When the number of reserved balls is not "0" (step S504: NO), the number of normal symbol reserved balls is decremented by 1 (step S505). Therefore, when the game ball passes through the gate 28 while the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0", the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is once set to "1" in step S203 of the start port sensor detection process (FIG. 18). After that, the hold is digested in this step S505, and the number of hold balls of the normal symbol immediately becomes "0". This also applies to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol. That is, in step S207 and step S212 of the start port sensor detection process (FIG. 18), the number of reserved special symbols is once set to "1", and then steps S1404 and step in the special symbol standby process (FIG. 21) described later. In S1410, the hold is exhausted and the number of hold balls of the special symbol becomes "0". In addition, the decrement of the number of normal symbol hold balls (digestion of the normal symbol hold) is executed together with the clear process for clearing the hold information (various random values) stored in the first storage area of the normal symbol hold storage area 86. NS.

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a hit determination with reference to the normal symbol hit determination table T5 (FIG. 13 (A)) (step S506). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first has a random value per ordinary symbol as a determination value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the normal figure hold) of the normal figure hold storage area 86. Is read. Then, the random value per normal symbol, the game state (whether or not it is in the time saving state), and the normal symbol hit determination table T5 are used to determine whether or not it is a hit. For example, in the non-time saving state, when the random value per normal symbol is "0" to "2", it is determined as "hit", and when the random value per ordinary symbol is other than that, it is determined as "missing". (Fig. 13 (A)).

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the type of the normal symbol (normal symbol stop symbol) with reference to the normal symbol hit type determination table T6 (FIG. 13 (B)) (step S507). Specifically, when the game control microcomputer 81 wins in the hit determination in the above (step S506), first, the normal symbol hit stored in the first storage area of the normal figure reservation storage area 86 Read the type random value. Then, the hit type and the normal symbol (whether or not it is in the time saving state and what is the trigger for the time saving state) and the normal symbol hit type determination table T6 are used. Judge the normal figure stop symbol). For example, in the non-time saving state, the hit type is determined to be "short open" regardless of the random value of the normal symbol per type (any of 0 to 65535), and the normal symbol is "win symbol 1". Is determined. When you win in the lottery of the regular map during a time saving (time saving after big hit), during the time saving state executed after winning the special figure 1 lottery, and during b time saving (play time), c time saving (sudden time saving) , As shown in "Special figure 1 time saving state" of FIG. 13 (B), when the random value of the type per normal symbol is "0 to 65300", the hit type is determined to be "long open 1", and the normal figure The stop symbol is determined to be "hit symbol 2". When the normal symbol hit type random value is "65301 to 65535", the hit type is determined to be "long open 2", and the normal symbol stop symbol is determined to be "win symbol 3". a. Of the time saving (time saving after big hit), when winning in the lottery of the regular figure during the time saving state executed after winning the special figure 2 lottery, as shown in "Special figure 2 time saving state" of FIG. 13 (B). In addition, the hit type is determined to be "long open 2" and the normal symbol stop symbol is determined to be "hit symbol 3" regardless of the normal symbol per type random value (any of 0 to 65535). On the other hand, in the case of "missing" in the above-mentioned collision determination, "missing symbol" is set as a normal symbol.

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects the variation pattern with reference to the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T7 (FIG. 13 (C)) (step S508). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a normal symbol variation pattern by using a game state (whether or not it is a time saving state), a hit determination result, a hit type, and a normal symbol variation pattern determination table T7. do. For example, when the hit type is "short open" in the non-time saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "1 second". Further, for example, in the time saving state, when the hit determination is "missing", the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "1 second" (FIG. 13 (C)). The game control microcomputer 81 sets the normal symbol fluctuation start command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84 in order to notify the sub-control board 90 of the fluctuation start and fluctuation time of the normal symbol (step S509). The normal symbol variation start command includes information on the normal stop symbol data and information on the normal symbol variation pattern. After that, the game control microcomputer 81 starts the fluctuation display of the normal symbol and ends this process (step S510).

In step S521, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the fluctuation time of the normal symbol has elapsed and the game has ended. The fluctuation time of the normal symbol is the fluctuation time selected in step S508 (FIG. 13 (C)). If the fluctuation time has not ended (step S521: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. That is, the variable display of the normal symbol is continued. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time has ended (step S521: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 displays the fluctuation display of the normal symbol, and displays the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (the normal symbol that hits the normal symbol or the normal symbol that is lost). The figure is stopped at (stop symbol) (step S522). Further, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the normal symbol fluctuation stop command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 in order to notify the sub-control board 90 of the fluctuation stop of the normal symbol (step S523). After that, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the stop time of the normal symbol and finishes this process (step S524). Here, the stop time of the normal symbol is 0.5 seconds.

In step S531, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the fluctuation stop time of the normal symbol has elapsed. If the stop time has not elapsed (step S531: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. That is, the stop display of the normal symbol is continued. On the other hand, when the stop time has elapsed (step S531: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs this process when the hit determination in the above (step S506) is "missing" (step S532: NO). Finish. On the other hand, in the case of "hit" in the above-mentioned hit determination (step S532: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 hits the sub-control board 90 to notify the start of the game (normal game) opening. The command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S533). Further, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the electric chew opening pattern (step S534). The opening pattern of the electric chew 29 is selected with reference to the electric chew opening pattern determination table T8 (FIG. 14A). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the electric chew 29 by using the type of the normal symbol (normal symbol stop symbol data) determined in the above (step S507) and the electric chew opening pattern determination table T8. Select a pattern. Here, for example, when the normal symbol is "hit symbol 1", "open pattern 11" is selected, and when the normal symbol is "hit symbol 3", "open pattern 13" is selected (see FIG. 14). .. After selecting the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 starts the electric chew operation so as to follow the selected opening pattern (step S535), and ends this process.

In step S501 described above, when the electric chew 29 is operating (step S501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition of the electric chew 29 is satisfied (step S540). The closing condition here is that the number of winnings to the electric chew 29 reaches the specified maximum number of winnings (for example, 2), or the opening time of the electric chew 29 elapses and the electric chew 29 is closed. One of the things that has been reached is satisfied. The opening time of the electric chew 29 is an opening time corresponding to the opening pattern selected in step S534 (see FIG. 14). If the closing condition of the electric chew 29 is not satisfied (step S540: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the electric chew 29 is satisfied (step S540: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 hits the sub-control board 90 and notifies the start of the ending of the game (normal game) by the normal symbol ending. The command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S541). Further, the game control microcomputer 81 closes (closes) the electric chew 29, stops its operation (step S542), and ends this process.

[Special operation processing]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the special operation process (FIG. 17: step S105). Here, the processing related to the special symbol display 41 and the grand prize device (the first grand prize device 31 and the grand prize device 36) is divided into five stages, and each stage is "1" and "2" of the "special operation status", respectively. , "3", "4", "5". When the "special operation status" is "1" (step S1301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special symbol standby process (step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, a special symbol hit determination, a special symbol variation pattern selection, and the like are executed. When the "special operation status" is "2" (step S1301: NO, step S1303: YES), the special symbol changing process is performed (step S1304). In the special symbol change processing, the output of the change stop command is executed after the change time elapses. When the "special operation status" is "3" (step S1301, S1303: NO, step S1305: YES), the special symbol determination process is performed (step S1306). In the special symbol confirmation process, the output of the opening command or the like is executed at the time of a big hit or a small hit. When the "special operation status" is "4" (step S1301, S1303, S1305: NO, step S1307: YES), the special electric accessory process 1 (big hit game) is performed (step S1308). In the special electric accessory processing 1, a jackpot game (type 2 special game) is executed. When the "special operation status" is "5" (step S1301, S1303, S1305, step S1307: NO), the special electric accessory process 2 (small hit game) is performed (step S1309). In the special electric accessory processing 2, a small hit game (type 1 special game) is executed. Details of each of the above processes will be described later. The special operation status is "1" by default.

[Special symbol standby processing]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 20: step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the number of reserved balls (special figure 1 reserved) at the first starting ports 20 and 30 is "0" (step S1401). When the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is "0" (step S1401: YES), that is, a random number value acquired in the first special figure reserved storage area 85a due to winning the first starting ports 20 and 30. If there is no memory of the group, the process proceeds to step S1411. When the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is "1" or more (step S1401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 has a special symbol hit detection process (step S1402) and a special symbol variation pattern selection process (step S1403). To execute. Details of these processes will be described later. After the special symbol variation pattern selection process, the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is decremented by one (step S1404). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 shifts the storage location of the hold information (various random values) stored in the storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a by one to the side read from the current position ( Step S1405). By the above step, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9A corresponding to the storage area of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a is shifted to the reserved digested image display area side, and the oldest reserved image 9A is reserved digested. It is displayed as image 9C. As a result, the player can recognize that one of the first special figure reservations has been exhausted. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the game state management process 1 (step S1406). In the game state management process 1, when the time saving flag is ON, it is determined that "missing (sudden time saving)" is determined by the judgment based on the random number value per special symbol, and when the third time saving counter becomes 0, the c time saving symbol changes. The time saving flag is switched to OFF at the start of. Details will be described later. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the variation start process of FIG. 1 (step S1407). In the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing, the fluctuation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started, and the special operation status is set to “2”. The fluctuation start command (special figure 1 fluctuation start command) set in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process includes information on the special symbol stop symbol data set in the special symbol hit detection process (step S1402) and special symbol fluctuation. Information about the fluctuation pattern set in the pattern selection process (step S1403) and information set in the game state management process 1 are included.

In step S1401, when the number of reserved balls in special figure 1 is "0" (step S1401: YES), the number of reserved balls in the second starting port 21 (holding in special figure 2) of the game control microcomputer 81 is "0". It is determined whether or not there is (step S1411). When the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is "0" (step S1411: YES), that is, in the second special figure reserved storage area 85b, the random number value group acquired due to the winning of the second starting port 21 If there is no memory, the process proceeds to step S1421. Special figure 2 When the number of reserved balls is "1" or more (step S1411: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 has a special symbol hit detection process (step S1412) and a special symbol variation pattern selection process (step S1413). To execute. Details of these processes will be described later. After the special variation pattern selection process, the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is decremented by one (step S1414). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 shifts the storage location of the hold information (various random values) stored in the storage area of the second special figure hold storage area 85b to the side read from the current position (1). Step S1415). By the above step, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9B corresponding to the storage area of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b is shifted to the reserved digested image display area side, and the oldest reserved image 9B is reserved digested. It is displayed as image 9C. As a result, the player can recognize that one second special figure hold has been exhausted. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the game state management process 1 (step S1416). In the game state management process 1, when the time saving flag is ON, it is determined that "missing (sudden time saving)" is determined by the judgment based on the random number value per special symbol, and when the third time saving counter becomes 0, the c time saving symbol changes. The time saving flag is switched to OFF at the start of. Details will be described later. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step S1417). In the special figure 2 variation start process, the variation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 to start the variation display of the second special symbol, and the special operation status is set to “2” (step S1417). The fluctuation start command (special figure 1 fluctuation start command) set in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process includes information on the special symbol stop symbol data set in the special symbol hit detection process (step S1412) and special symbol fluctuation. Information about the fluctuation pattern set in the pattern selection process (step S1413) and information set in the game state management process 1 are included.

In step S1411, when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is "0" (step S1411: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is a standby screen (step S1411: YES). S1421). The standby screen is a demo screen for waiting for customers. The game control microcomputer 81 may be determined by, for example, ON / OFF of the demo screen display flag for waiting for customers. If the screen is on standby (step S1421: YES), this process ends. If it is not the standby screen (step S1421: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the customer waiting standby command for displaying the standby scene in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 after the elapse of the predetermined standby time. (Step S1422), this process is completed. As described above, according to the special symbol standby process of the present embodiment, the variable display of the special symbol based on the second special symbol hold is executed only when the first special symbol hold is "0". That is, the digestion of the first special figure hold is executed in preference to the digestion of the second special figure hold.

[Special symbol collision detection processing]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the special symbol collision determination process (FIG. 21: steps S1402 and S1412). Since the process flow of the hit determination process (step S1402) of the special figure 2 and the hit determination process (step S1412) of the special figure 1 are the same, they will be described together. In the special symbol hit determination process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a hit determination with reference to the special symbol hit determination table T1 (FIG. 9A) (step S1502). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out a random number value per special symbol as a determination value. For example, in the hit determination process of the special figure 2, the random value per special symbol stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first item of the second special figure hold) of the second special figure hold storage area 85b is read out. In the hit determination process of the special figure 1, the random value per special symbol stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first item of the first special figure hold) of the first special figure hold storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is a big hit and whether or not it is a small hit by using the reference special symbol hit determination table T1 and the read special symbol per random value. In this way, the game control microcomputer 81 functions as a "win / fail determination means".

When the result of the special symbol hit determination is "big hit" (step S1503: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the big hit flag (step S1505) and determines the big hit type (step S1507). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the type random number value per special symbol as the determination value. For example, in the hit determination process of the special figure 2, the special symbol per type random value stored in the first storage area of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read out. In the hit determination process of the special figure 1, the special symbol hit type random value stored in the first storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the jackpot type based on the read special symbol hit type random value and the special symbol hit type determination table T3 (FIGS. 10 and 11). In this way, the game control microcomputer 81 functions as a "hit type selection means". After determining the jackpot type, the special symbol stop symbol data (big hit symbol) corresponding to the specified jackpot type is set in the hit type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1509), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the result of the special symbol hit determination is not "big hit" (step S1503: NO) but "small hit" (step S1510: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the small hit flag and turns on the small hit flag. (Step S1512), the small hit type is determined (step S1514). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the special symbol per type random value as the determination value, as in the case of the jackpot type determination. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the small hit type based on the read special symbol hit type random value and the special symbol hit type determination table T3 (FIGS. 10 and 11). After determining the small hit type, the special symbol stop symbol data (small hit symbol) corresponding to the specified small hit type is set in the hit type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1516), and this process is terminated.

When the result of the special symbol hit determination is not "big hit" or "small hit" but "loss (sudden time reduction)" (step S1503, S1510: NO, S1520: YES), c special symbol stop symbol data according to the time reduction symbol Is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1522), and this process is terminated. If the result of the special symbol hit determination is not "big hit", "small hit", or "loss (sudden time reduction)" but "loss" (steps S1503, S1510, S1520: NO), the special symbol stop symbol data according to the lost symbol Is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1524), and this process is terminated.

[Special symbol variation pattern selection process]
23 and 24 are flowcharts of the special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 21: steps S1403 and S1409). Since the processing flow of the variation pattern selection process (step S1403) of the special figure 2 and the variation pattern selection process (step S1409) of the special figure 1 are the same, they will be described together. In the variation pattern selection process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game state is the time saving state (step S1600). Whether or not the time saving state is determined is determined by whether or not the time saving flag is ON. When the time is shortened (step S1600: YES), the process proceeds to step S1612. When the time is not shortened (step S1600: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602).

When the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 selects the fluctuation pattern by referring to the non-time saving state jackpot table in the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4 (FIG. 12). This is done (step S1603). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the fluctuation pattern random value as the determination value. For example, in the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 2, the variation pattern random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first item of the second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read out. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 1, the variation pattern random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the first special figure hold) of the first special figure hold storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern using the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4 and the variation pattern random value. Here, as a table for the non-time saving state jackpot, the portion corresponding to the non-time saving state jackpot in the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4 shown in FIG. 12 (in the special figure 1, the variation patterns are “P1” and “P2””. The part of, in Special Figure 2, the part where the fluctuation pattern is "P14") is referred to (the address is set). From the read variation pattern random value, either "P1" or "P2" is selected as the variation pattern in Special Figure 1, and "P14" is selected as the variation pattern in Special Figure 2 regardless of the variation pattern random value.

In step S1602, when the big hit flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the small hit flag is ON (step S1604). When the small hit flag is ON (step S1604: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the non-time saving state small hit table in the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T4 (FIG. 12) for the fluctuation pattern. Make a selection (step S1605). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the fluctuation pattern random number value as the determination value in the same manner as in step S1603 described above. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern using the portion of the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4 corresponding to the small hit in the non-time saving state and the variation pattern random value. Here, in the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T4, the portion corresponding to the small hit in the non-time saving state is the portion where the fluctuation pattern is “P3” in Special Figure 1 and the portion where the fluctuation pattern is “P15” in Special Figure 2. Therefore, these are selected regardless of the fluctuation pattern random value.

In step S1604, when the small hit flag is OFF (step S1604: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the reach random number value is the reach establishment random number value (step S1606). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the reach random number value as the determination value. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 2, the reach random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the second special figure hold) of the second special figure hold storage area 85b is read out. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 1, the reach random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the first special figure hold) of the first special figure hold storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the presence or absence of reach using the reach determination table T2 (FIG. 9B) and the reach random number value. Here, since it is in the non-time saving state, the reach is set based on the non-time saving state table (the part where the reach determination value (reach establishment random number value) is “0” to “13”) in the reach determination table T2. Determine the presence or absence.

When the reach random number value is the reach establishment random number value (step S1606: YES), that is, in the case of loss with reach, the game control microcomputer 81 is in the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4, and the reach is in the non-time saving state. The fluctuation pattern is selected with reference to the table for loss (step S1607). Here, as a table for the loss with reach in the non-time saving state, the part corresponding to the loss with reach in the non-time saving state in the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T4 shown in FIG. 12 (in the special figure 1, the fluctuation pattern is "P4". , "P5", and in Special Figure 2, the variation pattern is "P14"). In the special figure 1, one of “P4” and “P5” is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random value. In the special figure 2, “P14” is selected as the fluctuation pattern regardless of the read fluctuation pattern random value.

When the reach random number value is not the reach establishment random number value (step S1606: NO), that is, in the case of loss without reach, the game control microcomputer 81 is used in the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4 to reach in a non-time saving state. None The fluctuation pattern is selected with reference to the table for loss (step S1608). Here, as a table for non-reach loss in the non-time saving state, the portion corresponding to the non-reach loss in the non-time saving state in the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4 shown in FIG. 12 (in Special Figure 1, the variation pattern is "P6". , "P7", and in Special Figure 2, the variation pattern is "P15"). In the special figure 1, one of “P6” and “P7” is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random value and the current number of reserved balls (1 to 4) in the special figure 1. In the special figure 2, “P15” is selected as the fluctuation pattern regardless of the read fluctuation pattern random value. In the special figure 1, since the fluctuation pattern selected changes depending on the number of reserved balls, the function of shortening fluctuation according to the number of reserved balls works. That is, in Special Figure 1, when the number of reserved balls is "3" to "4", more fluctuation patterns with a shorter fluctuation time are selected than when the number of reserved balls is "1" to "2". It is supposed to be done. As a result, when the number of reserved balls is large, the digestion speed of the special figure reservation can be increased.

When it is determined in step S1600 that the game state is the time saving state, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (FIG. 24: step S1612). Hereinafter, the processing of steps S1613 to S1618 is the same as the processing of steps S1603 to S1608 described above except for the following points, and thus the description thereof will be omitted. The difference between the processes of steps S1613 to S1618 and the processes of steps S1603 to S1608 is that in steps S1613, S1615, S1617, and S1618, the portion of the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4 referred to is described in steps S1603, S1605, and S1607. , Different from S1608. Specifically, in steps S1603, S1605, S1607, and S1608, the table for the non-time saving state in the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4 is referred to, whereas in steps S1613, S1615, S1617, and S1618, The table for the time saving state is referenced. For example, in the case of step S1615, in the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4, the portion corresponding to the small hit in the time saving state (the variation pattern is "P9" in the special figure 1 and the variation pattern is "P17" in the special figure 2). Part) is referred to. Further, for example, in the case of step S1617, in the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T4, the portion corresponding to the loss with reach in the time saving state (the portion where the fluctuation pattern is “P10” in the special figure 1 and the fluctuation pattern in the special figure 2). The part of "P18") is referred to.

After selecting the variation pattern as described above, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected variation pattern (step S1630) and ends this process. The set fluctuation pattern information is included in the fluctuation start command and transmitted to the sub-control board 90 in the output process (FIG. 17: step S109). As a result, the variable display of the special symbol is started.

[Game state management process 1]
FIG. 25 is a flowchart of the game state management process 1 (FIG. 21: steps S1406 and S1416). Since the processing flow of the game state management process 1 (step S1406) of the special figure 2 and the game state management process 1 (step S1416) of the special figure 1 are the same, they will be described together. In the game state management process 1, when "loss (sudden time reduction)" is selected a specified number of times (for example, 1) in the time saving state, the c time saving fluctuation of the specified number of times is started, and the game state is switched to the normal state at the start of the fluctuation. It is the one that performs the processing. As a result, when the specified number of times "loss (sudden time reduction)" is selected at the time of a time reduction, the time reduction of a ends at the start of the c time reduction symbol fluctuation, and the c time reduction starts at the end of the c time reduction fluctuation. In the game state management process 1, first, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON (step S1905). When the time saving flag is OFF (step S1905: NO), the process skips to step S1940. On the other hand, when the time saving flag is ON (step S1905: YES), the third time saving counter C3 is decremented by 1 (step S1915). The "third time saving counter C3" counts the number of c time saving symbol fluctuations executed during the time saving state. The initial value set in the third time reduction counter C3 is determined based on the setting table of FIG. 29. After that, it is determined whether or not the third time reduction counter C3 has become 0 (step S1930). When the third time saving counter C3 becomes 0 (step S1930: YES), the time saving flag is switched to OFF (step S1935). As a result, the gaming state can be switched from the time saving state to the non-time saving state. That is, when the number of c time-saving symbol fluctuations executed in the time-saving state reaches the number shown in FIG. 29, the gaming state is switched to the non-time-saving state. After that, a game state designation command that reflects the above processing is set (step S1940).

[Processing during special symbol change]
FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the special symbol changing process (FIG. 20: step S1304). First, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the special symbol variation time has elapsed and the game has ended (step S1701). The fluctuation time of the special symbol is a fluctuation time determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected in the above-mentioned special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process (FIGS. 23 and 24) (see FIG. 12). If the fluctuation time has not ended (step S1701: NO), this process ends. That is, the variation display of the special symbol started in step S1407 or S1417 of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 21) is continued. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time has ended (step S1701: YES), the fluctuation stop command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S1702), and the special operation status is set to "3" (step S1703). .. In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processing associated with the suspension of fluctuation (step S1704). For example, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a process of stopping the variable display of the special symbol of the special symbol display 41 at a symbol corresponding to the set special symbol stop symbol data (stop display of the special symbol). In this way, the game control microcomputer 81 functions as a "design control means". The stop display time of the special symbol can be arbitrarily set according to the lottery result of the special figure 1 or the lottery result of the special figure 2. After that, the game control microcomputer 81 finishes this process.

[Special symbol confirmation process]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the special symbol determination process (FIG. 20: step S1306). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed (step S1800). If the stop time has not elapsed (step S1800: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, when the stop time has elapsed (step S1800: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the game state management process 2 (step S1801). The game state management process 2 is a process for switching the game state according to a time reduction, b time reduction, and c time reduction, and the contents will be described later. After the game state management process 2, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802).

When the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the opening pattern of the jackpot according to the type of winning jackpot (step S1803). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the opening pattern of the large winning opening from the special figure stop symbol data with reference to the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T9 (FIG. 15), and determines the opening pattern of the determined opening opening. set. Here, regardless of the jackpot type (regardless of whether the special figure stop symbol data is 11H to 13H, 15H, 16H, 21H to 23H, 31H to 33H), the opening pattern of the winning opening is "opening pattern 21". "Is set. Set the value of the round counter together with the set of the opening pattern of the big winning opening to the number of rounds according to the type of winning big hit. The round counter counts the number of unit opening games (round games) executed during the jackpot game. Here, “15” is set in the round counter regardless of the jackpot type (FIG. 15 (B)).

After setting the open pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a game state reset process (step S1804). The content of the game state reset process will be described later. After that, in order to start the type 1 jackpot game, the opening command of the type 1 jackpot game is set (step S1806), and the opening of the jackpot game is started (step S1807). After that, the special operation status is set to "4" (step S1808), and this process is completed. When the special operation status is set to "4", the process shifts to the special electric accessory process 1 (big hit game).

In step S1802, when the big hit flag is OFF (step S1802: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the small hit flag is ON (step S1810). When the small hit flag is ON (step S1810: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the opening pattern of the large winning opening according to the type of the winning small hit (step S1811). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the opening pattern of the large winning opening from the special figure stop symbol data by referring to the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T9 in the same manner as in step S1803 described above. Set the open pattern. Set the value of the round counter together with the set of the opening pattern of the big winning opening to the number of rounds according to the type of winning small hit. (FIG. 15 (B)).

After setting the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the V opening / closing member operation flag to ON (step S1812). The V opening / closing member operation flag is a flag indicating that it is a period for operating the V opening / closing member 71. In the V opening / closing member control process (FIG. 35), when the V opening / closing member operation flag is ON, the V opening / closing member 71 is operated in a predetermined operation pattern. Here, in any of the small hit games, the V opening / closing member 71 is closed as an opening for 0.01 seconds after the small hit game, then opened for 4 seconds, and then closed. When the small hit flag is ON, unlike the case where the big hit flag is ON, it is not switched to OFF even if the time saving flag is ON. After that, in order to start the small hit game, the small hit opening command is set (step S1813), and the opening of the small hit game is started (step S1814). After that, the special operation status is set to "5" (step S1815), and this process is completed. When the special operation status is set to "5", the processing shifts to the special electric accessory processing 2 (small hit game).

In step S1810, when the small hit flag is OFF (step S1810: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "1" (step S1820), and ends this process. As a result, neither the big hit game nor the small hit game is started, and the process proceeds to the special symbol standby process (FIG. 20: step S1302) again, and the special symbol hit determination for the next hold is executed.

[Game state management process 2]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the game state management process 2 (FIG. 27: step S1801). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the ceiling flag is ON. When the ceiling flag is OFF (step S2005: NO), the process skips to step S2015. When the ceiling flag is ON (step S2005: YES), the ceiling counter is decremented by 1 (step S2010). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON. When the time saving flag is OFF (step S2015: NO), that is, in the non-time saving state, the process skips to step S2060. When the time saving flag is ON (step S2015: YES), that is, in the time saving state, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the fluctuation is a fluctuation of the second special symbol (step S2020). When the fluctuation is a fluctuation of the second special symbol (step S2020: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 decrements the values of the first time reduction counter C1 and the second time reduction counter C2 by one (step). S2030). The "first time saving counter C1" counts the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol executed during the time saving state. The "second time saving counter C2" counts the number of fluctuations of the special symbol executed during the time saving state (the total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol). The initial values set in the first time saving counter C1 and the second time saving counter C2 are determined based on the setting table of FIG. 29. FIG. 29 is a diagram for explaining a setting table of the first time saving counter C1, the second time saving counter C2, and the third time saving counter C3. This setting table is referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 at the start of a time reduction, at the start of b time reduction, and at the start of c time reduction. In FIG. 29, at the start of a time reduction, the values set in the time reduction counters C1, C2, and C3 differ depending on the jackpot type. b At the start of the time reduction, "150", "200", and "10" are set in the time reduction counters C1, C2, and C3. c At the start of the time reduction, "999", "999" and "100" are set in the time reduction counters C1, C2 and C3.

Returning to FIG. 28, when the fluctuation is the fluctuation of the first special symbol (step S2020: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 decrements only the value of the second time reduction counter C2 (step S2025). ..

The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not at least one of the values of the first time saving counter C1 and the second time saving counter C2 becomes "0" as a result of step S2025 or step S2030 (step). S2035). If neither the value of the first time saving counter C1 nor the value of the second time saving counter C2 is "0" (step S2035: NO), the process skips to step S2045. When at least one value of the first time saving counter C1 and the second time saving counter C2 is "0" (step S2035: YES), the time saving flag is switched to OFF (step S2040). As a result, the gaming state can be switched from the time saving state to the non-time saving state. That is, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol executed in the time saving state reaches the number of times shown in FIG. 29, the gaming state is switched to the non-time saving state.

In step S2045, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the value of the ceiling counter is “0”. When the value of the ceiling counter is "0" (step S2045: YES), the ceiling flag is switched to OFF (step S2055). As a result, when the ceiling counter becomes "0" in the fluctuation that started to fluctuate in the time saving state, b time saving is not started.

In step S2050, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The game state designation command includes information on the currently set current game state (whether or not it is in the time saving state, the respective values of the first time saving counter and the second time saving counter, and the like).

In step S2015, when the time saving flag is OFF (step S2015: NO), it is determined whether or not the change is a c time saving symbol change (step S2060). c In the case of time saving symbol fluctuation (step S2060: YES), the time saving flag is turned ON (step S2065), and the setting values shown in the setting table of FIG. Are set respectively (step S2070). As a result, c time reduction (sudden time reduction) is set. After that, the process proceeds to step S2045. When the value of the ceiling counter is "0" (step S2045: YES), the ceiling flag is switched to OFF (step S2055). As a result, if the ceiling counter becomes "0" when the c time reduction is started, the b time reduction is not started.

In step S2060, if the c time reduction symbol does not fluctuate (step S2060: NO), it is determined whether or not the value of the ceiling counter is "0" (step S2075). If the value of the ceiling flag is not "0" (step S2075: NO), the process skips to step S2050. When the value of the ceiling counter is "0" (step S2075: YES), the time saving flag is turned ON (step S2080), and the setting table of FIG. 29 is set in the first time saving counter C1, the second time saving counter C2, and the third time saving counter C3. Each of the set values shown in (step S2085) is set. As a result, the b time reduction (play time) is set. After that, the ceiling flag is switched to OFF (step S2055).

[Game state reset process]
FIG. 30 is a flowchart of the game state reset process (FIG. 27: step S1804). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON. When the time saving flag is OFF (step S2103: NO), the process skips to 2105. When the time saving flag is ON (step S2103: YES), the time saving flag is switched to OFF (step S2104). In step S2105, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the ceiling flag is ON. When the ceiling flag is OFF (step S2105: NO), this process ends. When the ceiling flag is ON (step S2105: YES), the ceiling flag is switched to OFF (step S2106). That is, during the execution of the jackpot game, the ceiling flag is turned off in the non-high probability state and the non-time saving state. Since the gaming machine 1 is always in the low base state during the non-time saving state, it is in the low base state during the execution of the jackpot game.

[Special electric accessory processing 1 (big hit game)]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the special electric accessory process 1 (FIG. 20: step S1308). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200). The "big hit end flag" is a flag indicating that all the opening of the first big winning device 31 based on the opening pattern has been completed in the big hit game currently being executed. When the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the process proceeds to step S2230. When the jackpot end flag is OFF (step S2200: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the first jackpot 30 is open (step S2202). If it is open (step S2202: YES), the process proceeds to step S2210.

When the first big winning opening 30 is not open (step S2202: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is the time (timing) to open the first big winning opening 30 (step S2203). .. The time (timing) for opening the first prize opening 30 is, for example, when the opening time of the jackpot game elapses and the opening time in the first round game is reached, or when the opening is temporarily closed after opening. This includes the time when the interval time (closing time) until the first large winning opening 30 is opened again has elapsed and the time for starting the opening again has been reached. If it is not the time (timing) to open the first large winning opening 30 (step S2203: NO), the process proceeds to step S2220.

When it is time (timing) to open the first special winning opening 30 (step S2203: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the large winning opening opening process (step S2207). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the first large winning opening 30 according to the opening pattern (FIG. 15B) according to the hit type (big hit type or small hit type). When the type 1 jackpot game is being executed, the first jackpot 30 is opened according to the opening pattern 21 regardless of the jackpot type. When the two-kind big hit game is being executed, the first big winning opening 30 is opened according to the opening pattern 22 or the opening pattern 23 according to the small hit type. After the large winning opening opening process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a round designation command (step S2208). The round designation command includes information on the number of rounds of the special game (small hit game and big hit game) being executed, and the game control microcomputer 81 sets the round designation command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84. do. As a result, the number of rounds of the special game can be notified to the sub control board 90. In this embodiment, the first large winning opening 30 is not opened a plurality of times during one round game. However, as another embodiment, when the first large winning opening 30 is opened a plurality of times during one round game, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the first large winning opening 30 by 1. It may be determined whether or not it is the first opening in the round, and the round designation command may be set only in the case of the first opening. After setting the round specification command, this process ends.

In step S2202 described above, when the first large winning opening 30 is open (step S2202: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition of the first large winning opening 30 is satisfied. This is done (step S2210). The closing condition here is that the number of winnings in the first large winning opening 30 in the round game has reached the specified maximum number of winnings (for example, 9 per round), or the first large winning opening 30 is used. It means that one of the times when the closing time is reached (that is, a predetermined opening time (for example, 29.5 seconds) has elapsed since the opening of the first large winning opening 30) is satisfied. Then, when the closing condition of the first special winning opening 30 is not satisfied (step S2210: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the first prize opening 30 is satisfied (step S2210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (closes) the first prize opening 30 (step S2211), and then the present Finish the process.

In step S2203 described above, if it is not the time (timing) for opening the first large winning opening 30, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game is completed (step S2220). Here, one round ends after a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed from the closing of the first large winning opening 30. This is because, as described above, the closing time (interval time) of the first large winning opening 30 between the round games is included in the open round game before the closing. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game is completed depending on whether or not a predetermined interval time has elapsed since the first large winning opening 30 was closed. If the round game is not completed (step S2220: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

When the round game is completed (step S2220: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 decrements the value of the round counter by 1 (step S2221), and whether or not the value of the round counter becomes "0". Is determined (step S2226). If the value of the round counter is not "0" (step S2226: NO), that is, if the specified number of round games has not yet been exhausted, this process ends in order to start the next round game. On the other hand, when the value of the round counter is "0" (step S2226: YES), the ending command of the jackpot game is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 as the jackpot end process for ending the jackpot game (step S2227). , The ending of the jackpot is started (step S2228). The ending command includes information on the special symbol stop symbol data set in the special symbol hit detection process (FIG. 21). After the start of the jackpot ending, the jackpot end flag is set to ON (step S2229) to end this process.

In step S2200 described above, when the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the final round has ended, so that the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot ending time has elapsed. This is done (step S2230). If the ending time has not elapsed (step S2230: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, when the ending time has elapsed (step S2230: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns off the jackpot end flag (step S2231), turns off the jackpot flag (step S2232), and sets the special operation status. Is set to "1" (step S2233). As a result, in the next special operation process, the special symbol standby process (FIG. 20: step S1302) is executed again. After that, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the game state setting process (step S2234) described later, and ends this process. The game state setting process (FIG. 32) sets the game state (time saving state or non-time saving state) after the big hit game, and in the case of the time saving state, the first time saving counter C1 and the second time saving according to the hit type. This is a process of setting an initial value (number of time reductions) in the counter C2.

[Game status setting process]
FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the game state setting process (FIG. 31: step S2234). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the jackpot game executed this time is a jackpot game executed with a time saving hit as an opportunity (step S2301). When the time saving hit is not the trigger (step S2301: NO), that is, when the current jackpot game is executed with the normal hit as the trigger, the process skips to step S2310. On the other hand, when the jackpot game this time is executed with the time saving hit as an opportunity (step S2301: YES), the time saving flag is turned ON (step S2302), the first time saving counter C1, the second time saving counter C2, and the third time saving counter are turned on. The set values shown in the setting table of FIG. 29 are set in C3 (step S2303). As a result, a time reduction (time reduction after a big hit) is set. In step S2310, the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the ceiling flag, and the ceiling counter is set to the specified rotation speed (for example, 500 times) until the b time reduction (play time) is reached (step S2311). As a result, after the big hit game, when the set number of times (for example, 500 times) is reached, the b time is shortened (play time). In step S2312, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The game state designation command includes information on the set game state (whether or not the time reduction state, the respective values of the time reduction counters C1, C2, and C3, etc.).

[Special electric accessory processing 2 (small hit game)]
33 and 34 are flowcharts of the special electric accessory process 2 (FIG. 20: step S1309). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the small hit end flag is ON (step S2400). The "small hit end flag" is a flag indicating that the opening of the large winning device 36 based on the opening pattern has been completed in the small hit game being executed. When the small hit end flag is ON (step S2400: YES), the process proceeds to step S2420. When the small hit end flag is OFF (step S2400: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the large winning opening 35 is open (step S2402). If it is open (step S2402: YES), the process proceeds to step S2410.

When the big winning opening 35 is not open (step S2402: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is time (timing) to open the big winning opening 35 (step S2404). The time (timing) for opening the large winning opening 35 is when the opening time of the small hit has elapsed and the opening start time has been reached. The opening time of the small hit is 4 seconds in the case of the opening pattern 22 and 0.01 seconds in the case of the opening pattern 23. If it is not the time (timing) to open the large winning opening 35 (step S2404: NO), this process ends. When it is time (timing) to open the big winning opening 35 (step S2404: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the big winning opening opening process (step S2406). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the large winning opening 35 according to the opening pattern (FIG. 15B) according to the small hit type. After the large winning opening opening process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a round designation command (step S2408). The round designation command includes information on the number of rounds of the special game being executed, and the game control microcomputer 81 sets the round designation command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84. As a result, the number of rounds of the special game can be notified to the sub control board 90. After setting the round specification command, this process ends.

In step S2402 described above, when the large winning opening 35 is open (step S2402: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition of the large winning opening 35 is satisfied (step S2410). ). The closing condition here is that the number of winnings in the large winning opening 35 has reached the specified maximum number of winnings (for example, 10), or that it has reached the time to close the large winning opening 35 (that is, large). It means that any of a predetermined opening time (for example, 1.5 seconds) has elapsed since the winning opening 35 was opened. When the closing condition of the large winning opening 35 is not satisfied (step S2410: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the big winning opening 35 is satisfied (step S2410: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the big winning opening closing process in order to close (close) the big winning opening 35 (step S2412). ). Here, as a small hit end process for ending the small hit game, the ending command of the small hit game is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84. After the big winning opening closing process, the game control microcomputer 81 decrements the value of the round counter by 1 (step S2414). This is because the small hit game corresponds to the 1st round. After that, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the small hit end flag to ON (step S2416), and ends this process.

In step S2400 described above, when the small hit end flag is ON (step S2400: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the interval time (ending time) after closing has elapsed (step S2420). ). If the ending time has not elapsed (step S2420: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, when the ending time has elapsed (step S2420: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the small hit end flag to OFF (step S2422) and switches the small hit flag to OFF (step S2424). After that, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the V flag is ON (step S2430). The “V flag” is a flag indicating that the game ball has passed through the V region 39 during the execution of the small hit game, and is a flag that is turned ON in the V region sensor detection process (FIG. 36) described later. .. When the V flag is OFF (step S2430: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 does not execute the two-kind jackpot game, so the round counter is set to "0" (step S3432) and the special operation status is set to "1". (Step S2434), and this process is completed. As a result, in the next special operation process, the special symbol standby process (FIG. 20: step S1302) is executed again.

In step S2430 described above, when the V flag is ON (step S2430: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the V flag to OFF (step S2436), and the jackpot flag is used to execute the two-kind jackpot game. Is switched to ON (step S2437), and the special operation status is set to "4" (step S2438). When the special operation status is set to "4", the process shifts to the special electric accessory process 1 (big hit game) in the next special operation process (FIG. 20). After setting the special operation status, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON (step S2440), and if it is ON (step S2440: YES), switches it to OFF (step S2442). As a result, the non-time saving state is set during the execution of the two-kind jackpot game. After that, in order to start the jackpot game, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the opening command of the two types of jackpot games (step S2444), and starts the opening of the jackpot game (step S2446). As a result, the small hit game in which the large winning opening 35 is opened for a short time is shifted to the two-kind big hit game.

[V opening / closing member control process]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart of the V opening / closing member control process (FIG. 17: step S106). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the V opening / closing member operation flag is ON (step S2500). When the V opening / closing member operation flag is OFF (step S2500: NO), this process ends. When the V opening / closing member operation flag is ON (step S2500: YES), the "V opening / closing member operation process" for operating the V opening / closing member 71 in a predetermined operation pattern is performed (step S2502), and in a predetermined period (timing). Perform the "V validity period setting process" in which the V passage of the game ball is regarded as valid (step S2504). When the V opening / closing member operation flag is ON, the opening of the small hit game is started (FIGS. 27: steps S1812 and S1814). Therefore, the V opening / closing member operation process and the V validity period setting process are performed according to the small hit game. It will be done.

In the V opening / closing member operation processing, a timer for measuring the operating time of the V opening / closing member 71 is set, and based on the timer, the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is turned on when the opening timing of the V opening / closing member 71 comes. , When the closing timing of the V opening / closing member 71 comes, the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is turned off. As a result, the V opening / closing member 71 moves in a constant motion from the start of the opening of the small hit game. Specifically, the V opening / closing member 71 is first controlled to a passage blocking state (closed state) for 0.01 seconds from the start of the opening of the small hit game, and then controlled to a passing allowable state (open state) for 4 seconds. Then, it is controlled to the passage blocking state (closed state) for 6 seconds.

In the V validity period setting process, the V validity period is set for the constant operation of the V opening / closing member 71 as described above. The "V valid period" is a period in which when the V region sensor 39a detects a game ball, the detection is regarded as valid and the V flag is turned on. The V valid period is from the start of opening the V region 39 (when the control of the V opening / closing member 71 is started to allow passage) to the elapse of a predetermined time. The predetermined time is set to be longer than the opening time of the V region 39 (the time for controlling the V opening / closing member 71 to pass through) (here, the opening time of the V region 39 + 1 second). This is because the time lag until the game ball that has passed the arrangement position of the V opening / closing member 71 reaches the V region 39 is taken into consideration. In the V valid period setting process, a timer for measuring the V valid period is set, and based on the timer, the V valid flag is turned ON when it is time to enable the V area 39, and the V area 39 is set. When it is time to disable it, the V valid flag is turned off. In the V region sensor detection process (FIG. 36) described later, it is determined whether or not the V valid period is in effect depending on whether or not the V valid flag is ON.

After the V opening / closing member operation processing and the V validity period setting processing, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the operation of the V opening / closing member 71 has been completed (step S2506). Specifically, the total operating time (0.01 seconds + 4 seconds + 6 seconds) from the start to the end of the constant operation of the V opening / closing member 71 based on the timer set in the V opening / closing member operation processing (step S2502). ) Has passed. When the operation of the V opening / closing member 71 is not completed (step S2506: NO), this process is completed. On the other hand, when the operation of the V opening / closing member 71 is completed (step S2506: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the V opening / closing member operation flag to OFF (step S2508), and ends this process.

Here, the relationship between the operation pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 and the opening pattern of the large winning opening 35 (opening / closing member 32) in the small hit game will be described. As described above, the V opening / closing member 71 is closed for 0.01 seconds from the start of the opening of the small hit game, then opened for 4 seconds, and then closed for 6 seconds. In the "3R normal small hit (V-passing substantially impossible)" (opening pattern 23), the big winning opening 35 is closed for 4 seconds from the start of the opening of the small hit game, and then closed for 29.5 seconds. Therefore, in the opening pattern 23, the V opening / closing member 71 closes 0.01 seconds after the large winning opening 35 is opened, making it virtually impossible for the game ball to pass through the V during the small hit game. There is. On the other hand, in "3R time reduction 1 small hit", "3R normal small hit", (open pattern 24), the big winning opening 35 is closed for 0.01 seconds from the start of the small hit game, and then 29. .Open for 5 seconds. Therefore, in the opening pattern 24, the big winning opening 35 and the V opening / closing member 71 are opened at the same time 0.01 seconds after the small hit game is started, and both opening is continued for about 4 seconds. Therefore, no matter what winning timing the game ball wins in the large winning opening 35, the game ball can pass through the V region 39. Here, if the game ball is continuously fired by hitting the right side, the large winning device 36 or the like is used so that the game ball always wins the large winning opening 35 during the opening period of the large winning opening 35. Each device is arranged. Further, the time required for the game ball passing through the large winning opening 35 to reach the arrangement position of the V opening / closing member 71 is configured to be shorter than 2 seconds. From this, in "3R time reduction 1 small hit" and "3R normal small hit", if the game ball is continuously fired by hitting right during the small hit game, the game ball always passes V. It has become like.

[V area sensor detection process]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the V region sensor detection process (FIG. 17: step S107). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the game ball has been detected by the V region sensor 39a (step S2601). If the V-region sensor 39a does not detect the game ball (step S2601: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if there is detection (step S2601: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is in the V valid period (step S2602). The V valid period is a period set by the V valid period setting process (step S2504) of the V opening / closing member control process (FIG. 35). The V valid period is set to a few seconds (ball brushing period) when the V opening / closing member 71 is opened or closed. Here, 1 second is set as the ball brushing period. If it is not during the V valid period (step S2602: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, when the V valid period is in effect (step S2602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the V flag (step S2603) and sets the V pass command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S2602: YES). Step S2604), this process is completed. The "V passage command" is a command for notifying the sub control board 90 of V passage.

7. Operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 The operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 (FIG. 5) will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 to 40. Counters, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. that appear in the operation description of the effect control microcomputer 91 are provided in the sub RAM 94. As described below, the effect control microcomputer 91 functions as an effect execution means by reading the program stored in the sub ROM 93.

[Sub-control main processing]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the sub-control main process. When the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the effect control microcomputer 91 reads a program for executing the sub control main process from the sub ROM 93. In the sub-control main process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first performs the CPU initialization process (step S4000). In the CPU initialization process, for example, the sub CPU 92 is set, various flags, statuses, counters, and the like are reset. The initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". The CPU initialization process is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed after that.

After the CPU initialization process, the effect control microcomputer 91 prohibits the interrupt of the interrupt process (step S4015) and performs the random number update process (step S4020). In this random number update process, the effect control microcomputer 91 updates by adding 1 to the various random number counter values shown in FIG. 8 (B). When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" or may be randomly changed. Further, the random value may be added by 2 or more in addition to being added by 1. Each random number may be a so-called hardware random number.

After the random number update process, the effect control microcomputer 91 permits the interrupt of the interrupt process (step S4025). While the interrupt is enabled, the sub-timer interrupt process (step S4035) can be executed. The sub-side timer interrupt process is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the sub CPU 92 at a predetermined cycle. That is, the sub-side timer interrupt processing is executed at predetermined intervals. Then, the random number update process is repeatedly executed from the end of the sub-side timer interrupt process to the start of the next sub-side timer interrupt process.

[Sub-timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the sub-side timer interrupt process (FIG. 37: step S4035). The effect control microcomputer 91 first performs a reception command analysis process (step S4300). The details of the received command analysis process (FIG. 39) will be described later. After the received command analysis process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a switch process (step S4310). In the switch processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the display contents of the display screen 7a based on the switch data (edge data and level data) output based on the detection signal from the effect button detection switch 63a. .. After the switch processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a command transmission processing (step S4315). In the command transmission process, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets various commands set in the effect command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub RAM 94 in the received command analysis process (FIG. 39) or the like in the image control board 100, the voice control board 106, and the like. It is transmitted to the lamp control board 107. The image control board 100 that has received various commands uses the image display device 7 to execute a display effect according to the received commands. Further, the sound control board 106 that has received various commands executes a sound effect that outputs sound from the speaker 67 in response to the received commands. The lamp control board 107 that has received various commands executes a lamp effect that controls light emission of the panel lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 in response to the received commands. After the command transmission process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processes (step S4320), and ends this process. In other processing, for example, random number update processing and the like are performed.

[Received command analysis processing]
FIG. 39 is a flowchart of the received command analysis process (FIG. 38: step 4300). The effect control microcomputer 91 first determines whether or not a pre-determination command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4415). When receiving (step S4415: YES), the look-ahead effect determination process is performed (step S4420). The “look-ahead effect determination process” is a process for determining whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect and the look-ahead effect pattern when the look-ahead effect is executed. In the look-ahead effect determination process, the look-ahead effect execution determination for determining whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect and the look-ahead effect pattern selection are performed. Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 acquires the counter value of the look-ahead effect random number, and refers to the acquired random number value and the look-ahead effect pattern determination table T55 stored in the sub ROM 93 to perform the look-ahead effect. Determine whether or not to perform the look-ahead effect, and determine the look-ahead effect pattern when performing the look-ahead effect. When it is determined that the look-ahead effect is executed, the selected look-ahead effect pattern is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c.

On the other hand, when the pre-determination command is not received from the main control board 80 (step S4415: NO), the pre-reading effect determination process described above is skipped. The look-ahead effect is an effect that suggests that the hold information newly stored in the special figure hold storage area 85 is likely to include a jackpot, and is executed during the variable effect.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4445). When receiving (step S4445: YES), hold display processing is performed (step S4450). In the hold display process, the counter set area 94d of the sub RAM 94 is provided based on the information regarding the special figure 1 hold ball number, the special figure 2 hold ball number, and the normal symbol hold ball number included in the hold ball number command. The values of the first special figure hold effect counter, the second special figure hold effect counter, and the normal figure hold effect counter are updated. As a result, information on the number of reserved balls can be held not only on the main control board 80 side but also on the sub control board 90 side. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 has a hold image 9A displayed on the display screen 7a based on the values of the first special figure hold effect counter, the second special figure hold effect counter, and the normal figure hold effect counter. Update 9B. On the other hand, when the hold ball number command has not been received (step S4445: NO), the above-mentioned hold display process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a fluctuation start command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4455). When receiving (step S4455: YES), the variation effect start process (FIG. 40) is performed (step S4460). The "variation effect start process" is a process of selecting a variation effect pattern (content) to be executed during the special symbol variation. The details of the variable effect start processing will be described later.
On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S4455: NO), the above-mentioned variation effect start process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a fluctuation stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4465). When receiving (step S4465: YES), the variation effect end processing is performed (step S4470). The "variable effect end process" is a process for stopping the variable effect. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S4465: NO), the above-mentioned variation effect end process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not an opening command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4475). When receiving (step S4475: YES), the opening effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4480). The "opening effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an opening effect pattern (content) to be executed at the start of a special game (big hit game or small hit game). In the opening effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the opening command, and substituting the information regarding the special figure stop symbol data included in the opening command and set at the time of winning determination for the big hit or the small hit. Set in RAM 94. Then, the effect pattern of the opening effect set in advance corresponding to the hit type indicated by the special figure stop symbol data is selected, and the opening effect start command for starting the selected opening effect is set in the effect command set area of the sub RAM 94. Set to 94b. When the opening effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 38: step 4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 outputs a predetermined opening effect image to the ROM 103. Is read from, and is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. If the opening command has not been received in step S4475 (step S4475: NO), the above-mentioned opening effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a round designation command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4485). When receiving (step S4485: YES), the round effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4490). The "round effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an open game effect pattern (content) to be executed during the opening of the big winning opening or during the interval between openings in the special game (big hit game or small hit game). In the round effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the round designation command, and sets the information regarding the special figure stop symbol data and the information regarding the number of rounds included in the round designation command in the sub RAM 94. do. Then, a preset round effect effect pattern is selected according to the hit type and the number of rounds indicated by the special figure stop symbol data, and a round effect start command for starting the selected round effect is produced by the sub RAM 94. Set in the command set area 94b. When the round effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined round effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. If the round designation command has not been received in step S4485 (step S4485: NO), the above-mentioned round effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the ending command of the jackpot game has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4495). When receiving (step S4495: YES), the ending effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4500). The "ending effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an ending effect pattern (content) to be executed during the ending of the jackpot game. When the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the ending command of the small hit game from the main control board 80, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a process different from the above-mentioned ending effect pattern determination process. If the ending command of the jackpot game has not been received in step S4495 (step S4495: NO), the above-mentioned ending effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a normal symbol variation start command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4505). If it has been received (step S4505: YES), the normal symbol variation effect start process is performed (step S4510). The "normal symbol variation effect start process" is a process of selecting a normal symbol variation effect pattern (content) to be executed during the normal symbol variation. In the normal symbol variation effect start process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first sets the information regarding the normal symbol stop symbol data included in the normal symbol variation start command and the information regarding the normal symbol variation pattern in the sub RAM 94. The set information includes game state information indicating the current game state, symbol information indicating a symbol as a determination result of the hit determination process of the normal figure, and the like. The game state information and the symbol information acquired here can be appropriately referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91. The effect control microcomputer 91 selects a preset normal symbol variation effect pattern corresponding to the normal symbol variation pattern, and issues a normal symbol variation effect start command for starting the selected normal symbol variation effect in the sub RAM 94. It is set in the effect command set area 94b. When the normal symbol variation effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined normal symbol variation effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. If the normal symbol variation start command is not received in step S4505 (step S4505: NO), the above-mentioned normal symbol variation effect start process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a normal symbol fluctuation stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4515). If it has been received (step S4515: YES), the normal symbol variation effect end process is performed (step S4520). The "normal symbol variation effect end process" is a process for stopping the normal symbol variation effect. In the normal symbol variation effect end process, the effect control microcomputer 91 analyzes the normal symbol variation stop command and sets the normal symbol variation effect end command for ending the normal symbol variation effect in the effect command set area 94b. .. If the normal symbol variation stop command is not received in step S4515 (step S4515: NO), the above-mentioned normal symbol variation effect end process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a normal symbol opening command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4525). When receiving (step S4525: YES), the normal symbol opening effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4530). The "ordinary symbol opening effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting a normal game effect pattern (content) to be executed at the time of a hit game (ordinary game) accompanying the winning of the ordinary symbol. The normal game effect selected here includes an opening effect executed during the opening and an open game effect executed during the opening of the electric chew 29. In the normal symbol opening effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the normal symbol opening command, and relates to the normal symbol stop symbol data included in the normal symbol opening command and set at the time of winning determination of the normal symbol. The information is set in the sub RAM 94. Then, the effect pattern of the opening effect set in advance corresponding to the hit type indicated by the normal symbol stop symbol data is selected, and the effect command of the sub RAM 94 is the normal symbol opening effect start command for starting the selected opening effect. Set in the set area 94b. When the normal symbol opening effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 38: step 4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 sends a predetermined opening effect image. Is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. If the normal symbol opening command has not been received in step S4525 (step S4525: NO), the above-mentioned normal symbol opening effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a normal symbol ending command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4535). When receiving (step S4535: YES), the normal symbol ending effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4540). The "ordinary symbol ending effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an ending effect pattern (content) to be executed during the ending of the winning game (ordinary game) accompanying the winning of the ordinary symbol. In the normal symbol ending effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the normal symbol ending command, and sets the information related to the normal symbol stop symbol data included in the normal symbol ending command in the sub RAM 94. Then, the effect pattern of the ending effect set in advance corresponding to the hit type indicated by the normal symbol stop symbol data is selected, and the normal symbol ending effect start command for starting the selected ending effect is the effect command of the sub RAM 94. Set in the set area 94b. When the normal symbol ending effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 38: step 4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 sends a predetermined ending effect image. Is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. If the normal symbol ending command has not been received in step S4535 (step S4535: NO), the above-mentioned normal symbol ending effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processing (step S4545). In other processing, for example, when the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the game state designation command, the information regarding the game state included in the game state designation command (whether or not the time reduction state, the time reduction counters C1, C2, C3 Each value, etc.) is held in the sub RAM 94. Further, when the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the V-pass command, the RAM 94 holds the V-passed information. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs processing based on commands other than the above (customer waiting standby command, advance determination command, RAM clear notification command, etc.), and ends this processing.

[Variation production start processing]
FIG. 40 is a flowchart of the variation effect start process (FIG. 39: step S4460). The effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the fluctuation start command (step S5000). Here, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the information regarding the special figure stop symbol data included in the fluctuation start command and the information regarding the fluctuation pattern in the sub RAM 94. The set information includes game state information indicating the current game state, symbol information indicating a symbol as a determination result of the hit determination process of special figure 1 or special figure 2, and the like. The game state information and the symbol information acquired here can be appropriately referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a variation effect pattern determination process (step S5015). In the variation effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first acquires the variation effect pattern random value for effect determination. Then, the variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern indicated by the variation start command is set from the variation effect pattern determination table T51 stored in the sub ROM 93. The effect control microcomputer 91 is further stopped by referring to the contents of the so-called step-up advance notice effect, the chance-up advance notice effect, and the stop symbol pattern determination table T52 based on the variable effect pattern random value. The combination of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R to be displayed is determined. From these, what kind of production is performed as a variable production is determined. Further, when the effect control microcomputer 91 executes the c time saving symbol fluctuation from the information related to the special symbol stop symbol data included in the fluctuation start command, the stop symbol corresponding to the c time saving fluctuation is selected. Here, it is assumed that when c time reduction is selected, the decorative symbol may be stopped and displayed at "595".

The effect control microcomputer 91 sets the variation effect start command in the effect command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub RAM 94 so that the variation effect based on the variation effect pattern determined in step S5015 is realized (step S5020). ), End this process. When the variation effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b of the subRAM 94 is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 38: step 4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 causes a predetermined variation effect. The image is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

8. Operation of the board movable body The operation of the board movable body (first movable accessory 14, second movable accessory 15, etc.) will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 49. The effect control microcomputer 91 performs drive control for operating movable accessories such as the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 during a game effect (display effect) or in an initial operation when the power is turned on. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 causes the image display device 7 to display a specific image during the game effect (display effect) or in the initial operation when the power is turned on, or the first movable accessory 14 or the second movable accessory 14 or the second movable accessory. Display / light emission control is performed such that 15 and the like are made to emit light in a specific mode.

The operation of the first movable accessory 14 will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 42. FIG. 41 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the movement of the first movable accessory 14 in the advancing direction (movement in the advancing direction). FIG. 42 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second aspect of the first movable accessory 14.

As shown in FIG. 41, the first movable accessory 14 includes a left movable accessory 14L and a right movable accessory 14R. The left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are configured to be movable in the left-right direction, respectively, and half of the ring-shaped decorative portion (left decorative portion and right decorative portion) is attached to the tip side. That is, the left side decoration part and the right side decoration part each have an arc shape that is half of the ring shape. As shown in FIG. 1, the first movable accessory 14 is at a retracted position (home position) in which the left movable accessory 14L is stored on the left side of the display screen 7a and the right movable accessory 14R is stored on the right side of the display screen 7a. It can be stationary (first aspect). At this time, a part of the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R can be visually recognized. In the first movable accessory 14, as shown in FIG. 41, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R advance toward the center of the display screen 7a (in a direction close to each other) from the state of FIG. By moving, at the advance position (deployment position) shown in FIG. 42, the left side decoration part and the right side decoration part are united to form one decorative member (combination accessory) (second aspect). Here, the coalesced accessory forms the contour of the face. In this second aspect, the united accessory in which the left side decoration part and the right side decoration part are united covers a part near the center of the display screen 7a on the front surface of the image display device 7, and is displayed from the opening formed in the center. The screen 7a stands still in a visible state. That is, the united accessory is configured so that only the outline of the face is formed, there is no central portion of the face, and the display screen 7a can be visually recognized instead. The first movable accessory 14 can move (evacuate) from the advance position of FIG. 42 to the retracted position shown in FIG. 1 by moving (evacuating) via the state of FIG. 41, and can be stationary there. ..

The operation of the second movable accessory 15 will be described with reference to FIG. 43. FIG. 43 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second aspect of the second movable accessory 15. The second movable accessory 15 is provided with a rectangular decorative portion described as "OARO", and is configured to be movable up and down. As shown in FIG. 1, the second movable accessory 15 can be stationary at the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a (first aspect). At this time, a part of the second movable accessory 15 becomes difficult to see. The second movable accessory 15 can move downward from the state of FIG. 1 toward the center of the display screen 7a and stand still at the advance position (deployment position) shown in FIG. 43 (second aspect). .. In this second aspect, the decorative portion is stopped on the front surface of the image display device 7 so as to cover the vicinity slightly above the center of the display screen 7a. The second movable accessory 15 can move (retract) upward from the advance position in FIG. 43 to the retracted position shown in FIG. 1, and can be stationary there.

FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the display effect of the illumination panel 18. The illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 is a transparent flat plate member attached to the central opening of the front frame 53, and the game area 3 of the game board 2 can be visually recognized through the illumination panel 18. That is, the illumination panel 18 is arranged in front of the image display device 7, and the image displayed on the image display device 7 is visible through the illumination panel 18. The illumination panel 18 is configured to be able to display a predetermined image on the main surface by irradiating the end surface with LED light. Here, an image of a smiley face is displayed as an example. The illumination panel 18 is configured to be able to display a small number of types of images in a plurality of types of colors depending on the irradiation direction and color of the LED light. The illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 may be arranged on the front side of the image display device 7, and may not necessarily be on the front side of the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15. That is, the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 is arranged on the rear side (rear side) of the decorative member 10 and the third movable accessory 17, which will be described later, in addition to the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15. It may be.

FIG. 45 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the light emission effect of the frame lamp 66. A plurality of LERs are arranged side by side on the surface of the frame lamp 66, and each of them can be switched on and off. As a result, the frame lamp 66 can emit light at an arbitrary position with an arbitrary color. The frame lamp 66 may be configured as a liquid crystal panel.

FIG. 46 is an explanatory view illustrating the decorative member 10. The gaming machine 1 may have a configuration other than that described above. For example, the gaming machine may include a decorative member 10. Here, the decorative member 10 is fixed to the lower right of the display screen 7a, and has a sub liquid crystal device 13 in the center. The decorative member 10 has a circular shape, and the sub liquid crystal device 13 also has a circular shape. An arbitrary image can be displayed on the sub liquid crystal device 13.

The operation of the third movable accessory 17 and the like will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 and 48. FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a moving mode of the third movable accessory 17. FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a moving mode and a display mode of the third movable accessory 17. The gaming machine 1 may have a configuration other than that described above. For example, the gaming machine may include a third movable accessory 17. The third movable accessory 17 is configured to be movable in the left-right direction in front of the image display device 7. It is configured to move (advance) from the retracted position toward the right end of the display screen 7a and move in the left-right direction on the front surface of the display screen 7a. In addition, the display screen 7a can be stopped at an arbitrary advance position in front of the display screen 7a. The movement mode of the third movable accessory 17 can be arbitrarily set. Further, as shown in FIG. 48, the third movable accessory 17 has a liquid crystal panel arranged on the surface thereof, and can display an arbitrary image. The third movable accessory 17 may have a decorative portion formed at least in a part thereof, or may have a transparency.

FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a combination effect of the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, the third movable accessory 17, and the decorative member 10. As shown in FIG. 49, the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, the third movable accessory 17, and the decorative member 10 can be in a state in which a part thereof overlaps with each other. Further, the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the third movable accessory 17 may be composed of a liquid crystal panel so that any image can be displayed, or at least a part thereof is transparent. The image displayed on the display screen 7a via the movable accessories 14, 15 and 17 may be visible.

9. Other production examples, effect examples, modification examples, and mode examples of the present embodiment Each production example (display production example, accessory movable production example) of the present embodiment will be described below. In addition, an example of the effect, an example of modification, and an example of mode for the effect example will also be described. As described above, the effect described below is based on various information (hit determination information, hit type information, fluctuation pattern information, advance determination information, etc.) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 81, and the effect control microcomputer 91 ( This is an effect realized by the image control microcomputer 101). The following display effect example is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, although the hold display (hold icon) may be omitted in the display effect example, it is actually displayed unless otherwise specified.

Hereinafter, the display content change effects A to C when the conditions are satisfied will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 to 52. The display content change effect when this condition is satisfied can be executed during the change effect of the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the display content change effect when the condition is satisfied, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103. The image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Further, when the lamp control board 107 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the display content change effect when the condition is satisfied, the first movable accessory 14 or the second movable accessory 14 or the second A movable accessory such as the movable accessory 15 is driven.

[Display content change effect A when conditions are met]
FIG. 50 is a diagram for explaining the display content change effect A when the condition is satisfied. The display content change effect when the condition is satisfied is an effect in which the effect content changes at the time of a certain special figure change during the specific period depending on whether or not the preset conditions are satisfied during the specific period when the special figure change is executed. be. Here, the "period during the time saving state" is set as the "timed period". In addition, "special figure 2 variation is executed" is set as a "preset condition". As "a certain special figure change time during a specific period", "a special figure change time when the number of remaining time reductions is 10" and "the last special figure change time in the time reduction state" are set.

In the display content change effect A when the condition is satisfied, the special figure change (special figure 1 change or special figure 2 change) is executed in the time saving state after the big hit game of the big hit type "5R time reduction 100 times big hit" (Fig. 10) of special figure 1. Explain as if it has been done. The player executes a right-handed hit, and when the gate 28 is passed, the electric chew 29 is opened, and the game ball that has entered the electric chew winning opening 34 enters either the first winning opening 75 or the second winning opening 76. Sphere (see FIG. 13 (B) “Special Figure 1 Time saving state”). When the game ball enters the first winning opening 75 and the second winning opening 76, either the first starting opening 30 or the second starting opening 21 is opened, and the game ball is opened in the opened starting ports 30 and 21. By entering the ball, the first special figure hold (special figure 1 hold) or the second special figure hold (special figure 2 hold) occurs. Due to the opening pattern of the electric chew 29 when passing through the gate 28, the opening probability of the first starting port 30 is about 277/278, and the opening probability of the second starting port 21 is about 1/279 (FIG. 13 (B). ), FIG. 14). In the gaming machine 1, the digestion of the first special figure hold is executed in preference to the digestion of the second special figure hold (FIG. 21).

As shown in FIG. 50 (A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variablely displayed on the display screen 7a during the variation of the special figure 1. The variable display here includes not only a display in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are visually recognizable when they are moving at high speed, but also a display in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are invisible due to high-speed movement. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of symbols including the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and the special symbol is variably displayed by the variable display of the set of symbols (here, the decorative symbol 8L, 8C, 8R). The special figure 1 variation) is represented, and the special figure lottery result (here, the special figure 1 lottery result) is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols.

On the display screen 7a, a hold icon 9A representing the special figure 1 hold, a hold icon 9B representing the special figure 2 hold, and a variable icon (the hold icon) 9C are displayed. Here, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C corresponds to the special figure 1 lottery being executed. On the display screen 7a, in addition, the time-saving remaining number display indicating the remaining time-saving number of times, which is expressed as "time-saving remaining 21 times", and the special figure which is currently changing, which is expressed as "special figure 1 fluctuation", are displayed. A special map display during change indicating the type is displayed.

FIG. 50 (B) shows a state in which the next special figure 1 change following the special figure 1 change shown in FIG. 50 (A) has been completed. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed. Since the special figure 1 hold was not acquired during the period of FIGS. 50 (A) and 50 (B) and the special figure 1 hold became 0, the special figure 2 hold is exhausted. On the display screen 7a, the hold icon 9A disappears, and the hold icon 9B shifts to become the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C. After that, the special figure 2 variation is executed.

When the special figure 2 variation is executed, as shown in FIG. 50 (C), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R representing the variable display of the second special symbol (special figure 2 variation) are displayed on the display screen 7a. The display is displayed. In addition, on the display screen 7a, "19 times remaining in the time saving" is displayed as the display of the number of remaining times in the time saving, and "special figure 2 fluctuation" is displayed as the special figure display during the change. That is, here, the condition that the special figure 1 hold to be preferentially digested becomes 0 and the special figure 2 hold is digested during the time saving state is satisfied by the existence of the special figure 2 hold. Become.

In this state, the first starting port 30 is opened by entering the first winning opening 75, and the holding icon 9A is newly added by entering the first starting opening 30, as shown in FIG. 50 (D). Is displayed. After that, in FIG. 50 (E), the variation of the special figure 2 is completed, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed. Since there is one special figure 1 hold, the special figure 1 hold is digested. On the display screen 7a, the hold icon 9A shifts to become the variable icon (hold icon) 9C. After that, the special figure 1 variation is executed.

When the special figure 1 variation is executed, as shown in FIG. 50 (F), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R representing the variable display of the first special symbol (special figure 1 variation) are displayed on the display screen 7a. The display is displayed. In addition, on the display screen 7a, "time reduction remaining 18 times" is displayed as the time reduction remaining number of times display, and "special figure 1 variation" is displayed as the changing special figure display.

After that, when the special figure fluctuation (special figure 1 fluctuation or special figure 2 fluctuation) is repeated, as shown in FIG. 50 (G), "time reduction remaining 10 times" is displayed as the time saving remaining number display. That is, "the remaining number of time reductions is 10". At this time, as shown in FIG. 50 (H), the character image CG appears. This character image CG is displayed in "when the special figure changes when the remaining number of time reductions is 10" when the condition that "the special figure 2 variation is executed in the time saving state" is satisfied. Here, as shown in FIG. 50 (B), the condition is satisfied because the special figure 2 variation is executed at the time when the time reduction remains 20 times. If the condition is not satisfied at the time of the 10th remaining time reduction, the character image CG is not displayed at the time of the "10th remaining time reduction fluctuation". That is, depending on whether or not the special figure 2 variation is executed during the short time period, the character image CG may or may not appear, and the production content changes. Here, the character image CG is a smiley face image, and is displayed so as to overlap with the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R representing the variable display of the first special symbol (special figure 1 variation). After that, as shown in FIG. 50 (I), the display of the character image CG disappears, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed.

After that, when the special figure fluctuation (special figure 1 fluctuation or special figure 2 fluctuation) is further repeated, as shown in FIG. 50 (J), "time reduction remaining 0 times" is displayed as the time saving remaining number display. That is, it becomes "at the time of the last special figure change in the time saving state". At this time, as shown in FIG. 50 (K), a result image showing the number of fluctuations of the special figure 2 executed during the time saving state, which is expressed as “the number of fluctuations of the special figure 2 once” appears. This result image is displayed at "at the time of the last special figure change during the time saving state" when the condition "the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed in the time saving state" is satisfied. Here, as shown in FIG. 50 (B), the condition is satisfied because the special figure 2 variation is executed once when the time reduction remains 20 times. If the condition is not satisfied at the time of the 0th time remaining, the result image is not displayed at the "last special figure change during the time saving state". That is, depending on whether or not the special figure 2 variation is executed during the short time period, the result image may or may not appear, and the production content changes. Here, the result image consists of a rectangular frame image and a character image drawn inside the frame image, and variations of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R representing variable display of the first special symbol (special diagram 1 variation). It is displayed overlapping the display. After that, as shown in FIG. 50 (L), the display of the result image is maintained even after the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed.

[Display content change effect B when conditions are met]
FIG. 51 is a diagram for explaining the display content change effect B when the condition is satisfied. The display content change effect when the condition is satisfied is an effect in which the effect content changes at the time of a certain special figure change during the specific period depending on whether or not the preset conditions are satisfied during the specific period when the special figure change is executed. be. Here, the "period during the time saving state" is set as the "timed period". In addition, "special figure 2 hold occurs" is set as a "preset condition". As "a certain special figure change time during a specific period", "a special figure change time when the number of remaining time reductions is 10" and "the last special figure change time in the time reduction state" are set. 51 (A) to 51 (F) show the flow of the effect when the conditions are satisfied, and FIGS. 51 (G) to 51 (L) show the flow of the effect when the conditions are not satisfied.

In the display content change effect B when the condition is satisfied, the special figure change (special figure 1 change or special figure 2 change) is executed in the time saving state after the big hit game of the big hit type "5R time reduction 100 times big hit" (Fig. 10) of special figure 1. Explain as if it has been done. The player executes a right-handed hit, and when the gate 28 is passed, the electric chew 29 is opened, and the game ball that has entered the electric chew winning opening 34 enters either the first winning opening 75 or the second winning opening 76. Sphere (see FIG. 13 (B) “Special Figure 1 Time saving state”). When the game ball enters the first winning opening 75 and the second winning opening 76, either the first starting opening 30 or the second starting opening 21 is opened, and the game ball is opened in the opened starting ports 30 and 21. By entering the ball, the first special figure hold (special figure 1 hold) or the second special figure hold (special figure 2 hold) occurs. Due to the opening pattern of the electric chew 29 when passing through the gate 28, the opening probability of the first starting port 30 is about 277/278, and the opening probability of the second starting port 21 is about 1/279 (FIG. 13 (B). ), FIG. 14). In the gaming machine 1, the digestion of the first special figure hold is executed in preference to the digestion of the second special figure hold (FIG. 21).

FIGS. 51 (A) to 51 (F) show the flow of the effect when the conditions are satisfied. As shown in FIG. 51 (A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variablely displayed on the display screen 7a during the variation of the special figure 1. The variable display here includes not only a display in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are visually recognizable when they are moving at high speed, but also a display in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are invisible due to high-speed movement. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of symbols including the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and the special symbol is variably displayed by the variable display of the set of symbols (here, the decorative symbol 8L, 8C, 8R). The special figure 1 variation) is represented, and the special figure lottery result (here, the special figure 1 lottery result) is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols.

On the display screen 7a, a hold icon 9A representing the special figure 1 hold and a variable icon (the hold icon) 9C are displayed. The hold icon 9B representing the special figure 2 hold is not displayed. Here, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C corresponds to the special figure 1 lottery being executed. On the display screen 7a, in addition, the time-saving remaining number display indicating the remaining time-saving number of times, which is expressed as "time-saving remaining 21 times", and the special figure which is currently changing, which is expressed as "special figure 1 fluctuation", are displayed. A special map display during change indicating the type is displayed.

FIG. 51 (B) shows the state when the time reduction remaining number display is “time reduction remaining 18 times”. The variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R representing the variable display of the first special symbol (variable display of the special diagram 1) is displayed. At this time, the game ball passes through the gate 28, enters the second winning opening 76 according to the opening pattern of the electric chew 29, the second starting opening 21 is opened, and the ball enters the second starting opening 21. The hold icon 9B is newly displayed.

After that, the special figure fluctuation (special figure 1 fluctuation or special figure 2 fluctuation) is repeated, and FIG. 51 (C) shows the state when the time reduction remaining number display is "time reduction remaining 15 times". The variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R representing the variable display of the first special symbol (variable display of the special diagram 1) is displayed. At this time, the game ball passes through the gate 28, enters the second winning opening 76 according to the opening pattern of the electric chew 29, the second starting opening 21 is opened, and the ball enters the second starting opening 21. The state in which the second hold icon 9B is displayed is shown.

After that, the special figure fluctuation (special figure 1 fluctuation or special figure 2 fluctuation) is further repeated, and FIG. 51 (D) shows the state when the time reduction remaining number display is "time reduction remaining 10 times". That is, "when the special figure fluctuates when the number of remaining time reductions is 10". The variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R representing the variable display of the first special symbol (variable display of the special diagram 1) is displayed. At this time, the character image CG appears. This character image CG is displayed in "when the special figure fluctuates when the remaining number of time reductions is 10" when the condition that "the special figure 2 hold occurs in the time saving state" is satisfied. Here, as shown in FIGS. 51 (B) and 51 (C), the condition is satisfied because the special figure 2 hold occurs at the time of 18 times remaining in the time saving and at the time of 15 times. In the gaming machine 1, since the opening probability of the second starting port 21 is about 1/279 due to the opening pattern of the electric chew 29 when passing through the gate 28, the special figure 2 hold is unlikely to occur. Therefore, the appearance of this character image CG can give the player a sense of accomplishment. If the condition is not satisfied at the time of the 10th remaining time reduction, the character image CG is not displayed at the time of the "10th remaining time reduction fluctuation". That is, depending on whether or not the special figure 2 hold occurs during the short time period, the character image CG may or may not appear, and the production content changes. Here, the character image CG is a smiley face image, and the same number of character image CGs as the number of the generated special figure 2 hold appears. After that, the display of the character image CG disappears, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed.

After that, when the special figure fluctuation (special figure 1 fluctuation or special figure 2 fluctuation) is further repeated, as shown in FIG. 51 (E), "time reduction remaining 0 times" is displayed as the time saving remaining number display. That is, it becomes "at the time of the last special figure change in the time saving state". At this time, as shown in FIG. 51 (F), a result image showing the number of special figure 2 holdes generated during the time saving state, which is represented as "the number of special figure 2 hold acquisitions 2", appears. This result image is displayed at the "last special figure change during the time saving state" when the condition "the special figure 2 hold occurs in the time saving state" is satisfied. Here, as shown in FIGS. 51 (B) and 51 (C), the condition is satisfied because the special figure 2 hold occurs at the time of 18 times remaining in the time saving and at the time of 15 times. If the condition is not satisfied at the time of the 0th time remaining, the result image is not displayed at the "last special figure change during the time saving state". That is, depending on whether or not the special figure 2 hold occurs during the short time period, the result image may or may not appear, and the production content changes. Here, the result image consists of a rectangular frame image and a character image drawn inside the frame image, and variations of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R representing variable display of the first special symbol (special diagram 1 variation). It is displayed overlapping the display. After that, even after the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed, the display of the result image is maintained.

FIGS. 51 (G) to 51 (L) show the flow of the effect when the conditions are not satisfied. FIG. 51 (G) is the same state as in FIG. 51 (A). FIG. 51 (H) shows the state when the time reduction remaining number display is “time reduction remaining 18 times”. The variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R representing the variable display of the first special symbol (variable display of the special diagram 1) is displayed. Unlike FIG. 51 (B), the ball does not enter the second starting port 21, and the hold icon 9B is not displayed.

After that, the special figure fluctuation (special figure 1 fluctuation or special figure 2 fluctuation) is repeated, and FIG. 51 (I) shows the state when the time reduction remaining number display is "time reduction remaining 15 times". The variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R representing the variable display of the first special symbol (variable display of the special diagram 1) is displayed. Unlike FIG. 51 (C), the ball does not enter the second starting port 21, and the hold icon 9B is not displayed.

After that, the special figure fluctuation (special figure 1 fluctuation or special figure 2 fluctuation) is further repeated, and FIG. 51 (J) shows the state when the time reduction remaining number display is "time reduction remaining 10 times". That is, "when the special figure fluctuates when the number of remaining time reductions is 10". The variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R representing the variable display of the first special symbol (variable display of the special diagram 1) is displayed. Unlike FIG. 51 (D), the character image CG does not appear. The character image CG is displayed in "when the special figure fluctuates when the remaining number of time reductions is 10" when the condition that "the special figure 2 hold occurs in the time saving state" is satisfied. In FIGS. 51 (G) to 51 (L), the special figure 2 hold has never occurred after the time reduction occurred. In the gaming machine 1, since the opening probability of the second starting port 21 is about 1/279 due to the opening pattern of the electric chew 29 when passing through the gate 28, the special figure 2 hold is unlikely to occur. Therefore, there may be a case where the character image CG does not appear. In this way, depending on whether or not the special figure 2 hold occurs during the short time period, the character image CG may or may not appear, and the content of the effect changes.

After that, when the special figure fluctuation (special figure 1 fluctuation or special figure 2 fluctuation) is further repeated, as shown in FIG. 51 (K), "time reduction remaining 0 times" is displayed as the time saving remaining number display. That is, it becomes "at the time of the last special figure change in the time saving state". Unlike FIG. 51 (F), the result image showing the number of special figure 2 holds that occurred during the time saving state represented by “the number of special figure 2 hold acquisitions 〇” does not appear. This result image is displayed at the "last special figure change during the time saving state" when the condition "the special figure 2 hold occurs in the time saving state" is satisfied. In FIGS. 51 (G) to 51 (L), the special figure 2 hold has never occurred after the time reduction occurred, and the condition for displaying the result image is not satisfied. In this way, depending on whether or not the special figure 2 hold occurs during the short period of time, the result image may or may not appear, and the content of the effect changes.

[Display content change effect C when conditions are met]
FIG. 52 is a diagram for explaining the display content change effect C when the condition is satisfied. The display content change effect when the condition is satisfied is an effect in which the effect content changes at the time of a certain special figure change during the specific period depending on whether or not the preset conditions are satisfied during the specific period when the special figure change is executed. be. Here, the "period during the time saving state" is set as the "timed period". In addition, "special figure 2 hold occurs" is set as a "preset condition". As "a certain special figure change time during a specific period", "a special figure change time when the number of remaining time reductions is 10" and "the last special figure change time in the time reduction state" are set. 52 (A) to 52 (F) show the flow of the effect when the conditions are satisfied, and FIGS. 52 (G) to 52 (L) show the flow of the effect when the conditions are not satisfied.

In the display content change effect C when the condition is satisfied, the special figure change (special figure 1 change or special figure 2 change) is executed in the time saving state after the big hit game of the big hit type "5R time reduction 100 times big hit" (Fig. 10) of special figure 1. Explain as if it has been done. The player executes a right-handed hit, and when the gate 28 is passed, the electric chew 29 is opened, and the game ball that has entered the electric chew winning opening 34 enters either the first winning opening 75 or the second winning opening 76. Sphere (see FIG. 13 (B) “Special Figure 1 Time saving state”). When the game ball enters the first winning opening 75 and the second winning opening 76, either the first starting opening 30 or the second starting opening 21 is opened, and the game ball is opened in the opened starting ports 30 and 21. By entering the ball, the first special figure hold (special figure 1 hold) or the second special figure hold (special figure 2 hold) occurs. Due to the opening pattern of the electric chew 29 when passing through the gate 28, the opening probability of the first starting port 30 is about 277/278, and the opening probability of the second starting port 21 is about 1/279 (FIG. 13 (B). ), FIG. 14). In the gaming machine 1, the digestion of the first special figure hold is executed in preference to the digestion of the second special figure hold (FIG. 21).

FIGS. 52 (A) to 52 (F) show the flow of the effect when the conditions are satisfied. As shown in FIG. 52 (A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variablely displayed on the display screen 7a during the variation of the special figure 1. The variable display here includes not only a display in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are visually recognizable when they are moving at high speed, but also a display in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are invisible due to high-speed movement. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of symbols including the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and the special symbol is variably displayed by the variable display of the set of symbols (here, the decorative symbol 8L, 8C, 8R). The special figure 1 variation) is represented, and the special figure lottery result (here, the special figure 1 lottery result) is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols.

On the display screen 7a, a hold icon 9A representing the special figure 1 hold, a hold icon 9B representing the special figure 2 hold, and a variable icon (the hold icon) 9C are displayed. Here, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C corresponds to the special figure 1 lottery being executed. On the display screen 7a, in addition, the time-saving remaining number display indicating the remaining time-saving number of times, which is expressed as "time-saving remaining 21 times", and the special figure which is currently changing, which is expressed as "special figure 1 fluctuation", are displayed. A special map display during change indicating the type is displayed.

The special figure fluctuation (special figure 1 fluctuation or special figure 2 fluctuation) is repeated, and FIG. 52 (B) shows the state when the time reduction remaining number display is “time reduction remaining 10 times”. That is, "when the special figure fluctuates when the number of remaining time reductions is 10". The variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R representing the variable display of the first special symbol (variable display of the special diagram 1) is displayed. At this time, a result image showing the number of special figure 2 holdes generated during the time saving state, which is expressed as "the number of special figure 2 hold acquisitions 1", appears. Specifically, a result image showing the number of special figure 2 holds that have occurred from the start of the time reduction to the present time during the time reduction state appears. As a result, the image is always displayed when the special figure fluctuates when the remaining number of time reductions is 10, and when the condition that "special figure 2 hold occurs in the time reduction state" is satisfied, "special figure 2 hold acquisition" is obtained. The display content of the "○" part of "Number of" changes. Here, since one special figure 2 hold has occurred, the part of "0" is displayed as "1". Here, even if the special figure 2 hold is 0 when the special figure 2 hold is exhausted after the special figure 2 hold occurs and the special figure 2 hold is 0 at the time of "when the special figure 2 hold is 10", "the number of special figure 2 hold acquisitions". "Is" one ". On the other hand, if the special figure 2 hold is exhausted after it occurs and the special figure 2 hold is 0 when the special figure 2 hold is "when the number of remaining time reductions is 10", the "special figure 2 hold acquisition number" is "0". May be displayed. In the gaming machine 1, since the opening probability of the second starting port 21 is about 1/279 due to the opening pattern of the electric chew 29 when passing through the gate 28, the special figure 2 hold is unlikely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of accomplishment by displaying the number of acquisitions of the special figure 2 hold in the result image. If the condition is not satisfied at the 10th time remaining, the result images having different contents are displayed as shown in FIG. 52 (H). That is, the display content of the result image changes depending on whether or not the special figure 2 hold occurs during the short time period. Here, the result image consists of a rectangular frame image and a character image drawn inside the frame image, and variations of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R representing variable display of the first special symbol (special diagram 1 variation). It is displayed overlapping the display. After the result image is displayed, the display disappears after a lapse of a predetermined time, and then the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed.

After that, the special figure fluctuation (special figure 1 fluctuation or special figure 2 fluctuation) is repeated, and FIG. 52 (C) shows the state when the time reduction remaining number display is "time reduction remaining 5 times". The variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R representing the variable display of the first special symbol (variable display of the special diagram 1) is displayed. At this time, the game ball passes through the gate 28, enters the second winning opening 76 according to the opening pattern of the electric chew 29, the second starting opening 21 is opened, and the ball enters the second starting opening 21. The state in which the second hold icon 9B is displayed is shown.

After that, when the special figure fluctuation (special figure 1 fluctuation or special figure 2 fluctuation) is further repeated, as shown in FIG. 52 (D), "time reduction remaining 0 times" is displayed as the time saving remaining number display. That is, it becomes "at the time of the last special figure change in the time saving state". At this time, the result image for the second time during the time saving, which is expressed as "Special Figure 2 Hold acquisition number 2", appears. Specifically, a second result image showing the number of special figure 2 holdes that have occurred from the start of the time reduction to the present time during the time reduction state appears. This second result image is always displayed at the time of "the last special figure change during the time saving state", and when the condition "special figure 2 hold occurs during the time saving state" is satisfied, "special figure 2 hold acquisition is acquired". The display content of the "○" part of "Number of" changes. Here, since there are two special figures 2 hold, the part of "○" is displayed as "2". Here, even if the special figure 2 hold is digested after the occurrence of the special figure 2 hold and the special figure 2 hold is 0 at the "last special figure change during the time saving state", the "special figure 2 hold acquisition number" is "2". "Individual". On the other hand, if the special figure 2 hold is exhausted after the occurrence and the special figure 2 hold is 0 at the "last special figure change during the time saving state", the "special figure 2 hold acquisition number" is displayed as "0". You may do so. If the condition is not satisfied at the time of the last special figure change in the time saving state, a result image having different contents is displayed as shown in FIG. 52 (J). That is, the display content of the result image changes depending on whether or not the special figure 2 hold occurs during the short time period. When the variation of the special figure 1 of FIG. 52 (D) is stopped, the gaming state is switched from the time saving state to the normal state.

After that, as shown in FIG. 52 (E), while the display of the result image is maintained, the special figure 1 variation is repeatedly executed until the special figure 1 hold is eliminated. Here, since there are three special figure 1 holds at the time of FIG. 52 (D), the special figure 1 lottery is executed three times. At this time, the display of the number of remaining time reductions is maintained as "0 times remaining in the time reduction", and the special figure display during the change is expressed as "special figure 1 fluctuation".

When all the special figure 1 hold is exhausted, as shown in FIG. 52 (F), the special figure 2 hold is digested and the special figure 2 variation is executed. At this time, the character image of "Special Figure 2 Fluctuation Start !!" is displayed. The special figure display during change is expressed as "special figure 2 change".

FIGS. 52 (G) to 52 (L) show the flow of the effect when the conditions are not satisfied. In FIG. 52 (G), as in FIG. 52 (A), the number of times display of "21 times remaining in the time saving" is displayed, and the special figure display during the change is displayed, which is expressed as "special figure 1 variation". The variation display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the variation of the special figure 1 is displayed. On the other hand, unlike FIG. 52 (A), the hold icon 9B representing the special figure 2 hold is not displayed. That is, the special figure 2 hold has not yet been acquired in the time saving state.

FIG. 52 (H) shows a state when the time reduction remaining number display is “time reduction remaining 10 times”. The variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R representing the variable display of the first special symbol (variable display of the special diagram 1) is displayed. Unlike FIG. 51 (B), the ball does not enter the second starting port 21, and the hold icon 9B is not displayed. At this time, a result image indicating that the special figure 2 hold did not occur during the time saving state appears, which is expressed as "special figure 2 hold has not been acquired yet". Specifically, a result image showing the number of special figure 2 holds that have occurred from the start of the time reduction to the present time during the time reduction state appears. Here, it is shown that the number of special figure 2 holdes that have occurred up to the present time during the time saving state is 0. As a result, the image is always displayed when the special figure fluctuates when the remaining number of time reductions is 10, and when the condition that the special figure 2 hold occurs in the time reduction state is not satisfied, the special figure 2 hold is performed. "Not yet acquired" is displayed, and the content is different from when the conditions are met.

After that, the special figure fluctuation (special figure 1 fluctuation or special figure 2 fluctuation) is repeated, and FIG. 52 (I) shows the state when the time reduction remaining number display is "time reduction remaining 5 times". The variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R representing the variable display of the first special symbol (variable display of the special diagram 1) is displayed. Unlike FIG. 52 (C), the ball does not enter the second starting port 21, and the hold icon 9B is not displayed.

After that, the special figure fluctuation (special figure 1 fluctuation or special figure 2 fluctuation) is further repeated, and FIG. 52 (J) shows the state when the time saving remaining number display is "time saving remaining 0 times". That is, it becomes "at the time of the last special figure change in the time saving state". At this time, a result image indicating that the special figure 2 hold did not occur during the time saving state appears, which is expressed as "the special figure 2 hold is not acquired". Specifically, a second result image showing the number of special figure 2 holdes that have occurred from the start of the time reduction to the present time during the time reduction state appears. Here, it is shown that the number of special figure 2 holdes that have occurred up to the present time during the time saving state is 0. This second result image is always displayed at the time of "the last special figure change in the time saving state", and when the condition "special figure 2 holding occurs in the time saving state" is not satisfied, "special figure 2 holding" is not satisfied. "Not acquired" is displayed, and the content different from the case where the conditions are met is displayed. Here, if the special figure 2 hold is exhausted after it occurs and the special figure 2 hold is 0 at the "last special figure change during the time saving state", the number of special figure 2 hold acquisitions is 0. When the variation of the special figure 1 of FIG. 52 (J) is stopped, the gaming state is switched from the time saving state to the normal state.

After that, as shown in FIG. 52 (K), when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed and the variable icon (the holding icon) 9C is digested, the shift movement of the holding icon 9A causes the next special figure 1. Fluctuations begin. At this time, as shown in FIG. 52 (L), the character image of "normal state start !!" is displayed.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the display content change effect when the condition is satisfied.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50, "the number of remaining time reductions" depends on whether or not the condition "the special figure 2 variation is executed" is satisfied during the time reduction in which the special figure variation is executed. The content of the effect displayed on the display screen 7a changes between "when the special figure changes when is 10" and "when the last special figure changes during the time saving state". Further, as shown in FIGS. 51 and 52, "when the number of remaining time reductions is 10" depending on whether or not the condition "special figure 2 hold occurs" is satisfied during the time reduction when the special figure fluctuation is executed. The content of the effect displayed on the display screen 7a changes between "when the special figure changes" and "when the last special figure changes during the time saving state". According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the special figure change is executed a plurality of times during the specific period (during the time saving period), and the certain special figure change time is the last during the specific period (during the time saving period). It is the time when the special figure fluctuates. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the specific period is a period during the time saving state. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the preset condition is that the special figure 2 is held due to the winning. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the special figure 2 hold is the special figure hold of the special figure 1 hold and the special figure 2 hold, whichever is not preferentially digested. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the preset conditions are satisfied, for example, when the first effect of displaying the character image CG and the result image is executed and the preset conditions are not satisfied. A second effect is executed in which the character image CG and the result image are not displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the display content change effect when the condition is satisfied.
[Modification 1]
Display content change effect when the condition is satisfied In A to C, when the condition is satisfied, the effect is performed twice, "when the special figure changes when the number of remaining time reductions is 10" and "when the last special figure changes during the time reduction state". The content was supposed to be changed. However, the effect content may change only when either "when the special figure fluctuates when the number of remaining time reductions is 10" or "when the last special figure fluctuates during the time reduction state".

[Modification 2]
In the display content change effects A to C when the condition is satisfied, the character image CG is displayed when the condition is satisfied, "when the special figure changes when the number of remaining time reductions is 10," and when the condition is not satisfied, the character image CG is displayed. Was not displayed. However, the mode in which the production content is changed depending on whether or not the conditions are satisfied is not limited to this. For example, different character images, different background images, different story images, and the like may be displayed, different music may be played, and different character actions may be executed, depending on whether or not the conditions are satisfied. Further, when the condition is satisfied, the above-mentioned effect may be executed at the time of "the last change of the special figure in the time saving state".

[Modification 3]
In the display content change effects A to C when the condition is satisfied, the character image CG is displayed when the condition is satisfied, "when the special figure changes when the number of remaining time reductions is 10". However, when the condition is satisfied, the character image CG may be displayed at the "last special figure change during the time saving state". Further, the character image CG and the result image may be displayed together.

[Modification example 4]
In the display content change effects A to C when the conditions are satisfied, "special figure 2 fluctuation is executed" and "special figure 2 hold occurs" are set as "preset conditions". However, the "preset condition" may be another condition. For example, it is possible to set arbitrary conditions such as when a player performs a predetermined operation of the effect button 63 or when a predetermined image appears.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect A1-1]
An effect display means that can display multiple types of effects,
A gaming machine equipped with a special figure display means capable of displaying special figure fluctuations.
The content of the effect displayed on the effect display means at the time of a certain special figure change during the specific period changes depending on whether or not the preset conditions are satisfied during the specific period in which the special figure change is executed. ,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A1-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A1-1.
During the specific period, the special figure variation is executed a plurality of times.
The certain special figure change time is the last special figure change time during the specific period.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A1-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect A1-1 or aspect A1-2.
The specific period is a period during the time saving state.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1-1 to A1-3.
The preset condition is the occurrence of a special figure hold due to a prize.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A1-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-4.
The special figure hold is the special figure hold of the special figure 1 hold or the special figure 2 hold, whichever is not preferentially digested.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A1-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1-1 to A1-3.
When the preset conditions are satisfied, the first effect is executed.
If the preset conditions are not met, the second effect is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

The icon display effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 53 to 55. This icon display effect can be executed during a variation effect of the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the hold ball number command, the game state specification command, the variation effect start command, etc. received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the icon display effect, the ROM 103 The corresponding image data is read from and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

[Icon display effect A]
FIG. 53 is a diagram for explaining the icon display effect A. The icon display effect is an effect in which the icon is displayed when the ball enters the starting port during the first period, and the icon is not displayed in the second period thereafter even though the ball has entered the starting port. Here, the "hold icon 9B" is set as the "icon", and the "first period" is the period from the start of the time reduction to the time when the special figure 1 hold is exhausted and disappears. Is set, and the "period from the start of the special figure 2 hold digestion to the disappearance of the special figure 2 hold" in FIGS. 53 (H) to (L) is set in the "second period". There is.

In the icon display effect A, the special figure change (special figure 1 change or special figure 2 change) is executed in the time saving state after the big hit game of the big hit type "5R time saving 100 times big hit" (Fig. 10) of special figure 1. It is explained as. The player executes a right-handed hit, and when the gate 28 is passed, the electric chew 29 is opened, and the game ball that has entered the electric chew winning opening 34 enters either the first winning opening 75 or the second winning opening 76. Sphere (see FIG. 13 (B) “Special Figure 1 Time saving state”). When the game ball enters the first winning opening 75 and the second winning opening 76, either the first starting opening 30 or the second starting opening 21 is opened, and the game ball is opened in the opened starting ports 30 and 21. By entering the ball, the first special figure hold (special figure 1 hold) or the second special figure hold (special figure 2 hold) occurs. Due to the opening pattern of the electric chew 29 when passing through the gate 28, the opening probability of the first starting port 30 is about 277/278, and the opening probability of the second starting port 21 is about 1/279 (FIG. 13 (B). ), FIG. 14). In the gaming machine 1, the digestion of the first special figure hold is executed in preference to the digestion of the second special figure hold (FIG. 21).

As shown in FIG. 53 (A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variablely displayed on the display screen 7a during the variation of the special figure 1. The variable display here includes not only a display in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are visually recognizable when they are moving at high speed, but also a display in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are invisible due to high-speed movement. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of symbols including the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and the special symbol is variably displayed by the variable display of the set of symbols (here, the decorative symbol 8L, 8C, 8R). The special figure 1 variation) is represented, and the special figure lottery result (here, the special figure 1 lottery result) is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols.

On the display screen 7a, three hold icons 9A representing special figure 1 hold and a variable icon (the hold icon) 9C are displayed. Here, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C corresponds to the special figure 1 lottery being executed. In addition, on the display screen 7a, there is a time-saving remaining number display indicating the remaining time-saving number of times, which is expressed as "time-saving remaining 50 times", and a special figure which is currently changing, which is expressed as "special figure 1 fluctuation". A special map display during change indicating the type is displayed.

In FIG. 53 (A), at this time, the game ball passes through the gate 28, the game ball enters the second winning opening 76 according to the opening pattern of the electric chew 29, and the game is played in the opened second starting port 21. When the ball enters the ball, the number of stored second special figures (the number of reserved special figures 2) is "1". That is, special figure 2 hold has occurred. With the occurrence of the special figure 2 hold, one new hold icon 9B is newly displayed on the display screen 7a.

FIG. 53 (B) shows a state in which the special figure 1 change following the special figure 1 change shown in FIG. 53 (A) has been completed. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed. At this time, the game ball also passes through the gate 28, the game ball enters the second winning opening 76 according to the opening pattern of the electric chew 29, and the game ball enters the opened second starting opening 21. The number of storages for the second special figure hold (the number of special figure 2 hold) is "2". That is, a new special figure 2 hold has occurred. With the occurrence of the special figure 2 hold, one hold icon 9B is added to the display screen 7a, and two hold icons 9B are displayed.

After that, the variation in Special Figure 1 is repeated, and FIG. 53 (C) shows the state when the time saving remaining number display is "time saving remaining 20 times". The variation display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the variation of the special figure 1 is displayed. At this time, a specific number of times notification image of "20 times remaining in a short time!" Appears. With the end of the remaining 20 time reduction fluctuations, the hold icon 9B is not immediately additionally displayed even if the special figure 2 hold occurs during the subsequent time reduction fluctuations, and is additionally displayed at a delayed timing. On the display screen 7a, two hold icons 9B corresponding to the special figure 2 hold acquired in FIGS. 53 (A) and 53 (B) are continuously displayed.

After that, the variation in Special Figure 1 is repeated, and FIG. 53 (D) shows the state when the time saving remaining number display is "time saving remaining 10 times". The variation display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the variation of the special figure 1 is displayed. At this time, the game ball passes through the gate 28, the game ball enters the second winning opening 76 according to the opening pattern of the electric chew 29, and the game ball enters the opened second starting opening 21. 2 The number of stored special figures (the number of reserved special figures 2) is "3". However, despite the fact that a new special figure 2 hold has occurred, the hold icon 9B is not added to the display screen 7a, and the display of the two hold icons 9B is continued.

After that, the variation in Special Figure 1 is repeated, and FIG. 53 (E) shows the state when the time saving remaining number display is "time saving remaining 0 times". The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the variation of the special figure 1 are stopped and displayed. At this time, the game ball passes through the gate 28, the game ball enters the second winning opening 76 according to the opening pattern of the electric chew 29, and the game ball enters the opened second starting opening 21. 2 The number of stored special figures (the number of reserved special figures 2) is "4". However, despite the fact that a new special figure 2 hold has occurred, the hold icon 9B is not added to the display screen 7a, and the display of the two hold icons 9B is continued. At the end of the final change in time reduction, the game state is switched from the time reduction state to the normal state.

After that, the special figure 1 variation is repeated, and FIG. 53 (F) shows a state in which the first variation (special figure 1 variation) after the end of the time reduction is executed. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner. At a predetermined timing during this fluctuation, two hold icons 9B are additionally displayed, and an effect of displaying four hold icons 9B is executed. That is, the two hold icons 9B corresponding to the special figure 2 hold acquired in FIGS. 53 (D) and 53 (E) are displayed with a delay. In this way, in the "period from the start of the time reduction to the time when the special figure 1 hold is exhausted and disappears" in FIGS. 53 (A) to 53 (G), when the ball enters the second starting port 21 during the period. Is displayed in the special figure 2 hold within the same period even if the display timing is delayed.

FIG. 53 (G) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation shown in FIG. 53 (F) has been completed. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed. At this time, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C is digested. Since it is in a normal state, even if the player strikes right and passes through the gate 28, the electric chew 29 is hardly opened (FIG. 13 (A)). Therefore, the special figure 1 hold and the special figure 2 hold are rarely added, and the special figure 1 hold that is preferentially digested is eliminated.

Since there is no hold icon 9A corresponding to the special figure 1 hold, as shown in FIG. 53 (H), the special figure 2 variation due to the digestion of the special figure 2 hold is started. At this time, the four hold icons 9B do not shift and the display is maintained at the same position. The variable icon 9C is not displayed at the position where the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C is displayed (the variable icon display position). In this state, the special figure 2 variation is started, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start the variation display. When the special figure 2 fluctuation starts, the number of stored 2 special figure holds (special figure 2 hold number) decreases by 1 to "3", while the display of the hold icon 9B does not decrease and the 4 hold icons 9B continue. Is displayed.

FIG. 53 (I) shows a state in which a small hit is won in the special drawing 2 lottery, and three decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R of the character image of the smile face are stopped and displayed. In the gaming machine 1, there is no loss in the special drawing 2 lottery, and the winning (big hit or small hit) is always achieved (FIG. 9 (A)). In the gaming machine 1, a big hit is made at about 1/312, and a small hit is made at about 311/312. When a small hit is made in Special Figure 2, either "3R time reduction 1 small hit" or "3R normal small hit" is selected regardless of whether it is in the time saving state or the non-time saving state (here, the non-time saving state). NS. With a probability of about 1/2, it becomes a "3R time reduction 1 small hit", and with a probability of about 1/2, it becomes a "3R normal small hit". Here, it is notified that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R of the character image of the smile face are the small hit winning of "3R time saving 1 small hit". The display of the hold icon 9B does not decrease, and the four hold icons 9B are continuously displayed. The four hold icons 9B are continuously displayed even during the jackpot game.

FIG. 53 (J) shows the fluctuation of one time reduction after the big hit game due to the “3R time reduction one small hit”. Special figure 2 fluctuation is started, and decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R start the fluctuation display. When the special figure 2 fluctuation starts, the number of stored second special figure hold (special figure 2 hold number) decreases by one to "2", while the display of the hold icon 9B does not decrease and the four hold icons 9B continue. Is displayed. In the 1st time reduction after the big hit game due to the "3R time reduction 1 small hit", when the electric chew 29 is opened by passing the gate 28 by the player's right-handed hit, the game ball that has entered the electric chew winning opening 34 is always The ball enters the second winning opening 76 (see FIG. 13 (B) “Special Figure 2 Time saving state”). When the game ball enters the second winning opening 76, the second starting port 21 is opened, and when the game ball enters the second starting opening 21, the second special figure hold (special figure 2 hold) is released. appear. As a result, the number of storages for the second special figure hold (the number of special figure 2 hold) is increased by one to become "3". The number of hold icons 9B does not increase or decrease, and four hold icons 9B are continuously displayed. In this way, in the "period from the start of the special figure 2 hold digestion to the disappearance of the special figure 2 hold" in FIGS. 53 (H) to 53 (L), the second starting port 21 is entered during the period. Even if there is a sphere, the hold icon 9B is not additionally displayed.

FIG. 53 (K) shows a state in which a small hit is won in the special drawing 2 lottery, and three decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R of a circular graphic image are stopped and displayed. As described above, in the gaming machine 1, there is no loss in the special drawing 2 lottery, and the winning (big hit or small hit) is always achieved (FIG. 9 (A)). In the gaming machine 1, a big hit is made at about 1/312, and a small hit is made at about 311/312. When a small hit is made in Special Figure 2, either "3R time reduction 1 small hit" or "3R normal small hit" is selected regardless of whether it is in the time saving state or the non-time saving state (here, the time saving state). .. With a probability of about 1/2, it becomes a "3R time reduction 1 small hit", and with a probability of about 1/2, it becomes a "3R normal small hit". Here, it is notified that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R of the circular graphic image are the small hit winning of the "3R normal small hit". At this time, of the four hold icons 9B displayed, the oldest leftmost one disappears, and the remaining three hold icons 9B are continuously displayed. The three hold icons 9B that are continuously displayed are shifted and moved one to the left. That is, here, the hold icon 9B may or may not disappear depending on the winning lottery result of the corresponding lottery. Specifically, it does not disappear when the winning lottery result is "3R time saving 1 small hit", and disappears when it is "3R normal small hit". The three hold icons 9B are continuously displayed even during the jackpot game.

FIG. 53 (L) shows a change in the normal state after the big hit game accompanying the “3R normal small hit”. Special figure 2 fluctuation is started, and decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R start the fluctuation display. When the special figure 2 fluctuation starts, the number of stored 2 special figure holds (special figure 2 hold number) decreases by 1 to "2", while the display of the hold icon 9B does not decrease and the three hold icons 9B continue. Is displayed. As described above, in the gaming machine 1, there is no loss in the special drawing 2 lottery, and the winning (big hit or small hit) is always achieved (FIG. 9 (A)). When a small hit is made in Special Figure 2, either "3R time reduction 1 small hit" or "3R normal small hit" is selected regardless of whether it is in the time saving state or the non-time saving state (here, the non-time saving state). NS. This continues until the special figure 2 hold is exhausted. As described above, in the "period from the start of the special figure 2 hold digestion to the disappearance of the special figure 2 hold" in FIGS. 53 (H) to 53 (L), as shown in FIG. 53 (J), the period. Even if the ball enters the second starting port 21 during the period, the special figure 2 hold (hold icon 9B) is not additionally displayed within the period.

[Icon display effect B]
FIG. 54 is a diagram for explaining the icon display effect B. The icon display effect is an effect in which the icon is displayed when the ball enters the starting port during the first period, and the icon is not displayed in the second period thereafter even though the ball has entered the starting port. Here, the "hold icon 9B" is set as the "icon", and the "first period" is the period from the start of the time reduction to the time when the special figure 1 hold is exhausted and disappears in FIGS. 54 (A) to 54 (D). Is set, and the "period from the start of the special figure 2 hold digestion to the disappearance of the special figure 2 hold" in FIGS. 54 (E) to 54 (J) is set in the "second period". There is.

In the icon display effect B, the special figure change (special figure 1 change or special figure 2 change) is executed in the time saving state after the big hit game of the big hit type "5R time saving 100 times big hit" (Fig. 10) of special figure 1. It is explained as. The player executes a right-handed hit, and when the gate 28 is passed, the electric chew 29 is opened, and the game ball that has entered the electric chew winning opening 34 enters either the first winning opening 75 or the second winning opening 76. Sphere (see FIG. 13 (B) “Special Figure 1 Time saving state”). When the game ball enters the first winning opening 75 and the second winning opening 76, either the first starting opening 30 or the second starting opening 21 is opened, and the game ball is opened in the opened starting ports 30 and 21. By entering the ball, the first special figure hold (special figure 1 hold) or the second special figure hold (special figure 2 hold) occurs. Due to the opening pattern of the electric chew 29 when passing through the gate 28, the opening probability of the first starting port 30 is about 277/278, and the opening probability of the second starting port 21 is about 1/279 (FIG. 13 (B). ), FIG. 14). In the gaming machine 1, the digestion of the first special figure hold is executed in preference to the digestion of the second special figure hold (FIG. 21).

As shown in FIG. 54 (A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variablely displayed on the display screen 7a during the variation of the special figure 1. The variable display here includes not only a display in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are visually recognizable when they are moving at high speed, but also a display in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are invisible due to high-speed movement. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of symbols including the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and the special symbol is variably displayed by the variable display of the set of symbols (here, the decorative symbol 8L, 8C, 8R). The special figure 1 variation) is represented, and the special figure lottery result (here, the special figure 1 lottery result) is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols.

On the display screen 7a, three hold icons 9A representing special figure 1 hold and a variable icon (the hold icon) 9C are displayed. Here, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C corresponds to the special figure 1 lottery being executed. In addition, on the display screen 7a, there is a time-saving remaining number display indicating the remaining time-saving number of times, which is expressed as "time-saving remaining 50 times", and a special figure which is currently changing, which is expressed as "special figure 1 fluctuation". A special map display during change indicating the type is displayed.

In FIG. 54 (A), at this time, the game ball passes through the gate 28, the game ball enters the second winning opening 76 according to the opening pattern of the electric chew 29, and the game is played in the opened second starting port 21. When the ball enters the ball, the number of stored second special figures (the number of reserved special figures 2) is "1". That is, special figure 2 hold has occurred. However, the hold icon 9B is not displayed on the display screen 7a even though the special figure 2 hold has occurred.

FIG. 54 (B) shows a state in which the next special figure 1 change following the special figure 1 change shown in FIG. 54 (A) has been completed. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed. At this time, the game ball also passes through the gate 28, the game ball enters the second winning opening 76 according to the opening pattern of the electric chew 29, and the game ball enters the opened second starting opening 21. The number of storages for the second special figure hold (the number of special figure 2 hold) is "2". That is, a new special figure 2 hold has occurred. However, the hold icon 9B is not displayed on the display screen 7a even though two special figures 2 hold have occurred.

After that, the variation in Special Figure 1 is repeated, and FIG. 54 (C) shows the state when the time saving remaining number display is "time saving remaining 20 times". The variation display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the variation of the special figure 1 is displayed. At this time, a specific number of times notification image of "20 times remaining in a short time!" Appears. At the end of the 20 fluctuations remaining in the time saving, two hold icons 9B corresponding to the special figure 2 hold acquired in FIGS. 54 (A) and 54 (B) are additionally displayed.

After that, the variation in Special Figure 1 is repeated, and FIG. 54 (D) shows the state when the time saving remaining number display is "time saving remaining 10 times". The variation display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the variation of the special figure 1 is displayed. At this time, the game ball passes through the gate 28, the game ball enters the second winning opening 76 according to the opening pattern of the electric chew 29, and the game ball enters the opened second starting opening 21. 2 The number of stored special figures (the number of reserved special figures 2) is "3". However, despite the fact that a new special figure 2 hold has occurred, the hold icon 9B is not added to the display screen 7a, and the display of the two hold icons 9B is continued.

After that, the special figure 1 variation is repeated, and when the time saving final variation ends, the gaming state is switched from the time saving state to the normal state, the special figure 1 hold is eliminated, and the variation corresponding to the special figure 2 hold is started. In the normal state, even if the player strikes right and passes through the gate 28, the electric chew 29 is hardly opened (FIG. 13 (A)). Therefore, the special figure 1 hold and the special figure 2 hold are rarely added, and the special figure 1 hold that is preferentially digested disappears.

As shown in FIG. 54 (E), one hold icon 9B is additionally displayed and three hold icons 9B are displayed at the timing when the special figure 1 hold is exhausted. That is, one hold icon 9B corresponding to the special figure 2 hold acquired in FIG. 54 (D) is displayed with a delay. In this way, in the "period from the start of the time reduction to the time when the special figure 1 hold is exhausted and disappears" in FIGS. 54 (A) to 54 (E), when the ball enters the second starting port 21 during the period. Is displayed in the special figure 2 hold within the same period even if the display timing is delayed. After that, the special figure 2 fluctuation due to the digestion of the special figure 2 hold is started.

The production of "the period from the start of the special figure 2 hold digestion to the time when the special figure 2 hold is digested and disappears" in FIGS. 54 (E) to 54 (J) is shown in FIGS. 53 (H) to 53 (H) of the icon display effect A. It is the same production as L). Unlike FIGS. 53 (H) to 53 (L), FIGS. 54 (E) to 54 (J) show a state in which "3R normal small hit" is selected by chance at the time of winning a small hit. In FIGS. 54 (E) to 54 (J), similarly to FIG. 53 (J), the game ball enters the second starting port 21 and the second special figure hold (special figure 2 hold) occurs and the second special figure is held. Even if the number of special figure hold memories (special figure 2 hold number) increases by one, the number of hold icons 9B does not increase or decrease. That is, in the "period from the start of the special figure 2 hold digestion to the time when the special figure 2 hold is digested and disappears" in FIGS. 54 (E) to 54 (J), the ball enters the second starting port 21 during the period. Even if there is, the hold icon 9B is not additionally displayed.

As shown in FIG. 54 (E), when the special figure 2 fluctuation due to the digestion of the special figure 2 hold is started, the three hold icons 9B do not shift and the display is maintained at the same position. The variable icon 9C is not displayed at the position where the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C is displayed (the variable icon display position). In this state, the special figure 2 variation is started, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start the variation display. When the special figure 2 fluctuation starts, the number of stored 2 special figure holds (special figure 2 hold number) decreases by 1 to "2", while the display of the hold icon 9B does not decrease and the three hold icons 9B continue. Is displayed.

FIG. 54 (F) shows a state in which a small hit is won in the special drawing 2 lottery, and three decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R of a circular graphic image are stopped and displayed. In the gaming machine 1, there is no loss in the special drawing 2 lottery, and the winning (big hit or small hit) is always achieved (FIG. 9 (A)). In the gaming machine 1, a big hit is made at about 1/312, and a small hit is made at about 311/312. When a small hit is made in Special Figure 2, either "3R time reduction 1 small hit" or "3R normal small hit" is selected regardless of whether it is in the time saving state or the non-time saving state (here, the non-time saving state). NS. With a probability of about 1/2, it becomes a "3R time reduction 1 small hit", and with a probability of about 1/2, it becomes a "3R normal small hit". Here, it is notified that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R of the circular graphic image are the small hit winning of the "3R normal small hit". At this time, of the three displayed hold icons 9B, the oldest leftmost one disappears, and the remaining two hold icons 9B are continuously displayed. The two hold icons 9B that are continuously displayed are shifted and moved one to the left. Similar to FIGS. 53 (H) to 53 (L) of the icon display effect A, the hold icon 9B may or may not disappear depending on the winning lottery result of the corresponding lottery. Specifically, it does not disappear when the winning lottery result is "3R time saving 1 small hit", and disappears when it is "3R normal small hit". The two hold icons 9B are continuously displayed even during the jackpot game.

FIG. 54 (G) shows a change in the normal state after the big hit game accompanying the “3R normal small hit”. This is the same state as in FIG. 53 (L) of the icon display effect A. Special figure 2 fluctuation is started, and decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R start the fluctuation display. When the special figure 2 fluctuation starts, the number of stored 2 special figure holds (special figure 2 hold number) decreases by 1 to "1", while the display of the hold icon 9B does not decrease and the two hold icons 9B continue. Is displayed. As described above, in the gaming machine 1, there is no loss in the special drawing 2 lottery, and the winning (big hit or small hit) is always achieved (FIG. 9 (A)). When a small hit is made in Special Figure 2, either "3R time reduction 1 small hit" or "3R normal small hit" is selected regardless of whether it is in the time saving state or the non-time saving state (here, the non-time saving state). NS. This continues until the special figure 2 hold is exhausted.

FIG. 54 (H) shows a state in which a small hit is won again in the special drawing 2 lottery, and three decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R of a circular graphic image are stopped and displayed. Here, it is notified that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R of the circular graphic image are again the small hit winning of the "3R normal small hit". At this time, of the two displayed hold icons 9B, the oldest leftmost one disappears and the remaining one hold icon 9B is continuously displayed. One hold icon 9B that is continuously displayed shifts and moves one to the left. As described above, the hold icon 9B may or may not disappear depending on the winning lottery result of the corresponding lottery, as in FIGS. 53 (H) to 53 (L) of the icon display effect A. Specifically, it does not disappear when the winning lottery result is "3R time saving 1 small hit", and disappears when it is "3R normal small hit". One hold icon 9B is continuously displayed even during the jackpot game.

FIG. 54 (I) shows a change in the normal state after the big hit game accompanying the “3R normal small hit”. It is the same state as in FIG. 54 (G). Special figure 2 fluctuation is started, and decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R start the fluctuation display. When the special figure 2 fluctuation starts, the number of stored second special figure hold (the number of special figure 2 hold) decreases by one to "0", while the display of the hold icon 9B does not decrease and one hold icon 9B continues. Is displayed. As described above, in the gaming machine 1, there is no loss in the special drawing 2 lottery, and the winning (big hit or small hit) is always achieved (FIG. 9 (A)). When a small hit is made in Special Figure 2, either "3R time reduction 1 small hit" or "3R normal small hit" is selected regardless of whether it is in the time saving state or the non-time saving state (here, the non-time saving state). NS. This continues until the special figure 2 hold is exhausted.

FIG. 54 (J) shows a state in which a small hit is won again in the special drawing 2 lottery, and three decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R of a circular graphic image are stopped and displayed. Here, it is notified that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R of the circular graphic image are again the small hit winning of the "3R normal small hit". At this time, one of the displayed hold icons 9B disappears, and the hold icon 9B disappears. As a result, the number "0" of the number of stored numbers of the second special figure hold (the number of the special figure 2 hold) and the number of the hold icon 9B match. As described above, the hold icon 9B does not disappear when the winning lottery result is "3R time reduction 1 small hit", and disappears when the winning lottery result is "3R normal small hit". After that, the big hit game accompanying the "3R normal small hit" is executed, and then the normal state is reached. In the "period from the start of the special figure 2 hold digestion to the time when the special figure 2 hold is digested and disappears" in FIGS. 54 (E) to 54 (J), FIGS. 53 (H) to (K) of the icon display effect A are shown. Similarly, even if the ball enters the second starting port 21 during the period, the special figure 2 hold (hold icon 9B) is not additionally displayed within the period.

In FIG. 54 (K), the character image of "Please return to left-handed at the end" is displayed in the normal state after the big hit game accompanying the "3R normal small hit". At this time, since there is neither the special figure 1 hold nor the special figure 2 hold, neither the hold icon 9A nor the hold icon 9B is displayed, and the fluctuation is not started. In this state, the player strikes left, and when the ball enters the first starting port 20, the hold icon 9A is displayed, the shift is moved, and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 54 (L), the special figure 1 variation is started, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R start the variation display. Here, further, when there is a ball entering the first starting port 20, the hold icon 9A is displayed.

[Icon display effect C]
FIG. 55 is a diagram for explaining the icon display effect C. 55 (A) to (L) show "Special Figure 2 Hold Digestion" of FIGS. 53 (H) to (L) of the icon display effect A and FIGS. 54 (E) to (J) of the icon display effect B. It is the same production as "the period from the start of the special figure 2 until the hold is exhausted and disappears". In FIGS. 55 (A) to 55 (L), the order of the selected small hit winning types at the time of small hit winning is different from that in FIGS. 53 (H) to (L) and FIGS. 54 (E) to 54 (J). There is.

FIG. 55 (A) corresponds to FIG. 54 (E). That is, in FIGS. 53 (A) to (G) of the icon display effect A and FIGS. 54 (A) to (D) of the icon display effect B, "from the start of the time reduction until the special figure 1 hold is exhausted and disappears. The period of special figure 2 has passed, and in the normal state, the special figure 2 fluctuation due to the digestion of special figure 2 hold has started. At this time, the three hold icons 9B do not shift and the display is maintained at the same position. The variable icon 9C is not displayed at the position where the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C is displayed (the variable icon display position). In this state, the special figure 2 variation is started, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start the variation display. When the special figure 2 fluctuation starts, the number of stored 2 special figure holds (special figure 2 hold number) decreases by 1 to "2", while the display of the hold icon 9B does not decrease and the three hold icons 9B continue. Is displayed.

FIG. 55 (B) shows a state in which a small hit is won in the special drawing 2 lottery, and three decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R of the character image of the smile face are stopped and displayed. In the gaming machine 1, there is no loss in the special drawing 2 lottery, and the winning (big hit or small hit) is always achieved (FIG. 9 (A)). In the gaming machine 1, a big hit is made at about 1/312, and a small hit is made at about 311/312. When a small hit is made in Special Figure 2, either "3R time reduction 1 small hit" or "3R normal small hit" is selected regardless of whether it is in the time saving state or the non-time saving state (here, the non-time saving state). NS. With a probability of about 1/2, it becomes a "3R time reduction 1 small hit", and with a probability of about 1/2, it becomes a "3R normal small hit". Here, it is notified that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R of the character image of the smile face are the small hit winning of "3R time saving 1 small hit". The display of the hold icon 9B does not decrease, and the three hold icons 9B are continuously displayed. The three hold icons 9B are continuously displayed even during the jackpot game.

FIG. 55 (C) shows the fluctuation of one time reduction after the big hit game due to the “3R time reduction one small hit”. Special figure 2 fluctuation is started, and decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R start the fluctuation display. When the special figure 2 fluctuation starts, the number of stored second special figure hold (special figure 2 hold number) decreases by one to "1", while the display of the hold icon 9B does not decrease and the three hold icons 9B continue. Is displayed. In the 1st time reduction after the big hit game due to the "3R time reduction 1 small hit", when the electric chew 29 is opened by passing the gate 28 by the player's right-handed hit, as shown in FIG. 55 (D), the electric chew wins. The game ball that has entered the mouth 34 always enters the second winning opening 76 (see FIG. 13 (B) “Special Figure 2 Time saving state”). When the game ball enters the second winning opening 76, the second starting port 21 is opened, and when the game ball enters the second starting opening 21, the second special figure hold (special figure 2 hold) is released. appear. As a result, the number of storages for the second special figure hold (the number of special figure 2 hold) is increased by one to become "2". The number of hold icons 9B does not increase or decrease, and three hold icons 9B are continuously displayed. In this way, in the "period from the start of the special figure 2 hold digestion to the disappearance of the special figure 2 hold" in FIGS. 55 (A) to 55 (L), the second starting port 21 is entered during the period. Even if there is a sphere, the hold icon 9B is not additionally displayed.

FIG. 55 (E) shows a state in which a small hit is won in the special drawing 2 lottery, and three decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R of the character image of the smile face are stopped and displayed again. Here, it is notified that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R of the character image of the smile face are again the small hit winning of "3R time saving 1 small hit". The display of the hold icon 9B does not decrease, and the three hold icons 9B are continuously displayed. The three hold icons 9B are continuously displayed even during the jackpot game.

FIG. 55 (F) shows the fluctuation of one time reduction after the big hit game due to the “3R time reduction one small hit”. Similar to FIG. 55 (C), the special figure 2 variation is started, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R start the variation display. When the special figure 2 fluctuation starts, the number of stored second special figure hold (special figure 2 hold number) decreases by one to "1", while the display of the hold icon 9B does not decrease and the three hold icons 9B continue. Is displayed. In the 1st time reduction after the big hit game due to the "3R time reduction 1 small hit", when the electric chew 29 is opened by passing the gate 28 by the player's right-handed hit, as shown in FIG. 55 (G), the electric chew wins. The game ball that has entered the mouth 34 always enters the second winning opening 76 (see FIG. 13 (B) “Special Figure 2 Time saving state”). When the game ball enters the second winning opening 76, the second starting port 21 is opened, and when the game ball enters the second starting opening 21, the second special figure hold (special figure 2 hold) is released. appear. As a result, the number of storages for the second special figure hold (the number of special figure 2 hold) is increased by one to become "2". The number of hold icons 9B does not increase or decrease, and three hold icons 9B are continuously displayed. In this way, in the "period from the start of the special figure 2 hold digestion to the disappearance of the special figure 2 hold" in FIGS. 55 (A) to 55 (L), the second starting port 21 is entered during the period. Even if there is a sphere, the hold icon 9B is not additionally displayed.

FIG. 55 (H) shows a state in which a small hit is won in the special drawing 2 lottery, and three decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R of a circular graphic image are stopped and displayed. Here, it is notified that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R of the circular graphic image are the small hit winning of the "3R normal small hit". At this time, of the three displayed hold icons 9B, the oldest leftmost one disappears, and the remaining two hold icons 9B are continuously displayed. The two hold icons 9B that are continuously displayed are shifted and moved one to the left. That is, here, the hold icon 9B may or may not disappear depending on the winning lottery result of the corresponding lottery. Specifically, it does not disappear when the winning lottery result is "3R time saving 1 small hit", and disappears when it is "3R normal small hit". The two hold icons 9B are continuously displayed even during the jackpot game.

FIG. 55 (I) shows a change in the normal state after the big hit game accompanying the “3R normal small hit”. Special figure 2 fluctuation is started, and decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R start the fluctuation display. When the special figure 2 fluctuation starts, the number of stored 2 special figure holds (special figure 2 hold number) decreases by 1 to "1", while the display of the hold icon 9B does not decrease and the two hold icons 9B continue. Is displayed.

FIG. 55 (J) shows a state in which a small hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery, and three decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R of the character image of the smile face are stopped and displayed again. Here, it is notified that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R of the character image of the smile face are again the small hit winning of "3R time saving 1 small hit". The display of the hold icon 9B is not reduced, and the two hold icons 9B are continuously displayed. The two hold icons 9B are continuously displayed even during the jackpot game.

FIG. 55 (K) shows the fluctuation of one time reduction after the big hit game due to the “3R time reduction one small hit”. Special figure 2 fluctuation is started, and decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R start the fluctuation display. When the special figure 2 fluctuation starts, the number of stored second special figure hold (the number of special figure 2 hold) decreases by one to "0", while the display of the hold icon 9B does not decrease and the two hold icons 9B continue. Is displayed. In the 1st time reduction after the big hit game due to the "3R time reduction 1 small hit", when the electric chew 29 is opened by passing the gate 28 by the player's right-handed hit, as shown in FIG. 55 (L), the electric chew wins. The game ball that has entered the mouth 34 always enters the second winning opening 76 (see FIG. 13 (B) “Special Figure 2 Time saving state”). When the game ball enters the second winning opening 76, the second starting port 21 is opened, and when the game ball enters the second starting opening 21, the second special figure hold (special figure 2 hold) is released. appear. As a result, the number of storages for the second special figure hold (the number of special figure 2 hold) is increased by one to become "1". The number of hold icons 9B does not increase or decrease, and two hold icons 9B are continuously displayed. In this way, in the "period from the start of the special figure 2 hold digestion to the disappearance of the special figure 2 hold" in FIGS. 55 (A) to 55 (L), the second starting port 21 is entered during the period. Even if there is a sphere, the hold icon 9B is not additionally displayed.

As described above, in the gaming machine 1, there is no loss in the special drawing 2 lottery, and the winning (big hit or small hit) is always achieved (FIG. 9 (A)). When a small hit is made in Special Figure 2, either "3R time reduction 1 small hit" or "3R normal small hit" is selected regardless of whether it is in the time saving state or the non-time saving state (here, the non-time saving state). NS. This continues until the special figure 2 hold is exhausted. As described above, in the "period from the start of the special figure 2 hold digestion to the disappearance of the special figure 2 hold" in FIGS. 55 (A) to 55 (L), FIGS. 55 (D) (G) (L). ), Even if the ball enters the second starting port 21 during the period, the special figure 2 hold (hold icon 9B) is not additionally displayed within the period.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the icon display effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the gaming ball is inserted into the second starting port during the "first period from the start of the time reduction to the digestion of the special drawing 1 hold until it disappears" in FIGS. 53 (A) to 53 (G). When the ball enters 21, the hold icon 9B is displayed, and the second from the start of the special figure 2 hold digestion to the disappearance of the special figure 2 hold is displayed in FIGS. 53 (H) to (L). In the "period", it is possible to execute an effect in which the hold icon 9B is not displayed even if the game ball enters the second starting port 21. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 54 and 55.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the "second period from the start of the special figure 2 hold digestion to the disappearance of the special figure 2 hold" in FIGS. 53 (H) to 53 (L), FIG. 53 The second game ball is in a state where the display of the hold icon 9B displayed in the "first period from the start of the time reduction to the time when the special figure 1 hold is exhausted and disappears" in (A) to (G) is maintained. It is possible to execute an effect in which the hold icon 9B is not additionally displayed even if the ball enters the starting port 21. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 54 and 55.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the hold icon 9B is set in the "second period from the start of the special figure 2 hold digestion to the disappearance of the special figure 2 hold" in FIGS. 53 (H) to 53 (L). Disappears after the corresponding winning lottery has been executed (FIG. 53 (K)). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 54 and 55.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the "second period from the start of the special figure 2 hold digestion to the disappearance of the special figure 2 hold" in FIGS. 53 (H) to 53 (L), the hold icon is displayed. If 9B is won in the corresponding winning lottery, it may be continuously displayed even during the winning game. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 54 and 55.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the "second period from the start of the special figure 2 hold digestion to the disappearance of the special figure 2 hold" in FIGS. 53 (H) to 53 (L), the hold icon is displayed. If the winning lottery is won in the corresponding winning lottery, 9B will not disappear if the winning lottery result is "3R time reduction 1 small hit" and will continue to be displayed even during the winning game, and if it is "3R normal small hit". Disappears without being displayed continuously. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 54 and 55.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment,
When the game ball enters the second starting port 21 in the "first period from the start of the time reduction to the time when the special figure 1 hold is exhausted and disappears" in FIGS. 53 (A) to 53 (G), the ball enters. The hold icon 9B may be displayed at a timing delayed from. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIG. 54.

[Modification example]
A modified example of the icon display effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the icon display effects A to C, FIGS. 53 (A) to (G) and FIGS. 54 (A) to (A) are set as the first period in which the icon is displayed when the game ball enters the starting port. As the second period of D), "the period from the start of the shortened time to the time when the special figure 1 hold is exhausted and disappears" and "the icon is not displayed even if the game ball enters the starting port", FIG. 53 (H)-(L), FIGS. 54 (E)-(J), 55 (A)-(L) "From the start of the special figure 2 hold digestion to the time when the special figure 2 hold is digested and disappears. "Period" was assumed to be set. However, any period can be set for the first period and the second period.

[Modification 2]
In the icon display effects A to C, the hold icon 9B is illustrated as an icon indicating that the game ball has entered the starting port. However, the icon indicating that the game ball has entered the starting port may be an icon other than the hold icon 9B. For example, the icon indicating that the game ball has entered the start port may be the hold icon 9A, and if it indicates that the game ball has entered the start port, it may be an icon other than the hold icon. You may. For example, in the present application, when a game ball enters the second starting port 21, it always hits (FIG. 9 (A)). Therefore, when an icon indicating that the hit is confirmed is displayed when the game ball enters the second starting port 21, this icon also indicates that the game ball of the present application has entered the starting port. Corresponds to the icon.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect A2-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is an icon indicating that the game ball has entered the starting port.
If the game ball enters the starting port during the first period, the icon is displayed, and in the second period after the first period, the game ball enters the starting port. However, the icon may not be displayed,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A2-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A2-1.
In the second period, the icon may not be additionally displayed even if the game ball enters the starting port while the display of the icon displayed in the first period is maintained.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A2-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect A2-1 or aspect A2-2.
In the second period, the icon may disappear after the corresponding winning lottery has been performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A2-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A2-1 to A2-3.
In the second period, if the hold icon is won in the corresponding winning lottery, it may be continuously displayed even during the winning game.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A2-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect A2-4.
In the second period, when the hold icon is won in the corresponding winning lottery, depending on the winning type, the holding icon may be continuously displayed even during the winning game execution, or may disappear without being continuously displayed. be,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A2-1 to A2-5.
In the first period, when the game ball enters the starting port, the icon may be displayed at a timing delayed from the entry.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

The hit type expectation suggestion effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 56 to 58. This hit type expectation suggestion effect can be executed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the normal symbol fluctuation start command, the fluctuation effect start command, etc. received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the hit type expectation suggestion effect, the ROM 103 The corresponding image data is read out and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

[Hit type expectation suggestion production A]
FIG. 56 is a diagram for explaining the hit type expectation suggestion effect A. The hit type expectation suggestion effect is an effect that suggests the expectation of winning a specific hit symbol among multiple types of hit symbols of the special figure or the general figure while the special figure or the general figure is changing. be. Here, "ordinary symbol" is set as "design", and "expectation to win with a specific winning type (specific winning symbol) in the ordinary symbol lottery" is set as "expectation to win with a specific winning symbol". Has been done. In the following, there are "long open 1" and "long open 2" as normal symbol hit types in the normal symbol lottery in the time saving state that is executed after winning the special figure 1 lottery (Fig. 13 (B): special figure). (1 time saving state), an example of an effect of displaying the degree of expectation of winning one of the winning types.

In the hit type expectation suggestion effect A, the special figure change (special figure 1 change or special figure 2 change) is executed in the time saving state after the big hit game of the big hit type "5R time saving 100 times big hit" (Fig. 10) of special figure 1. Explain as if. The player strikes right, and when the gate 28 is passed, the normal symbol display 42 (FIG. 3) displays the fluctuation of the normal symbol, and when the predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result (the normal symbol (FIG. 3)). The confirmation display of the normal figure stop symbol) is performed, and the player is notified of the lottery result. Here, there are two types of hit normal figure stop symbols corresponding to "long open 1" and "long open 2". Specifically, it is "Public figure_hit symbol 2" and "Public figure_hit symbol 3" of "Special figure 1 time saving state" of FIG. 13 (B). When the electric chew 29 is opened by winning with "long opening 1" (general figure_per symbol 2), the game ball that has entered the electric chew winning opening 34 enters the first winning opening 75 and the first starting opening 30 Is opened, and the first special figure hold (special figure 1 hold) occurs when the ball enters the first start port 30. When the electric chew 29 is opened by winning in "long opening 2" (general figure_per symbol 3), the game ball that has entered the electric chew winning opening 34 enters the second winning opening 76 and the second starting opening 21 Is opened, and the second special figure hold (special figure 2 hold) occurs when the ball enters the second start port 21. The probability that "long open 1" (normal figure_per symbol 2) is selected is about 277/278, and the probability that "long open 2" (normal figure_per symbol 3) is selected is about 1/279. Yes (FIG. 13 (B), FIG. 14). In the gaming machine 1, the digestion of the first special figure hold is executed in preference to the digestion of the second special figure hold (FIG. 21).

As shown in FIG. 56 (A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variablely displayed on the display screen 7a during the variation of the special figure 1. The variable display here includes not only a display in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are visually recognizable when they are moving at high speed, but also a display in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are invisible due to high-speed movement. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of symbols including the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and the special symbol is variably displayed by the variable display of the set of symbols (here, the decorative symbol 8L, 8C, 8R). The special figure 1 variation) is represented, and the special figure lottery result (here, the special figure 1 lottery result) is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols.

On the display screen 7a, two hold icons 9A representing special figure 1 hold and a variable icon (the hold icon) 9C are displayed. Here, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C corresponds to the special figure 1 lottery being executed. In addition, on the display screen 7a, there is a time-saving remaining number display indicating the remaining time-saving number of times, which is expressed as "time-saving remaining 50 times", and a special figure which is currently changing, which is expressed as "special figure 1 fluctuation". A special map display during change indicating the type is displayed. In FIG. 56A, at this time, the game ball passes through the gate 28, and the normal symbol display 42 starts the variable display of the normal symbol.

In FIG. 56B, when the normal symbol display 42 starts the variable display of the normal symbol, a rectangular image appears on the display screen 7a. The rectangular image is displayed on the front side of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R on the variable display, and the decorative symbols 8X, 8Y that are variablely displayed are displayed in the rectangular image area. The decorative symbols 8X and 8Y are a set of symbols including the left decorative symbol 8X and the right decorative symbol 8Y. The variable display of the set of symbols represents the variable display of the normal symbol, and the stop display of the set of symbols Notify the result of the lottery.

In FIG. 56 (C), the rectangular image appearing on the display screen 7a is enlarged, and in addition to the variable display of the decorative symbols 8X and 8Y, an expectation suggestion image of "expectation per acquisition of special figure 2: 50%" is displayed. Will be done. This expectation degree suggestion image suggests the expectation degree to win with a specific hit type (specific hit symbol) in the currently changing general drawing lottery. Here, it is suggested that there is a 50% chance that "long open 2" (general figure_per symbol 3) will be selected, that is, the degree of expectation of winning the special figure 2 hold winning type. .. That is, when this expected degree suggestion image is displayed, "long open 2" (normal figure_per symbol 3) is selected with a probability of 1/2, and other stop symbols (lost symbols) are selected with a probability of 1/2. , Or "long open 1" (normal figure_per pattern 2)) is selected. The case where "long opening 1" is selected is shown in FIGS. 56 (I) and 56 (J), and the case where the lost symbol is selected is shown in FIGS. 56 (K) and 56 (L). In this way, the expectation suggestion image suggests that the expectation of winning a specific hit type is relatively high, and that the expectation of winning in another hit type is relatively low. Will be. For example, the higher the expectation per acquisition of Special Figure 2, the lower the expectation per acquisition of Special Figure 1. This point is different from the conventional hit expectation. The conventional hit expectation is the expectation of whether or not to hit, and when there are a plurality of types of hit types, the expectation is high in all types.

In FIG. 56 (D), after FIG. 56 (C), a state in which the normal symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display 42 at “normal symbol_per symbol 3” is shown. Along with this, on the display screen 7a, the decorative symbols 8X and 8Y displayed on the rectangular image are stopped and displayed at "77", and the result notification image of "per acquisition of special figure 2" is displayed. As a result, the notification image notifies that the winning type for acquiring the special figure 2 hold is won, that is, "long opening 2" is selected.

In FIG. 56 (E), after FIG. 56 (D), the electric chew 29 is opened by winning in "long opening 2", and the game ball that has entered the electric chew winning opening 34 enters the second winning opening 76. The state of the ball is shown. The second start opening 21 is opened by entering the second winning opening 76, and the second special figure hold (special figure 2 hold) occurs by entering the second start opening 21. As a result, the hold icon 9B is newly displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, the variation in Special Figure 1 is repeated, and FIG. 56 (F) shows the state when the time saving remaining number display is "time saving remaining 0 times". The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the variation of the special figure 1 are stopped and displayed. At this time, the special figure 1 hold is eliminated and the special figure 2 hold digestion is started. At the end of the final change in time reduction, the game state is switched from the time reduction state to the normal state.

FIG. 56 (G) shows a state in which a small hit is won in the special drawing 2 lottery, and three decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R of the character image of the smile face are stopped and displayed. In the gaming machine 1, there is no loss in the special drawing 2 lottery, and the winning (big hit or small hit) is always achieved (FIG. 9 (A)). In the gaming machine 1, a big hit is made at about 1/312, and a small hit is made at about 311/312. When a small hit is made in Special Figure 2, either "3R time reduction 1 small hit" or "3R normal small hit" is selected regardless of whether it is in the time saving state or the non-time saving state (here, the non-time saving state). NS. With a probability of about 1/2, it becomes a "3R time reduction 1 small hit", and with a probability of about 1/2, it becomes a "3R normal small hit". Here, it is notified that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R of the character image of the smile face are the small hit winning of "3R time saving 1 small hit".

In FIG. 56 (H), an image of the number of acquired balls after the jackpot game is completed and “the jackpot game is completed and 3000 balls are acquired” is displayed. The number of acquired balls displayed in this character image may be the number of acquired balls actually acquired, or may be the number of acquired balls planned according to the hit type instead of the actual number of balls. .. In addition, the acquired ball number image may be displayed before the start of the jackpot game. In this case, the number of acquired balls may be displayed in the acquired number of balls image according to the winning type. As described above, in the gaming machine 1, there is no loss in the special drawing 2 lottery, and the winning (big hit or small hit) is always achieved (FIG. 9 (A)). Therefore, when the special figure 2 hold occurs, it becomes a state in which it is promised to obtain a predetermined amount of balls to be ejected by the winning game. In other words, when the hold icon 9B is displayed on the display screen 7a, it is suggested that a predetermined amount of balls to be ejected by the game can be obtained after that. Further, in the gaming machine 1, when "long opening 2" (normal symbol_per symbol 3) is selected in the normal symbol lottery, the second starting port 21 is opened and the ball enters the second starting port 21. 2 causes a special figure 2 hold. Therefore, when "long opening 2" is selected in the normal symbol lottery, it is promised to obtain a predetermined amount of balls to be ejected by the game after that. From this, it can be said that the character image of "Expected degree per acquisition of special figure 2: 50%" displayed in FIG. 56C suggests the expected degree of obtaining a predetermined amount of balls.

FIG. 56 (I) is executed after FIG. 56 (C) instead of FIG. 56 (D). Specifically, the normal symbol display 42 shows a state in which the normal symbol is stopped and displayed at "normal symbol_per symbol 2". Along with this, on the display screen 7a, the decorative symbols 8X and 8Y displayed on the rectangular image are stopped and displayed at "22", and the result notification image of "per acquisition of special figure 1" is displayed. As a result, even though the expected degree suggestion image of "expectation degree per acquisition of special figure 2: 50%" was displayed in FIG. 56 (C) by the notification image, the winning type for acquiring special figure 1 hold was won. That is, it is notified that "long opening 1" is selected.

In FIG. 56 (J), after FIG. 56 (I), the electric chew 29 is opened by winning in "long opening 1", and the game ball that has entered the electric chew winning opening 34 enters the first winning opening 75. The state of the ball is shown. When the ball enters the second winning opening 76, the first starting port 30 is opened, and when the ball enters the first starting opening 30, the first special figure hold (special figure 1 hold) occurs. As a result, the hold icon 9A is newly displayed on the display screen 7a.

FIG. 56 (K) is executed after FIG. 56 (C) instead of FIG. 56 (D). Specifically, the normal symbol display 42 shows a state in which the normal symbol is stopped and displayed as a lost symbol. Along with this, on the display screen 7a, the decorative symbols 8X and 8Y displayed on the rectangular image are stopped and displayed at "34", and the result notification image of "loss" is displayed. As a result, the notification image notifies that the image is lost even though the “expectation degree per acquisition of special figure 2: 50%” expectation degree suggestion image is displayed in FIG. 56 (C). FIG. 56 (L) shows a state in which neither the special figure 1 hold nor the special figure 2 hold occurs after FIG. 56 (K), and the result notification image disappears.

[Hit type expectation suggestion production B]
FIG. 57 is a diagram for explaining the hit type expectation degree suggestion effect B. The hit type expectation suggestion effect is an effect that suggests the expectation of winning a specific hit symbol among multiple types of hit symbols of the special figure or the general figure while the special figure or the general figure is changing. be. Here, "ordinary symbol" is set as "design", and "expectation to win with a specific winning type (specific winning symbol) in the ordinary symbol lottery" is set as "expectation to win with a specific winning symbol". Has been done. In the following, there are "long open 1" and "long open 2" as normal symbol hit types in the normal symbol lottery in the time saving state that is executed after winning the special figure 1 lottery (Fig. 13 (B): special figure). (1 time saving state), an example of an effect of displaying the degree of expectation of winning one of the winning types.

In the hit type expectation suggestion effect B, as in the hit type expectation suggestion effect A (FIG. 56), the special figure is in a time-saving state after the jackpot game of the jackpot type “5R time reduction 100 times jackpot” (FIG. 10) of special figure 1. It will be described as assuming that the fluctuation (special figure 1 fluctuation or special figure 2 fluctuation) is being executed. The player strikes right, and when the gate 28 is passed, the normal symbol display 42 (FIG. 3) displays the fluctuation of the normal symbol, and when the predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result (the normal symbol (FIG. 3)). The confirmation display of the normal figure stop symbol) is performed, and the player is notified of the lottery result. Here, there are two types of hit normal figure stop symbols corresponding to "long open 1" and "long open 2". Specifically, it is "Public figure_hit symbol 2" and "Public figure_hit symbol 3" of "Special figure 1 time saving state" of FIG. 13 (B). When the electric chew 29 is opened by winning with "long opening 1" (general figure_per symbol 2), the game ball that has entered the electric chew winning opening 34 enters the first winning opening 75 and the first starting opening 30 Is opened, and the first special figure hold (special figure 1 hold) occurs when the ball enters the first start port 30. When the electric chew 29 is opened by winning in "long opening 2" (general figure_per symbol 3), the game ball that has entered the electric chew winning opening 34 enters the second winning opening 76 and the second starting opening 21 Is opened, and the second special figure hold (special figure 2 hold) occurs when the ball enters the second start port 21. The probability that "long open 1" (normal figure_per symbol 2) is selected is about 277/278, and the probability that "long open 2" (normal figure_per symbol 3) is selected is about 1/279. Yes (FIG. 13 (B), FIG. 14). In the gaming machine 1, the digestion of the first special figure hold is executed in preference to the digestion of the second special figure hold (FIG. 21).

As shown in FIG. 57 (A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variablely displayed on the display screen 7a during the variation of the special figure 1. The variable display here includes not only a display in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are visually recognizable when they are moving at high speed, but also a display in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are invisible due to high-speed movement. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of symbols including the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and the special symbol is variably displayed by the variable display of the set of symbols (here, the decorative symbol 8L, 8C, 8R). The special figure 1 variation) is represented, and the special figure lottery result (here, the special figure 1 lottery result) is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols.

On the display screen 7a, two hold icons 9A representing special figure 1 hold and a variable icon (the hold icon) 9C are displayed. Here, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C corresponds to the special figure 1 lottery being executed. In addition, on the display screen 7a, there is a time-saving remaining number display indicating the remaining time-saving number of times, which is expressed as "time-saving remaining 50 times", and a special figure which is currently changing, which is expressed as "special figure 1 fluctuation". A special map display during change indicating the type is displayed. In FIG. 57 (A), at this time, the game ball passes through the gate 28, and the normal symbol display 42 starts the variable display of the normal symbol.

In FIG. 57 (B), when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed at "789" during the variable display of the normal symbol on the ordinary symbol display 42, the color of the left decorative symbol 8L that is stopped and displayed is changed. The color is different from normal. This suggests that the expectation of winning a specific winning type (specific winning symbol) is a predetermined value in the currently changing general drawing lottery. That is, the left decorative pattern 8L whose color has changed is an expected degree suggestion image. Here, it is suggested that there is a 50% chance that "long open 2" (general figure_per symbol 3) will be selected, that is, the degree of expectation of winning the special figure 2 hold winning type. .. That is, when this expected degree suggestion image is displayed, "long open 2" (normal figure_per symbol 3) is selected with a probability of 1/2, and other stop symbols (lost symbols) are selected with a probability of 1/2. , Or "long open 1" (normal figure_per pattern 2)) is selected. The case where "long opening 1" is selected is shown in FIG. 57 (E), and the case where the lost symbol is selected is shown in FIG. 57 (F). The expectation suggestion image suggests that the expectation of winning a specific hit type is relatively high, and that the expectation of winning in another hit type is relatively low. ..

In FIG. 57 (C), after FIG. 57 (B), a state in which the normal symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display 42 at “normal symbol_per symbol 3” is shown. Along with this, on the display screen 7a, the result notification image of "I did it" is displayed. As a result, the notification image notifies that the winning type for acquiring the special figure 2 hold is won, that is, "long opening 2" is selected.

In FIG. 57 (D), after FIG. 57 (C), the electric chew 29 is opened by winning in "long opening 2", and the game ball that has entered the electric chew winning opening 34 enters the second winning opening 76. The state of the ball is shown. The second start opening 21 is opened by entering the second winning opening 76, and the second special figure hold (special figure 2 hold) occurs by entering the second start opening 21. As a result, the hold icon 9B is newly displayed on the display screen 7a. After that, the same effect as in FIGS. 56 (F) to 56 (H) of the hit type expectation suggestion effect A is executed.

FIG. 57 (E) is executed after FIG. 57 (B) instead of FIG. 57 (C). Specifically, the normal symbol display 42 shows a state in which the normal symbol is stopped and displayed at "normal symbol_per symbol 2". Along with this, a "fair" result notification image is displayed. As a result, despite the fact that the expected degree suggestion image of the left decorative symbol 8L whose color has changed was displayed in FIG. 57 (B) by the notification image, the winning type for acquiring the special figure 1 hold was won, that is, , It is notified that "long opening 1" is selected. After that, the same effect as in FIG. 56 (J) of the hit type expectation suggestion effect A is executed.

FIG. 57 (F) is executed after FIG. 57 (B) instead of FIG. 57 (C). Specifically, the normal symbol display 42 shows a state in which the normal symbol is stopped and displayed as a lost symbol. Along with this, the result notification image of "Sorry" is displayed. As a result, the notification image notifies that in FIG. 57B, even though the expected degree suggestion image of the left decorative symbol 8L whose color has changed is displayed, the result is lost. After that, the same effect as in FIG. 57 (L) of the hit type expectation suggestion effect A is executed.

FIG. 57 (G) is executed instead of FIG. 57 (B). Specifically, the expectation degree suggestion image of "may be good" is displayed during the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 42. Similar to FIG. 57 (B), this expectation degree suggestion image suggests that the expectation degree to be won by a specific hit type (a specific hit symbol) is a predetermined value in the currently changing general drawing lottery. There is. Here, it is suggested that there is a 50% chance that "long open 2" (general figure_per symbol 3) will be selected, that is, the degree of expectation of winning the special figure 2 hold winning type. .. As described above, the expectation degree suggestion image is not limited to the change in the color of the decorative pattern, and may be a predetermined character image.

FIG. 57 (H) is executed in place of FIG. 57 (B), similarly to FIG. 57 (G). Specifically, the expectation degree suggestion image of "there is something good" is displayed during the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 42. Similar to FIG. 57 (B), this expectation degree suggestion image suggests that the expectation degree to be won by a specific hit type (a specific hit symbol) is a predetermined value in the currently changing general drawing lottery. There is. Here, it is suggested that there is a 50% chance that "long open 2" (general figure_per symbol 3) will be selected, that is, the degree of expectation of winning the special figure 2 hold winning type. .. As described above, the expectation degree suggestion image may be a character image having arbitrary contents.

57 (I) (J) is executed instead of FIG. 57 (B) as in FIG. 57 (G) and FIG. 57 (H). Specifically, the button image BTN is displayed on the normal symbol display 42 during the variable display of the normal symbol. Similar to the left decorative symbol 8L in which the color of FIG. 57 (B) has changed, this button image BTN has a predetermined degree of expectation of winning with a specific winning type (specific winning symbol) in the currently changing general drawing lottery. It is an expectation degree suggestion image which suggests that it is a value. Here, it is suggested that there is a 50% chance that "long open 2" (general figure_per symbol 3) will be selected, that is, the degree of expectation of winning the special figure 2 hold winning type. .. As described above, the expectation degree suggestion image may be an arbitrary image.

FIG. 57 (K) is executed instead of FIG. 57 (B) in the same manner as in FIGS. 57 (G) to 57 (J). Specifically, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are each stopped and displayed as a smile face character image during the variable display of the ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display 42. Similar to the left decorative symbol 8L in which the color of the smile face has changed, the stop display of the character image of the smile face is won by a specific winning type (specific winning symbol) in the currently changing general drawing lottery. It is an expectation degree suggestion image which suggests that the expectation degree is a predetermined value. Here, it is suggested that there is a 50% chance that "long open 2" (general figure_per symbol 3) will be selected, that is, the degree of expectation of winning the special figure 2 hold winning type. .. As described above, the expectation degree suggestion image may appear in an embodiment.

[Hit type expectation suggestion production C]
FIG. 58 is a diagram for explaining the hit type expectation degree suggestion effect C. The hit type expectation suggestion effect is an effect that suggests the expectation of winning a specific hit symbol among multiple types of hit symbols of the special figure or the general figure while the special figure or the general figure is changing. be. Here, a "special symbol" is set as the "symbol", and a "specific winning type (specific winning symbol) is won in the first or second special symbol lottery" as the "expectation degree of winning with a specific winning symbol". "Expectation" is set.

In FIGS. 58 (A) to 58 (C), it is assumed that the special figure 1 variation is executed in the normal state. The player executes a left-handed strike, and by winning a prize in the first starting port 20, the first special symbol display 41a (FIG. 3) displays the fluctuation of the special symbol, and the lottery result is obtained when the predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed. The special symbol (special symbol stop symbol) corresponding to the above is displayed, and the player is notified of the lottery result. Here, there are three types of special figure stop symbols corresponding to "5R time reduction 150 times big hit", "5R time reduction 100 times big hit", and "3R normal small hit (V passage practically impossible)". Specifically, they are "special figure 1_time saving symbol 1", "special drawing 1_time saving symbol 2", and "special drawing 1_time saving small hit symbol" in the "non-time saving state" of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 58 (A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variablely displayed on the display screen 7a during the variation of the special figure 1. The variable display here includes not only a display in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are visually recognizable when they are moving at high speed, but also a display in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are invisible due to high-speed movement. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of symbols including the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and the special symbol is variably displayed by the variable display of the set of symbols (here, the decorative symbol 8L, 8C, 8R). The special figure 1 variation) is represented, and the special figure lottery result (here, the special figure 1 lottery result) is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols.

On the display screen 7a, two hold icons 9A representing special figure 1 hold and a variable icon (the hold icon) 9C are displayed. Here, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C corresponds to the special figure 1 lottery being executed. On the display screen 7a, a changing special figure display indicating the type of the currently changing special figure, which is represented as "special figure 1 fluctuation", is displayed.

In FIG. 58 (B), an expectation suggestion image of "5R time reduction 100 times jackpot expectation: 50%" appears on the display screen 7a, and overlaps with the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R on the front side of these. Is displayed. This expectation degree suggestion image suggests the expectation degree to win with a specific hit type (specific hit symbol) in the currently changing special figure lottery. Here, it is suggested that there is a 50% chance that "Special Figure 1_Time Saving Symbol 2" will be selected, that is, the degree of expectation of winning the 5R time saving 100 times jackpot. That is, when this expected degree suggestion image is displayed, "special figure 1_time saving symbol 2" is selected with a probability of 1/2, and other stop symbols (missing symbol, "special figure 1_" have a probability of 1/2. "Time saving symbol 1", "Special figure 1_No time saving small hit symbol") are selected. The expectation suggestion image suggests that the expectation of winning a specific hit type is relatively high, and that the expectation of winning in another hit type is relatively low. ..

After that, the variable display of the special symbol is terminated on the first special symbol display 41a (FIG. 3), and "special symbol 1_time saving symbol 2" is fixedly stopped as the special symbol (special symbol stop symbol). In line with this, as shown in FIG. 58 (C), on the display screen 7a, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed at "222", and the winning type of "5R time saving 100 times jackpot" is won. That is, it is notified that "Special Figure 1_Time Saving Symbol 2" has been selected.

58 (D)-(E) are executed after FIG. 58 (A) instead of FIGS. 58 (B)-(C). Specifically, an expectation suggestion image of "5R time reduction 150 times jackpot expectation: 30%" appears on the display screen 7a, and is displayed on the front side of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in an overlapping manner. NS. This expectation degree suggestion image suggests the expectation degree to win with a specific hit type (specific hit symbol) in the currently changing special figure lottery. Here, it is suggested that there is a 30% chance that "Special Figure 1_Time Saving Symbol 1" will be selected, that is, the degree of expectation of winning the 5R time saving 150 times jackpot. That is, when this expected degree suggestion image is displayed, "special figure 1_time saving symbol 1" is selected with a probability of 3/10, and other stop symbols (missing symbol, "special figure 1_" have a probability of 7/10. "Time saving symbol 2", "Special figure 1_No time saving small hit symbol") are selected. The expectation suggestion image suggests that the expectation of winning a specific hit type is relatively high, and that the expectation of winning in another hit type is relatively low. ..

After that, the variable display of the special symbol is terminated on the first special symbol display 41a (FIG. 3), and "special symbol 1_time saving symbol 1" is fixedly stopped as the special symbol (special symbol stop symbol). In line with this, as shown in FIG. 58 (E), on the display screen 7a, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed at "777", and the winning type of "5R time saving 150 times jackpot" is won. That is, it is notified that "Special Figure 1_Time Saving Symbol 1" has been selected.

FIG. 58 (F) is executed after FIG. 58 (A) instead of FIG. 58 (B. Specifically, “5R time reduction 150 times jackpot expectation: 15%” and “5R” are displayed on the display screen 7a. An expectation suggestion image with "Time saving 100 times jackpot expectation: 30%" appears, and it is displayed on the front side of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. In the currently fluctuating special figure lottery, it suggests the degree of expectation of winning with a specific winning type (specific winning symbol). Here, the degree of expectation of winning 150 times of 5R time reduction, that is, "special figure" The probability that "1_time saving symbol 1" will be selected is 15%, and the probability of winning the 5R time saving 100 times jackpot, that is, the probability that "special figure 1_time saving symbol 2" will be selected is 30%. That is, when this expectation suggestion image is displayed, "special figure 1_time saving symbol 1" is selected with a probability of 15/100, and "special figure 1_time saving symbol 1" is selected with a probability of 30/100. 2 ”is selected, and other stop symbols (missing symbol,“ special figure 1_small hit symbol without time reduction ”) are selected with a probability of 55/100. In addition to showing the expectation of one type of hit type, it may be configured to show the expectation of each of a plurality of types of hits. The expectation suggestion image is relative to the expectation of winning a specific hit type. It is suggested that the target is high, and that the expectation of winning in other winning types is relatively low.

In FIGS. 58 (G) to 58 (H), it is assumed that the special figure 2 variation is executed in the time saving state. Due to the digestion of the special figure 2 hold, the change display of the special symbol on the second special symbol display 41b (FIG. 3), and the special symbol corresponding to the lottery result (special symbol stop symbol) after the predetermined fluctuation time has passed. Is displayed, and the player is notified of the lottery result. Here, there are four types of special figure stop symbols corresponding to "5R time reduction 1 time big hit", "3R time reduction 1 time big hit", "3R time reduction 1 time small hit" and "3R normal small hit". Specifically, "Special Figure 2_Time Saving Symbol 2", "Special Figure 2_Time Saving Symbol 3", "Special Figure 2_Time Saving Small Hit Symbol 2" and "Special Figure 2_Time Saving Symbol 2" and "Special Figure 2_Time Saving Symbol 2" in the "Time Saving State" of FIG. It is a winning symbol 2 ".

As shown in FIG. 58 (G), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variablely displayed on the display screen 7a during the variation of the special figure 1. The variable display here includes not only a display in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are visually recognizable when they are moving at high speed, but also a display in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are invisible due to high-speed movement. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of symbols including the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and the special symbol is variably displayed by the variable display of the set of symbols (here, the decorative symbol 8L, 8C, 8R). The special figure 2 variation) is represented, and the special figure lottery result (here, the special figure 2 lottery result) is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols.

On the display screen 7a, a hold icon 9B representing the special figure 2 hold and a variable icon (the hold icon) 9C are displayed. Here, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C corresponds to the special figure 2 lottery being executed. In addition, on the display screen 7a, a changing special figure display indicating the type of the currently changing special figure, which is represented as "special figure 2 fluctuation", is displayed.

In FIG. 58 (H), an expectation degree suggestion image of "3R time reduction 1 small hit expectation degree: 90%" appears on the display screen 7a, and overlaps with the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R on the front side thereof. Is displayed in. This expectation degree suggestion image suggests the expectation degree to win with a specific hit type (specific hit symbol) in the currently changing special figure lottery. Here, it is suggested that there is a 90% chance that the 3R time-saving one small hit will be won, that is, "special figure 2_small hit symbol 2 with time reduction" will be selected. That is, when this expected degree suggestion image is displayed, "special figure 2_small hit symbol 2 with time reduction" is selected with a probability of 9/10, and other stop symbols ("special figure 2_" with a probability of 1/10. "Time saving symbol 2", "Special figure 2_Time saving symbol 3", "Special figure 2_Time saving small hit symbol 2") are selected. In Special Figure 2, no lost pattern is set. The expectation suggestion image suggests that the expectation of winning a specific hit type is relatively high, and that the expectation of winning in another hit type is relatively low. ..

FIG. 58 (I) is performed after FIG. 58 (G) in place of FIG. 58 (H). Specifically, an expectation suggestion image with "3R time reduction 1 time big hit expectation: 10%" and "3R time reduction 1 time small hit expectation: 40%" appears on the display screen 7a, and the decorative pattern 8L , 8C, 8R are displayed on the front side of the variable display. This expectation degree suggestion image suggests the expectation degree to win with a specific hit type (specific hit symbol) in the currently changing special figure lottery. Here, there is a 10% chance that the 3R time-saving one small hit will be won, that is, "special figure 2_time-saving symbol 3" will be selected, and "special figure 2_time-saving small hit symbol 2" will be selected. It has been suggested that there is a 40% chance of being affected. As described above, in the hit type expectation suggestion effect, in addition to the case where the expectation of one specific type of hit is shown, the expectation of each of a plurality of types of hits may be shown.

FIG. 58 (J) is executed after FIG. 58 (G) instead of FIG. 58 (H). Specifically, "3R time reduction 1 time big hit expectation: 10%", "3R time reduction 1 time small hit expectation: 30%" and "3R normal small hit expectation: 10%" are written together on the display screen 7a. Expectation suggestion images appear and are displayed on the front side of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R so as to overlap with the variable display. This expectation degree suggestion image suggests the expectation degree to win with a specific hit type (specific hit symbol) in the currently changing special figure lottery. Here, there is a 10% chance that the 3R time-saving one small hit will be won, that is, "special figure 2_time-saving symbol 3" will be selected, and "special figure 2_time-saving small hit symbol 2" will be selected. It is suggested that there is a 30% chance that it will be done, and that there is a 10% chance that "Special Figure 2_Time-saving Small Hit Symbol 2" will be selected. As described above, in the hit type expectation suggestion effect, in addition to the case where the expectation of one specific type of hit is shown, the expectation of each of a plurality of types of hits may be shown.

In FIG. 58 (K), after any of the effects shown in FIGS. 58 (H) to (K), the 3R time reduction 1 small hit is won, and three decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R of the character image of the smile face are won. The state in which they are all stopped and displayed is shown. In the gaming machine 1, there is no loss in the special drawing 2 lottery, and the winning (big hit or small hit) is always achieved (FIG. 9 (A)). In the gaming machine 1, a big hit is made at about 1/312, and a small hit is made at about 311/312. When a small hit is made in Special Figure 2, either "3R time reduction 1 small hit" or "3R normal small hit" is selected regardless of whether it is in the time saving state or the non-time saving state (here, the non-time saving state). NS. With a probability of about 1/2, it becomes a "3R time reduction 1 small hit", and with a probability of about 1/2, it becomes a "3R normal small hit". Here, it is notified that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R of the character image of the smile face are the small hit winning of "3R time saving 1 small hit".

In FIG. 58 (L), an image of the number of acquired balls after the jackpot game is completed and “the jackpot game is completed and 3000 balls are acquired” is displayed. The number of acquired balls displayed in this character image may be the number of acquired balls actually acquired, or may be the number of acquired balls planned according to the hit type instead of the actual number of balls. .. In addition, the acquired ball number image may be displayed before the start of the jackpot game. In this case, the number of acquired balls may be displayed in the acquired number of balls image according to the winning type. As described above, in the gaming machine 1, there is no loss in the special drawing 2 lottery, and the winning (big hit or small hit) is always achieved (FIG. 9 (A)). Therefore, when the special figure 2 hold occurs, it becomes a state in which it is promised to obtain a predetermined amount of balls to be ejected by the winning game. In other words, when the expected degree suggestion images of FIGS. 58 (H) to 58 (J) are displayed on the display screen 7a, it is suggested that a predetermined amount of balls to be ejected by the game can be obtained after that. From this, it can be said that the expected degree suggestion images displayed in FIGS. 58 (H) to 58 (J) suggest the expected degree of obtaining a predetermined ball output amount.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the hit type expectation suggestion effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56 (C), the display screen 7a indicates the degree of expectation of winning a specific winning symbol among a plurality of types of winning symbols (ordinary symbols). It is possible to execute a suggestion effect for displaying a suggestion image. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 57 and 58.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56 (C), the suggestion effect is executed during the symbol variation by the normal symbol display 42. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 57 and 58.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56 (C), in the suggestion effect, when it is suggested that the expectation of winning with a specific winning symbol is relatively high, the specific winning symbol is used. It is suggested that the expectation of winning with a different winning symbol is relatively low. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 57 and 58.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56 (C), the normal symbol display 42 can display the variation of the normal symbol, and the suggestion effect is won by a specific hit symbol in the normal symbol. Suggests expectations. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIG. 57.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 56 (B) and 56 (C), the display screen 7a has a variable display effect of decorative symbols 8X and 8Y corresponding to the variation of the normal symbol during the suggestion effect. To execute. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56, the suggestion effect suggests the degree of expectation of obtaining a predetermined amount of balls. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the hit type expectation suggestion effect.
[Modification 1]
In the hit type expectation suggestion effect A, the normal symbol lottery was almost a hit, but there was a possibility that it was slightly lost. However, it may be configured so that it will always be a hit without losing. In addition, the number of acquired balls may be the same or different for all the winning types in the ordinary symbol lottery.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect A3-1]
An effect display means that can display multiple types of images,
A gaming machine equipped with a symbol display means capable of displaying symbol fluctuations.
The symbol display means can display a plurality of types of hit symbols.
The effect display means can execute a suggestion effect that suggests the degree of expectation of winning with the specific hit symbol among the plurality of types of hit symbols.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A3-1.
The suggestion effect is executed during the symbol variation by the symbol display means.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A3-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect A3-1 or aspect A3-2.
In the suggestion effect, when it is suggested that the expectation of winning with the specific winning symbol is relatively high, the expectation of winning with a winning symbol different from the specific winning symbol is relatively low. Is suggested,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A3-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A3-1 to A3-3.
The symbol display means can display fluctuations of ordinary symbols, and can display the fluctuations of the symbols.
The suggestion effect suggests the degree of expectation of winning a specific winning symbol in a normal symbol.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A3-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect A3-4.
While the suggestion effect is being executed, the effect display means executes a variation display effect of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variation of the normal symbol.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A3-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A3-1 to A3-5.
The suggestion effect suggests the degree of expectation of obtaining a predetermined amount of balls.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

The icon delay display effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 59 to 61. This icon delay display effect can be executed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the hold ball number command, the game state specification command, the variation effect start command, etc. received from the sub control board 90, and includes an instruction to execute the icon delay display effect. The corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103, and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

[Icon delay display effect A]
FIG. 59 is a diagram for explaining the icon delay display effect A. The icon delay display effect is an effect in which the icon is displayed at a timing delayed from the entry when the ball enters the starting port. Here, the "hold icon 9A" is set as the "icon", and the "first starting port 20" is set as the "starting port".

In the icon delay display effect A, it is assumed that the special figure 1 variation is executed in the normal state. The player executes a left-handed strike, and by winning a prize in the first starting port 20, the first special symbol display 41a (FIG. 3) displays the fluctuation of the special symbol, and the lottery result is obtained when the predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed. The special symbol (special symbol stop symbol) corresponding to the above is displayed, and the player is notified of the lottery result.

As shown in FIG. 59 (A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variablely displayed on the display screen 7a during the variation of the special figure 1. The variable display here includes not only a display in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are visually recognizable when they are moving at high speed, but also a display in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are invisible due to high-speed movement. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of symbols including the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and the special symbol is variably displayed by the variable display of the set of symbols (here, the decorative symbol 8L, 8C, 8R). The special figure 1 variation) is represented, and the special figure lottery result (here, the special figure 1 lottery result) is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols.

On the display screen 7a, a hold icon 9A representing the special figure 1 hold and a variable icon (the hold icon) 9C are displayed. Here, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C corresponds to the special figure 1 lottery being executed. On the display screen 7a, there is also a game state display represented as "normal state" and a changing special map display indicating the type of special figure currently changing, which is represented as "special figure 1 fluctuation". Is displayed.

In FIG. 59 (A), at this time, the game ball enters the first starting port 20, and the number of stored first special figures (the number of reserved special figures 1) changes from "1" to "2". There is. That is, the second special figure 1 hold (second hold) has occurred. However, despite the occurrence of the second special figure 1 hold, the state in which only one hold icon 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a continues.

FIG. 59 (B) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation shown in FIG. 59 (A) has been completed. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed. The variable icon (holding icon) 9C is digested. Then, at the start of the next special figure 1 fluctuation, the number of stored first special figure hold (number of special figure 1 hold) changes from "2" to "1", and the hold icon 9A shifts on the display screen 7a. Then, the variable icon (the pending icon) becomes 9C. The hold icon 9A disappears due to the shift movement of the hold icon 9A. That is, the hold icon 9A is not displayed even though there is one special figure 1 hold. Then, the special figure 1 variation is executed.

In FIG. 59 (C), after FIG. 59 (B), the variation display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R corresponding to the variation in the special figure 1 is displayed on the display screen 7a. At this time, the game ball enters the 1 start port 20, and the number of stored first special figure hold (number of special figure 1 hold) changes from "1" to "2". That is, the second special figure 1 hold has occurred. However, despite the fact that the two special figures 1 hold have occurred, the state in which none of the hold icons 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a continues.

FIG. 59 (D) is after FIG. 59 (C), and after a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation, two hold icons 9A corresponding to the two special figure 1 hold are newly displayed at the same time. NS. Here, the hold icon 9A is not displayed when one new special figure 1 hold occurs, and two holds are held when a predetermined period elapses from the start of the change of the special figure change when the second special figure 1 hold occurs. The "first delay display effect" in which the icon 9A is displayed with a delay is being executed. The timing at which the hold icon 9A is displayed in the "first delay display effect" may be other than the above. For example, the hold icon 9A may not be displayed when one new special figure 1 hold occurs, and two hold icons 9A may be displayed when a second special figure 1 hold occurs. Alternatively, the hold icon 9A may not be displayed when one new special figure 1 hold occurs, and two hold icons 9A may be displayed after a predetermined period has elapsed after the second special figure 1 hold has occurred. ..

FIG. 59 (E) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation shown in FIG. 59 (D) has been completed. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed. The variable icon (holding icon) 9C is digested. Then, at the start of the next special figure 1 fluctuation, the number of stored first special figure hold (number of special figure 1 hold) changes from "2" to "1", and the hold icon 9A shifts on the display screen 7a. Then, the variable icon (the pending icon) becomes 9C. By shifting the hold icon 9A, the hold icon 9A becomes one. At this time, the game ball enters the 1 start port 20, and the number of stored first special figure hold (number of special figure 1 hold) changes from "1" to "2". That is, the second special figure 1 hold has occurred. However, despite the fact that two special figures 1 hold have occurred, only one hold icon 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a. Then, the special figure 1 variation is executed.

In FIG. 59 (F), after FIG. 59 (E), the variation display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R corresponding to the variation in the special figure 1 is displayed on the display screen 7a. After a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 59 (G), the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second special figure 1 hold that was not displayed is newly displayed, for a total of 2 One hold icon 9A is displayed. Here, the hold icon 9A is not displayed when one new special figure 1 hold occurs, and the hold icon 9A is displayed with a delay when a predetermined period elapses from the start of the change of the next special figure change. "Direction" is executed. In the "second delay display effect", the timing at which the hold icon 9A is displayed may be other than the above. For example, the corresponding hold icon 9A may be displayed with a delay after a predetermined period has elapsed after one new hold of special figure 1 is generated. Alternatively, after one new special figure 1 hold is generated, the hold icon 9A may be displayed with a delay during the fluctuation effect after the special figure change for a predetermined number of times (1 or more).

FIG. 59 (H) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation shown in FIG. 59 (G) has been completed. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed. The variable icon (holding icon) 9C is digested. Then, at the start of the next special figure 1 fluctuation, the number of stored first special figure hold (number of special figure 1 hold) changes from "2" to "1", and the hold icon 9A shifts on the display screen 7a. Then, the variable icon (the pending icon) becomes 9C. By shifting the hold icon 9A, the hold icon 9A becomes one. At this time, the game ball enters the 1 start port 20, and the number of stored first special figure hold (number of special figure 1 hold) changes from "1" to "2". That is, the second special figure 1 hold (second hold) has occurred. However, despite the fact that two special figures 1 hold have occurred, only one hold icon 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a. Then, the special figure 1 variation is executed.

In FIG. 59 (I), after FIG. 59 (H), the variation display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R corresponding to the variation of the special figure 1 is displayed on the display screen 7a. At this time, the game ball enters the 1 start port 20, and the number of stored first special figure hold (number of special figure 1 hold) changes from "2" to "3". That is, the third special figure 1 hold has occurred. However, despite the fact that the three special figures 1 hold have occurred, only one hold icon 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a. As shown in FIG. 59 (J), after a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 59 (K), two special figure 1 holds (second hold, second hold) that were not displayed. Of the 3 holds), the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second hold is newly displayed, and a total of two hold icons 9A are displayed.

Further, after the lapse of a predetermined period, as shown in FIG. 59 (L), a hold icon 9A corresponding to the remaining one special figure 1 hold (third hold) that was not displayed is newly displayed, and a total of three holds. Icon 9A is displayed. Here, the hold icon 9A is not displayed when one new special figure 1 hold occurs, and the two hold icons 9A shift the timing in the special figure change when the second special figure 1 hold occurs. The "third delay display effect", which is displayed with a delay in order, is being executed. In the "third delay display effect", the timing at which the first hold icon 9A is displayed and the timing at which the second hold icon 9A is displayed can be arbitrarily set. For example, in the fluctuation in which the second special figure 1 hold occurs, the first hold icon 9A is displayed at the first timing from the start of the change, and the second hold icon 9A is displayed at the second timing. You may. Alternatively, the first hold icon 9A may be displayed during the change in which the second special figure 1 hold occurs, and the second hold icon 9A may be displayed during the change after the next change.

[Icon delay display effect B]
FIG. 60 is a diagram for explaining the icon delay display effect B. The icon delay display effect is an effect in which the icon is displayed at a timing delayed from the entry when the ball enters the starting port. Here, the "hold icon 9B" is set as the "icon", and the "second starting port 21" is set as the "starting port".

In the icon delay display effect B, the special figure change (special figure 1 change or special figure 2 change) is executed in the time saving state after the big hit game of the big hit type "5R time saving 100 times big hit" (FIG. 10) of special figure 1. It will be explained as an icon. The player executes a right-handed hit, and when the gate 28 is passed, the electric chew 29 is opened, and the game ball that has entered the electric chew winning opening 34 enters either the first winning opening 75 or the second winning opening 76. Sphere (see FIG. 13 (B) “Special Figure 1 Time saving state”). When the game ball enters the first winning opening 75 and the second winning opening 76, either the first starting opening 30 or the second starting opening 21 is opened, and the game ball is opened in the opened starting ports 30 and 21. By entering the ball, the first special figure hold (special figure 1 hold) or the second special figure hold (special figure 2 hold) occurs. Due to the opening pattern of the electric chew 29 when passing through the gate 28, the opening probability of the first starting port 30 is about 277/278, and the opening probability of the second starting port 21 is about 1/279 (FIG. 13 (B). ), FIG. 14). In the gaming machine 1, the digestion of the first special figure hold is executed in preference to the digestion of the second special figure hold (FIG. 21).

As shown in FIG. 60 (A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variablely displayed on the display screen 7a during the variation of the special figure 1. The variable display here includes not only a display in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are visually recognizable when they are moving at high speed, but also a display in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are invisible due to high-speed movement. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of symbols including the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and the special symbol is variably displayed by the variable display of the set of symbols (here, the decorative symbol 8L, 8C, 8R). The special figure 1 variation) is represented, and the special figure lottery result (here, the special figure 1 lottery result) is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols.

On the display screen 7a, two hold icons 9A representing special figure 1 hold and a variable icon (the hold icon) 9C are displayed. Here, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C corresponds to the special figure 1 lottery being executed. On the display screen 7a, there is also a display of the number of remaining time reductions, which is expressed as "2 times remaining time reduction", and a special figure, which is currently changing, which is expressed as "special figure 1 fluctuation". A special map display during change indicating the type is displayed. In FIG. 60A, at this time, the game ball passes through the gate 28, the game ball enters the second winning opening 76 according to the opening pattern of the electric chew 29, and the second starting opening 21 is opened.

As shown in FIG. 60 (B), the game ball enters the opened second starting port 21 and the number of stored second special figure reservations (the number of special figure 2 hold) changes from "0" to "1". It's changing. That is, the first special figure 2 hold (first hold) has occurred. However, the hold icon 9B is not displayed on the display screen 7a even though the first special figure 2 hold has occurred.

In FIG. 60 (C), after FIG. 60 (B), during the same fluctuation, the game ball further passes through the gate 28, and the game ball enters the first winning opening 75 due to the opening pattern of the electric chew 29. Then, the first starting port 30 is opened. As shown in FIG. 60 (D), a game ball enters the opened first starting port 30, a third special figure 1 hold (third hold) occurs, and a third Hold icon 9A is newly displayed. That is, while the special figure 2 hold does not display the hold icon 9B after the occurrence, the special figure 1 hold promptly displays the hold icon 9A after winning a prize.

In FIG. 60 (E), after FIG. 60 (D), during the same fluctuation, the game ball further passes through the gate 28, and the game ball enters the second winning opening 76 due to the opening pattern of the electric chew 29. Then, the second starting port 21 is opened. As shown in FIG. 60 (F), the game ball enters the opened second starting port 21 and the number of stored second special figure reservations (the number of special figure 2 hold) changes from "1" to "2". It's changing. That is, the second special figure 2 hold (second hold) has occurred. However, the hold icon 9B is not displayed on the display screen 7a even though the two special figures 2 hold have occurred. That is, the hold icon 9A is displayed immediately after winning the special figure 1 hold, while the hold icon 9B is not displayed even if the special figure 2 hold occurs.

In FIG. 60 (G), after FIG. 60 (F), during the same fluctuation, the game ball further passes through the gate 28, and the game ball enters the first winning opening 75 due to the opening pattern of the electric chew 29. Then, the first starting port 30 is opened. As shown in FIG. 60 (H), a game ball enters the opened first starting port 30, a fourth special figure 1 hold (fourth hold) occurs, and a fourth. Hold icon 9A is newly displayed. That is, while the special figure 2 hold does not display the hold icon 9B after the occurrence, the special figure 1 hold promptly displays the hold icon 9A after winning a prize.

FIG. 60 (I) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation shown in FIGS. 60 (A) to 60 (H) has been completed. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed. The variable icon (holding icon) 9C is digested. Then, on the display screen 7a, the hold icon 9A shifts to become the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C. By shifting the hold icon 9A, the hold icon 9A is reduced by one to three. Then, the special figure 1 variation is executed.

As shown in FIG. 60 (J), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variablely displayed on the display screen 7a during the variation of the special figure 1. On the display screen 7a, three hold icons 9A representing special figure 1 hold and a variable icon (the hold icon) 9C are displayed. Here, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C corresponds to the special figure 1 lottery being executed. In addition, on the display screen 7a, there is a time-saving remaining number display indicating the remaining time-saving number of times, which is expressed as "time-saving remaining 1 time", and a special figure which is currently changing, which is expressed as "special figure 1 fluctuation". A special map display during change indicating the type and a time-saving state final fluctuation display indicating that it is the last change in the time-saving state, which is expressed as "last one time", are displayed. Here, the last variation of the time saving state is shown.

In FIG. 60 (K), after FIG. 60 (J), a state in which a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation in Special FIG. 1 is shown. On the display screen 7a, the variation display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R corresponding to the variation of the special figure 1 continues. After a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation, the hold icon 9B corresponding to the first hold is newly displayed among the two special figure 2 holds (first hold and second hold) that were not displayed. ..

Further, after the lapse of a predetermined period, as shown in FIG. 60 (L), a hold icon 9B corresponding to the remaining one special figure 2 hold (second hold) that was not displayed is newly displayed, and a total of two holds. Icon 9B is displayed. Here, the hold icon 9B is not displayed for the special figure 2 hold that occurred between the start of the time reduction and the time before the predetermined period elapses after the start of the time reduction final fluctuation, and the delay is displayed collectively after the predetermined period elapses after the start of the time reduction final fluctuation. The display effect is executed. When the hold icons 9B are collectively displayed after a lapse of a predetermined period after the start of the time reduction final fluctuation, a plurality of hold icons 9B may be displayed at the same time, or may be displayed one by one in order. When displaying one by one in order, the timing at which the first hold icon 9B is displayed and the timing at which the second hold icon 9B is displayed can be arbitrarily set.

[Icon delay display effect C]
FIG. 61 is a diagram for explaining the icon delay display effect C. The icon delay display effect is an effect in which the icon is displayed at a timing delayed from the entry when the ball enters the starting port. Here, the "hold icon 9B" is set as the "icon", and the "second starting port 21" is set as the "starting port".

In the icon delay display effect C, the special figure change (special figure 1 change or special figure 2 change) is executed in the time saving state after the big hit game of the big hit type "5R time saving 100 times big hit" (FIG. 10) of special figure 1. It will be explained as an icon. The player executes a right-handed hit, and when the gate 28 is passed, the electric chew 29 is opened, and the game ball that has entered the electric chew winning opening 34 enters either the first winning opening 75 or the second winning opening 76. Sphere (see FIG. 13 (B) “Special Figure 1 Time saving state”). When the game ball enters the first winning opening 75 and the second winning opening 76, either the first starting opening 30 or the second starting opening 21 is opened, and the game ball is opened in the opened starting ports 30 and 21. By entering the ball, the first special figure hold (special figure 1 hold) or the second special figure hold (special figure 2 hold) occurs. Due to the opening pattern of the electric chew 29 when passing through the gate 28, the opening probability of the first starting port 30 is about 277/278, and the opening probability of the second starting port 21 is about 1/279 (FIG. 13 (B). ), FIG. 14). In the gaming machine 1, the digestion of the first special figure hold is executed in preference to the digestion of the second special figure hold (FIG. 21).

As shown in FIG. 61 (A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variablely displayed on the display screen 7a during the variation of the special figure 1. The variable display here includes not only a display in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are visually recognizable when they are moving at high speed, but also a display in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are invisible due to high-speed movement. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of symbols including the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and the special symbol is variably displayed by the variable display of the set of symbols (here, the decorative symbol 8L, 8C, 8R). The special figure 1 variation) is represented, and the special figure lottery result (here, the special figure 1 lottery result) is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols.

On the display screen 7a, two hold icons 9A representing special figure 1 hold and a variable icon (the hold icon) 9C are displayed. Here, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C corresponds to the special figure 1 lottery being executed. In addition, on the display screen 7a, there is a time-saving remaining number display indicating the remaining time-saving number of times, which is expressed as "time-saving remaining 12 times", and a special figure which is currently changing, which is expressed as "special figure 1 fluctuation". A special map display during change indicating the type is displayed. In FIG. 61 (A), at this time, the game ball passes through the gate 28, the game ball enters the second winning opening 76 according to the opening pattern of the electric chew 29, and the second starting opening 21 is opened. A game ball enters the opened second starting port 21, and the number of stored second special figure hold (number of special figure 2 hold) changes from "0" to "1". That is, the first special figure 2 hold (first hold) has occurred. However, the hold icon 9B is not displayed on the display screen 7a even though the first special figure 2 hold has occurred.

FIG. 61 (B) shows a state after the special figure 1 variation is executed a plurality of times from FIG. 61 (A). The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the fluctuation of the special figure 1 are displayed in a variable manner, and "5 times remaining in the time saving" is displayed as the number of times remaining in the time saving. At this time, the game ball also passes through the gate 28, and the game ball enters the second winning opening 76 according to the opening pattern of the electric chew 29, and the second starting opening 21 is opened. A game ball enters the opened second starting port 21, and the number of stored second special figure hold (number of special figure 2 hold) changes from "1" to "2". That is, the second special figure 2 hold (second hold) has occurred. However, the hold icon 9B is not displayed on the display screen 7a even though the two special figures 2 hold have occurred.

FIG. 61 (C) shows a state after the special figure 1 variation is executed a plurality of times from FIG. 61 (B). The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the fluctuation of the special figure 1 are displayed in a variable manner, and "2 times remaining in the time saving" is displayed as the number of times remaining in the time saving. At this time, the game ball also passes through the gate 28, and the game ball enters the second winning opening 76 according to the opening pattern of the electric chew 29, and the second starting opening 21 is opened. A game ball enters the opened second starting port 21, and the number of stored second special figure hold (number of special figure 2 hold) changes from "2" to "3". That is, the third special figure 2 hold (third hold) has occurred. However, the hold icon 9B is not displayed on the display screen 7a even though the three special figures 2 hold have occurred.

In FIG. 61 (D), after FIG. 61 (C), during the same fluctuation, the game ball further passes through the gate 28, and the game ball enters the first winning opening 75 due to the opening pattern of the electric chew 29. Then, the first starting port 30 is opened. A game ball enters the opened first start opening 30, a third special figure 1 hold (third hold) occurs, and a third hold icon 9A is newly displayed. With the occurrence of the special figure 1 hold as a trigger, the hold icon 9B corresponding to the first hold is newly displayed among the three special figure 2 holds (1st to 3rd holds) that have not been displayed.

FIG. 61 (E) shows an effect in which a character image of “still” is displayed during the same fluctuation after FIG. 61 (D). This text image suggests that the number of hold icons 9B displayed will increase further. After that, as shown in FIG. 61 (F), two hold icons 9B corresponding to the remaining two special figure 2 hold (second hold, third hold) that were not displayed are newly displayed, for a total of three. One hold icon 9B is displayed. Here, the hold icon 9B is not displayed immediately after the hold occurs for the special figure 2 hold that occurred after the start of the time reduction, and when the special figure 1 hold occurs, it is displayed by that time in accordance with the display of the hold icon 9A. A delay display effect is executed in which the hold icons 9B that have not been set are displayed together. When the hold icons 9B are displayed together, a plurality of hold icons 9B may be displayed at the same time, or the hold icons 9B may be displayed one by one in order. When displaying one by one in order, the timing at which the first hold icon 9B is displayed and the timing at which the second hold icon 9B is displayed can be arbitrarily set.

FIG. 61 (G) is executed instead of FIGS. 61 (D) to (F) after FIG. 61 (C). FIG. 61 (G) is in the process of changing the next special figure 1 of FIG. 61 (C), and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner. A variable icon (holding icon) 9C is displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C corresponds to the special figure 1 lottery being executed. In addition, on the display screen 7a, there is a time-saving remaining number display indicating the remaining time-saving number of times, which is expressed as "time-saving remaining 1 time", and a special figure which is currently changing, which is expressed as "special figure 1 fluctuation". A special map display during change indicating the type and a time-saving state final fluctuation display indicating that it is the last change in the time-saving state, which is expressed as "last one time", are displayed. Here, the last variation of the time saving state is shown.

FIG. 61 (H) shows a state in which a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the variation in Special FIG. 1 after FIG. 61 (G). On the display screen 7a, the variation display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R corresponding to the variation of the special figure 1 continues. When a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation, the hold icon 9B corresponding to the first hold is newly displayed among the three special figure 2 holds (1st to 3rd hold) that have not been displayed.

FIG. 61 (I) shows an effect in which a character image of “still” is displayed during the same fluctuation after FIG. 61 (H). This text image suggests that the number of hold icons 9B displayed will increase further. After that, as shown in FIG. 61 (J), two hold icons 9B corresponding to the remaining two special figures 2 hold (second hold and third hold) that were not displayed are newly displayed, for a total of three. One hold icon 9B is displayed. Here, the hold icon 9B is not displayed for the special figure 2 hold that occurred between the start of the time reduction and the time before the predetermined period elapses after the start of the time reduction final fluctuation, and the delay is displayed collectively after the predetermined period elapses after the start of the time reduction final fluctuation. The display effect is executed. When the hold icons 9B are collectively displayed after a lapse of a predetermined period after the start of the time reduction final fluctuation, a plurality of hold icons 9B may be displayed at the same time, or may be displayed one by one in order. When displaying one by one in order, the timing at which the first hold icon 9B is displayed and the timing at which the second hold icon 9B is displayed can be arbitrarily set.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the icon delay display effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 59, when the gaming ball enters the first starting port 20, the hold icon 9A is displayed at a timing delayed from the entry. can. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 60 and 61.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in this effect, as shown in FIGS. 59 (A) and 59 (C), when a plurality of gaming balls enter the first starting port 20, the ball is shown in FIG. 59 (D). As described above, a plurality of hold icons 9A are collectively displayed at a timing delayed from the entry of the ball. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 60 and 61.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in this production, as shown in FIGS. 59 (E), (H), and (I), when a plurality of gaming balls enter the first starting port 20, FIG. 59 (K) ), One of the plurality of hold icons 9A is displayed at a timing delayed from entering the ball, and then the remaining hold icons 9A are displayed as shown in FIG. 59 (L). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 60 and 61.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 60 (K) and 60 (L), the hold icon 9B is displayed during the final fluctuation of the time reduction. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIG. 61.

[Modification example]
A modified example of the icon delay display effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the icon delay display effects A to C, the hold icon 9A or the hold icon 9B is exemplified as an icon indicating that the game ball has entered the starting port. However, the icon indicating that the game ball has entered the starting port may be an icon other than the hold icons 9A and 9B. That is, an icon other than the hold icon may be used as long as it indicates that the game ball has entered the starting port. For example, in the present application, when a game ball enters the second starting port 21, it always hits (FIG. 9 (A)). Therefore, when an icon indicating that the hit is confirmed is displayed when the game ball enters the second starting port 21, this icon also indicates that the game ball of the present application has entered the starting port. Corresponds to the icon.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect A4-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is an icon indicating that the game ball has entered the starting port.
When the game ball enters the starting port, it is possible to execute an effect in which the icon is displayed at a timing delayed from the entry.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A4-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A4-1.
In the effect, when a plurality of game balls enter the starting port, the plurality of the icons are collectively displayed at a timing delayed from the entry.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A4-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A4-1.
In the effect, when a plurality of game balls enter the starting port, one of the plurality of icons is displayed at a timing delayed from the entry, and then the remaining hold icons are displayed. ,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A4-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A4-1 to A4-3.
The effect is executed in the time saving state, and when the game ball enters the starting port before the time saving final change, the icon is displayed during the time saving final change.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Hereinafter, the time saving frequency notification effects A to C will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 64. This time saving number notification effect can be executed during the jackpot game during the time saving. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command related to the jackpot game received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the time saving number notification effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

[Time saving number notification effect A]
FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining the time saving number of times notification effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 62 (A), the chance time rush effect is started. This chance time rush effect is executed in the ending effect during the jackpot game. The chance time rush effect is executed by analyzing the jackpot ending command received from the sub-control board 90 by the image control microcomputer 101. Here, the message image MSG "Entering the chance time" is displayed on the display screen 7a. The number of chance times (number of continuations) is either 100 times or 150 times in this embodiment. During the chance time, the variable effect is repeated as many times as the chance time unless it becomes a big hit.

When a predetermined condition is satisfied during the repeated variation effect, the reach formation effect is executed as shown in FIG. 62 (B). The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbol stops in the reach mode. Here, both the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are stopped at the "5" symbol. At this time, the medium effect symbol 8C continues to fluctuate.

When it is a big hit, as shown in FIG. 62 (C), the effect symbol is stopped in the big hit mode. Here, the left, middle, and right production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all stopped at the "5" symbol. An example of the jackpot mode is a mode in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped at doublets. However, the jackpot may be notified by using a special symbol other than the numerical symbol. For example, the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R are "5" symbols, and the middle effect symbol 8C is a special symbol. Further, for example, the left, middle, and right effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all special symbols.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (D), the jackpot notification effect is executed. The jackpot notification effect is an effect of notifying the player that a jackpot has been achieved. The jackpot notification effect is executed by analyzing the jackpot opening command received from the sub-control board 90 by the image control microcomputer 101. Here, the message image MSG "big hit" is displayed on the display screen 7a. However, this jackpot notification effect can be omitted. Following the stop of the effect symbol in the jackpot mode shown in FIG. 62 (C), the effect shown in FIG. 62 (E) may be executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (E), the chance time addition effect is executed. The chance time addition effect is an effect that suggests that the number of chance times (the number of continuations) is added, and an image that suggests that the number of chance times is added is displayed. The chance time addition effect is executed by analyzing the jackpot opening command received from the sub-control board 90 by the image control microcomputer 101. Here, the image of the ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a, and the message image MSG saying "Add a chance time" is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 62 (F) to 62 (J), the charge effect is executed. The charge effect is an effect of displaying the meter image MTG and the numerical image SCG to notify the number of chance times (continuation number). The charge effect is executed by analyzing the jackpot round command received from the sub-control board 90 by the image control microcomputer 101. Here, the horizontally long meter image MSG is displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a, and the numerical image SCG is displayed above the mail image MSG. In the present embodiment, the number of acquired game balls is not notified. By not notifying the number of game balls in this way, it is possible to pay attention to the charge effect.

In FIG. 62 (F), the numerical image SCG is “0”. Further, the meter image MTG is also displayed as a blank in accordance with the numerical image SCG. In the present embodiment, the numerical image SCG and the meter image MTG are “0” at the start of the charge effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, at the start of the charge effect, the numerical image SCG and the meter image MTG may be used as the remaining number of chance times at the time of a big hit.

In FIG. 62 (G), the numerical image SCG is “10”. Further, the meter image MTG is also increasing according to the numerical value of the numerical image SCG. The increase in the meter image MTG is shown with hatching (the same applies below). The numerical value of the numerical image SCG and the hatched portion of the meter image MTG do not have to be completely synchronized (matched). For example, the numerical value of the numerical image SCG may be continuously changed, and the hatched portion of the meter image MTG may be changed stepwise. And vice versa. The same applies to the following.

In FIG. 62 (H), the numerical image SCG is “26”. In addition, the hatched portion of the meter image MTG also increases in accordance with the numerical value of the numerical image SCG.
In FIG. 62 (I), the numerical image SCG is “55”. In addition, the hatched portion of the meter image MTG also increases in accordance with the numerical value of the numerical image SCG.
In FIG. 62 (J), the numerical image SCG is “100”. Further, the meter image MTG is also in a state of being hatched as a whole.

The charge effect is executed in the round game during the jackpot game. Therefore, the numerical value of the numerical image SCG may be increased according to the winning of the large winning opening 30. Further, the hatched portion of the meter image MTG may be increased in accordance with the winning of the large winning opening 30. In a plurality of round games, as the round game progresses, the rate of increase of the numerical value of the numerical image SCG and the hatched portion of the meter image MTG may be increased. For example, in the case of a 3R round game, the increase rate is "2" for the 1R, the increase rate is "3" for the 2R, and the increase rate is "5" for the 3R. According to this configuration, the rate of increase is small in the early stages and the rate of increase is large in the final stages, which contributes to the improvement of interest.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (K), the result effect is executed. The result effect is an effect of notifying the number of chance times (the number of continuations). This result effect is executed by analyzing the jackpot ending command received from the sub-control board 90 by the image control microcomputer 101. Here, the message image MSG "MAX 100 times" is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. In addition, the ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (L), the continuous notification effect is executed. The continuous notification effect is an effect of notifying that the chance time will continue. The continuous notification effect is executed by analyzing the jackpot ending command received from the sub-control board 90 by the image control microcomputer 101. Here, the message image MSG "continue chance time" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.

[Time saving number notification effect B]
FIG. 63 is a diagram for explaining the time saving number of times notification effect B. The time saving number of times notification effect B is another example of the time saving number of times notification effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 63 (A), the chance time rush effect is started. This chance time rush effect is executed in the ending effect during the jackpot game. The chance time rush effect is executed by analyzing the jackpot ending command received from the sub-control board 90 by the image control microcomputer 101. Here, the message image MSG "Entering the chance time" is displayed on the display screen 7a. The number of chance times (number of continuations) is either 100 times or 150 times in this embodiment. During the chance time, the variable effect is repeated as many times as the chance time unless it becomes a big hit.

When a predetermined condition is satisfied during the repeated variation effect, the reach formation effect is executed as shown in FIG. 63 (B). The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbol stops in the reach mode. Here, both the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are stopped at the "5" symbol. At this time, the medium effect symbol 8C continues to fluctuate.

When it is a big hit, as shown in FIG. 63 (C), the effect symbol stops in the big hit mode. Here, the left, middle, and right production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all stopped at the "5" symbol. An example of the jackpot mode is a mode in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped at doublets. However, the jackpot may be notified by using a special symbol other than the numerical symbol. For example, the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R are "5" symbols, and the middle effect symbol 8C is a special symbol. Further, for example, the left, middle, and right effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all special symbols.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (D), the jackpot notification effect is executed. The jackpot notification effect is an effect of notifying the player that a jackpot has been achieved. The jackpot notification effect is executed by analyzing the jackpot opening command received from the sub-control board 90 by the image control microcomputer 101. Here, the message image MSG "big hit" is displayed on the display screen 7a. However, this jackpot notification effect can be omitted. Following the stop of the effect symbol in the jackpot mode shown in FIG. 63 (C), the effect shown in FIG. 63 (E) may be executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (E), the chance time addition effect is executed. The chance time addition effect is an effect that suggests that the number of chance times (the number of continuations) is added, and an image that suggests that the number of chance times is added is displayed. The chance time addition effect is executed by analyzing the jackpot opening command received from the sub-control board 90 by the image control microcomputer 101. Here, the image of the ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a, and the message image MSG saying "Add a chance time" is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 63 (F) to (J), the charge effect is executed. The charge effect is an effect of displaying the meter image MTG and the numerical image SCG to notify the number of chance times (continuation number). The charge effect is executed by analyzing the jackpot round command received from the sub-control board 90 by the image control microcomputer 101. Here, the horizontally long meter image MSG is displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a, and the numerical image SCG is displayed above the mail image MSG. In the present embodiment, the number of acquired game balls is not notified. By not notifying the number of game balls in this way, it is possible to pay attention to the charge effect.

In FIG. 63 (F), the numerical image SCG is “0”. Further, the meter image MTG is also displayed as a blank in accordance with the numerical image SCG. In the present embodiment, the numerical image SCG and the meter image MTG are “0” at the start of the charge effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, at the start of the charge effect, the numerical image SCG and the meter image MTG may be used as the remaining number of chance times at the time of a big hit.

In FIG. 63 (G), the numerical image SCG is “10”. Further, the meter image MTG is also increasing according to the numerical value of the numerical image SCG. The increase in the meter image MTG is shown with hatching (the same applies below). The numerical value of the numerical image SCG and the hatched portion of the meter image MTG do not have to be completely synchronized (matched). For example, the numerical value of the numerical image SCG may be continuously changed, and the hatched portion of the meter image MTG may be changed stepwise. And vice versa. The same applies to the following.

In FIG. 63 (H), the numerical image SCG is “26”. In addition, the hatched portion of the meter image MTG also increases in accordance with the numerical value of the numerical image SCG. Further, here, the meter image MTG is enlarged more than the meter image MTG of FIGS. 63 (F) (G).
In FIG. 63 (I), the numerical image SCG is “55”. In addition, the hatched portion of the meter image MTG also increases in accordance with the numerical value of the numerical image SCG. Further, here, the meter image MTG is magnified more than the meter image MTG of FIG. 63 (H).
In FIG. 63 (J), the numerical image SCG is “100”. Further, the meter image MTG is also in a state of being hatched as a whole. The meter image MTG remains magnified and has the same size as in FIG. 63 (I).

The charge effect is executed during the round game during the jackpot game. Therefore, the numerical value of the numerical image SCG may be increased according to the winning of the large winning openings 30 and 35. Further, the hatched portion of the meter image MTG may be increased in accordance with the winning of the large winning openings 30 and 35. In a plurality of round games, as the round game progresses, the rate of increase of the numerical value of the numerical image SCG and the hatched portion of the meter image MTG may be increased. For example, in the case of a 3R round game, the increase rate is "2" for the 1R, the increase rate is "3" for the 2R, and the increase rate is "5" for the 3R. According to this configuration, the rate of increase is small in the early stages and the rate of increase is large in the final stages, which contributes to the improvement of interest.

In the present embodiment, the meter image MTG is enlarged and displayed in the charge effect. The enlarged display of the meter image MTG gradually increases the meter image MTG. At this time, the meter image MTG may be enlarged as the round game progresses. For example, in the case of a 3R round game, the meter image MTG displayed on the 1st R is enlarged twice on the 2nd and 3rd Rs. On the other hand, the enlarged display of the meter image MTG may be such that the meter image MTG is continuously enlarged. According to these configurations, the meter image MTG is small in the early stage and the meter image MTG is large in the final stage, which contributes to the improvement of the interest. In addition to the meter image MTG, the numerical value of the numerical image SCG may be enlarged and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (K), the result effect is executed. The result effect is an effect of notifying the number of chance times (the number of continuations). This result effect is executed by analyzing the jackpot ending command received from the sub-control board 90 by the image control microcomputer 101. Here, the message image MSG "MAX 100 times" is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. In addition, the ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (L), the continuous notification effect is executed. The continuous notification effect is an effect of notifying that the chance time will continue. The continuous notification effect is executed by analyzing the jackpot ending command received from the sub-control board 90 by the image control microcomputer 101. Here, the message image MSG "continue chance time" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.

[Time saving number notification effect C]
FIG. 64 is a diagram for explaining the time saving frequency notification effect C. The time reduction number notification effect C is an example when the number of chance times (the number of continuations) is 150 times.
First, as shown in FIG. 64 (A), the chance time rush effect is started. This chance time rush effect is executed in the ending effect during the jackpot game. The chance time rush effect is executed by analyzing the jackpot ending command received from the sub-control board 90 by the image control microcomputer 101. Here, the message image MSG "Entering the chance time" is displayed on the display screen 7a. During the chance time, the variable effect is repeated as many times as the chance time unless it becomes a big hit.

When a predetermined condition is satisfied during the repeated variation effect, the reach formation effect is executed as shown in FIG. 64 (B). The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbol stops in the reach mode. Here, both the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are stopped at the "5" symbol. At this time, the medium effect symbol 8C continues to fluctuate.

When it is a big hit, as shown in FIG. 64 (C), the effect symbol stops in the big hit mode. Here, the left, middle, and right production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all stopped at the "5" symbol. An example of the jackpot mode is a mode in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped at doublets. However, the jackpot may be notified by using a special symbol other than the numerical symbol. For example, the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R are "5" symbols, and the middle effect symbol 8C is a special symbol. Further, for example, the left, middle, and right effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all special symbols.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (D), the jackpot notification effect is executed. The jackpot notification effect is an effect of notifying the player that a jackpot has been achieved. The jackpot notification effect is executed by analyzing the jackpot opening command received from the sub-control board 90 by the image control microcomputer 101. Here, the message image MSG "big hit" is displayed on the display screen 7a. However, this jackpot notification effect can be omitted. Following the stop of the effect symbol in the jackpot mode shown in FIG. 64 (C), the effect shown in FIG. 64 (E) may be executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (E), the chance time addition effect is executed. The chance time addition effect is an effect that suggests that the number of chance times (the number of continuations) is added, and an image that suggests that the number of chance times is added is displayed. The chance time addition effect is executed by analyzing the jackpot opening command received from the sub-control board 90 by the image control microcomputer 101. Here, the image of the ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a, and the message image MSG saying "Add a chance time" is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (F), the charge effect is executed. The charge effect is an effect of displaying the meter image MTG and the numerical image SCG to notify the number of chance times (continuation number). The charge effect is executed by analyzing the jackpot round command or ending command received from the sub-control board 90 by the image control microcomputer 101. Here, the horizontally long meter image MSG is displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a, and the numerical image SCG is displayed above the mail image MSG. The numerical image SCG is "100". Further, the meter image MTG is also in a state of being hatched as a whole. Further, a message image MSG of "right-handed" is displayed in the upper right part of the display screen 7a. In the present embodiment, the number of acquired game balls is not notified. By not notifying the number of game balls in this way, it is possible to pay attention to the charge effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (G), the meter image enlargement effect is executed. The meter image enlargement effect is an effect of enlarging and displaying the meter image MTG displayed in FIG. 64 (F). The meter image enlargement effect is executed by analyzing the jackpot ending command received from the sub-control board 90 by the image control microcomputer 101. Here, both ends of the meter image MTG are enlarged and displayed so as to protrude from the display screen 7a. The numerical image SCG is displayed without being enlarged. Of course, the numerical image SCG may also be enlarged and displayed in the same manner as the meter image MTG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (H), the result effect is executed. The result effect is an effect of notifying the number of chance times (the number of continuations). This result effect is executed by analyzing the jackpot ending command received from the sub-control board 90 by the image control microcomputer 101. Here, the message image MSG "MAX 100 times" is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. In addition, the ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. Furthermore, the meter image MTG and the numerical image SCG are displayed above the message image MSG. Here, an image reduction movement effect is executed in which the meter image MTG enlarged and displayed in FIG. 64 (G) is reduced and moved to the upper right portion of the display screen 7a. Due to this image reduction movement effect, the numerical image SCG also moves together with the meter image MTG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (I), the continuous notification effect is executed. The continuous notification effect is an effect of notifying that the chance time will continue. The continuous notification effect is executed by analyzing the jackpot ending command received from the sub-control board 90 by the image control microcomputer 101. Here, the message image MSG "continue chance time" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (J), the variation effect is executed. The variable effect is an effect in which the effect symbol stops changing. During the chance time, the variable effect is repeated as many times as the chance time unless it becomes a big hit. Here, it is assumed that the variation effect is executed 100 times.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (K), the end notification effect is executed. The end notification effect is an effect of notifying that the chance time has ended. The end notification effect is executed as an effect of the 100th variation of the chance time. Here, the message image MSG "End of chance time" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. If the number of chance times (the number of continuations) is 100, the chance time ends here. On the other hand, when the number of chance times (the number of continuations) is 150, the additional effect of FIG. 64 (L) is executed.

In FIG. 64 (L), the additional effect is executed. The additional effect is an effect of notifying the addition of the number of chance times (the number of continuations). The additional effect is executed as an effect of the final fluctuation of the chance time. Here, the message image MSG "chance time +50" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. That is, when the number of chance times (the number of continuations) is 150, the addition of 50 times is notified by the effect of the 100th variation of the chance time.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the time saving number notification effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, it is possible to execute a notification effect for notifying the number of chance times after the jackpot game during the jackpot game (FIGS. 62 (F) to (K), FIGS. 63 (F) to 63 (F). (K), FIGS. 64 (F) to (H)). According to this configuration, since the number of chance times after the jackpot game is notified in the middle of the jackpot game, the player becomes aware of the continuation of the advantageous gaming state, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the jackpot game during the chance time, a notification effect for notifying the number of chance times after the jackpot game is executed (FIGS. 62 (A) to (K), FIGS. 63 (A) to 63 (A). (K), FIGS. 64 (A) to (K)). According to this configuration, the player becomes more aware of the continuation of the advantageous gaming state, and can improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the chance time addition effect of displaying an image suggesting the addition of the number of chance times is executed (FIGS. 62 (E), 63 (E), 64 (E)). According to this configuration, the player becomes more aware of the continuation of the advantageous gaming state, and can improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the number of chance times is counted up and displayed as a numerical image SCG (FIGS. 62 (F) to (J), FIGS. 63 (F) to (J)). According to this configuration, the player becomes more aware of the continuation of the advantageous gaming state, and can improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the increase in the number of chance times is displayed by using the meter image MTG (FIGS. 62 (F) to (J), 63 (F) to (J), 64 (F)). ~ (H)). According to this configuration, the player becomes more aware of the continuation of the advantageous gaming state, and can improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, an image suggesting that the chance time continues is displayed (FIGS. 62 (L), 63 (L), 64 (I)). According to this configuration, the player becomes more aware of the continuation of the advantageous gaming state, and can improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the number of gaming balls acquired in the jackpot game is not displayed (FIGS. 62 (F) to (J), 63 (F) to (J), 64 (FIG. 64). F)). According to this configuration, the player becomes more aware of the continuation of the advantageous gaming state, and can improve the interest of the game.

In addition, chance time addition effect (FIGS. 62 (E), 63 (E), 64 (E)), charge effect (FIGS. 62 (F) to (J), FIG. 63 (F) to (J), FIG. 64 (F)), meter image enlargement effect (FIG. 64 (G)), result effect (FIG. 62 (K), FIG. 63 (K), FIG. 64 (H)), continuous notification effect (FIG. 62 (L), FIGS. 63 (L) and 64 (I) correspond to the "notification effect". In addition, the chance time (time saving state) corresponds to the "advantageous game state", the jackpot game corresponds to the "special game", and the number of chance times corresponds to the "continuation number".

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the time saving number notification effect.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, the number of chance times (number of continuations) was notified. That is, the number of continuations of the time-saving game state (low accuracy and high base state) was notified. On the other hand, the number of continuations of the probabilistic gaming state (high probability high base state) may be notified.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, the notification effect is performed in the jackpot game during the chance time. On the other hand, the notification effect may be performed in the jackpot game in the probability variation game state (high probability high base state) or in the jackpot game in the normal game state (low probability low base state).

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, the meter image enlargement effect and the image reduction / movement effect of enlarging the meter image MTG and then reducing and moving the meter image MTG are executed (FIGS. 64 (G) and 64 (H)). On the other hand, the effect is not limited to the meter image MTG, and the notification image that notifies the number of chance times may be enlarged, reduced, and moved.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect A5-1]
A gaming machine that executes a special game when a predetermined lottery is won, and shifts to an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player with the special game as an opportunity.
In the middle of the special game, it is possible to execute a notification effect for notifying the number of continuations, which is the number of fluctuations in which the advantageous game state continues.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A5-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A5-1.
The notification effect is executed when the predetermined lottery is won and the special game is executed in the advantageous game state.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A5-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A5-2.
In the notification effect, an image suggesting the addition of the number of continuations of the advantageous gaming state is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A5-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A5-1 to A5-3.
In the notification effect, the numerical value is counted up and displayed until the number of continuations is reached.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A5-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A5-1 to A5-4.
In the notification effect, the increase in the numerical value until the number of continuations is reached is displayed using a meter image.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A5-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A5-1 to A5-5.
In the notification effect, an image suggesting that the advantageous gaming state is continued is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A5-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A5-1 to A5-6.
In the notification effect, the number of acquired balls in the special game is not displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A5-8]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A5-1 to A5-7.
The number of continuations includes a first number of continuations and a second number of continuations larger than the first number of continuations.
In the notification effect, the effect is performed using the first continuation number of times.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A5-9]
The gaming machine according to aspect A5-4.
The display of the count-up in the notification effect is performed in parallel with the entry of the game ball into the specific entry port in the special game.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A5-10]
The gaming machine according to aspect A5-5.
The display of the meter image in the notification effect is performed in parallel with the entry of the game ball into the specific entry port in the special game.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Hereinafter, the decorative symbol irregular start / stop effects A to C will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 to 67. The decorative symbol irregular start / stop effects A to C are executed during a special symbol variation effect or the like. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the decorative symbol irregular start / stop effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image display device 7 The image is displayed on the display screen 7a of.

[Decorative pattern irregular start / stop production A]
FIG. 65 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol irregular start / stop effect A. The decorative symbol irregular start / stop effect A is an effect performed during one change of the special symbol. In the decorative symbol irregular start / stop effect A, as shown in FIG. 65 (A), first, the decorative symbol start / stop effect is performed. In this pre-starting effect of the decorative symbol, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed at the position of the first line LN1. The first line LN1 is arranged at a position slightly above the center of the display screen 7a. In the figure, the left decorative symbol 8L has a “1” symbol, the middle decorative symbol 8C has a “3” symbol, and the right decorative symbol 8R has a “4” symbol. In addition, the character CRA is performing a predetermined effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (B), the decorative symbol variation start effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation start effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R stopped and displayed at the position of the first line LN1 start to change. Specifically, in the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the left decorative symbol 8L starts to fluctuate, then the middle decorative symbol 8C starts to fluctuate, and then the right decorative symbol 8R starts to fluctuate. do. In this case, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R move in the lower left direction (arrow direction in the figure) of the display screen 7a, respectively. The character CRA continues to produce a predetermined effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (C), the decorative symbol variation effect 1 is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect 1, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are an effect of changing (moving) from the first line LN1 to the second line LN2. The second line LN2 is arranged at the lower left position of the display screen 7a and is a downward-sloping line, and is not parallel to the first line LN1. The character CRA still continues to produce a predetermined effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (D), the decorative symbol variation effect 2 is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect 2, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R reach the second line LN2, the reached decorative symbols are gradually erased from the portion reaching the second line LN2. Specifically, first, the decorative symbol 8L reaches the second line LN2, then the intermediate decorative symbol 8C reaches the second line LN2, and then the right decorative symbol 8R reaches the second line LN2. .. The character CRA is still continuing the predetermined effect while changing the location or stopping.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (E), the decorative symbol variation effect 3 is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect 3, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R erased in the second line LN2 gradually appear from the third line LN3. Specifically, first, the decorative symbol 8L appears from the third line LN3, then the intermediate decorative symbol 8C appears from the third line LN3, and then the right decorative symbol 8R appears from the third line LN3. .. The third line LN3 is arranged at the lower right position of the display screen 7a and is a downward-sloping line, and is not parallel to the first line LN1 and the second line LN2. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R appearing from the third line LN3 gradually appear from the third line LN3 toward the upper left of the display screen 7a, and fluctuate (move) toward the upper left of the display screen 7a. do. The left decorative symbol 8L appearing from the third line LN3 has a "2" symbol, the middle decorative symbol 8C has a "4" symbol, and the right decorative symbol 8R has a "5" symbol. It has become. That is, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R appearing from the third line LN3 are numerical symbols different from the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R that have reached the second line LN2 and have been erased. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R appearing from the third line LN3 may have the same numerical symbols as the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R that have reached the second line LN2 and have been erased. .. In addition, the character CRA is still continuing the predetermined effect while changing the location or stopping.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (F), the decorative symbol variation effect 4 is performed. In the decorative symbol variation effect 4, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R appearing from the third line LN3 are each moved onto the first line LN1 and stopped and displayed. Specifically, first, the left decorative symbol 8L appearing from the third line LN3 reaches the first line LN1 and is stopped and displayed, and then the intermediate decorative symbol 8C appearing from the third line LN3 reaches the first line LN1. Is reached and the stop display is displayed, and the right decorative symbol 8R appearing from the third line LN3 reaches the first line LN1 and is stopped and displayed.

[Decorative pattern irregular start / stop effect B]
FIG. 66 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol irregular start / stop effect B. The decorative symbol irregular start / stop effect B is an effect performed during one change of the special symbol. In the decorative symbol irregular start / stop effect B, as shown in FIG. 66 (A), first, the decorative symbol start / stop effect is performed. In this pre-starting effect of the decorative symbol, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed at the position of the first line LN1. The first line LN1 is arranged at a position slightly above the center of the display screen 7a. In the figure, the left decorative symbol 8L has a “1” symbol, the middle decorative symbol 8C has a “3” symbol, and the right decorative symbol 8R has a “4” symbol. In addition, the character CRA is performing a predetermined effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (B), the decorative symbol variation start effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation start effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R stopped and displayed at the position of the first line LN1 start to change. Specifically, in the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the left decorative symbol 8L starts to fluctuate, then the middle decorative symbol 8C starts to fluctuate, and then the right decorative symbol 8R starts to fluctuate. do. In this case, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R move downward (in the direction of the arrow in the figure) of the display screen 7a, respectively. The character CRA continues to produce a predetermined effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (C), the decorative symbol variation effect 1 is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect 1, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are an effect of changing (moving) from the first line LN1 to the second line LN2. The second line LN2 is arranged below the first line LN1 and is parallel to the first line LN1. The character CRA still continues to produce a predetermined effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (D), the decorative symbol variation effect 2 is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect 2, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R reach the second line LN2, the reached decorative symbols are gradually erased from the portion reaching the second line LN2. Specifically, first, the decorative symbol 8L reaches the second line LN2, then the intermediate decorative symbol 8C reaches the second line LN2, and then the right decorative symbol 8R reaches the second line LN2. .. The character CRA is still continuing the predetermined effect while changing the location or stopping.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (E), the decorative symbol variation effect 3 is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect 3, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R erased in the second line LN2 gradually appear from the third line LN3. Specifically, first, the decorative symbol 8L appears from the third line LN3, then the intermediate decorative symbol 8C appears from the third line LN3, and then the right decorative symbol 8R appears from the third line LN3. .. The third line LN3 is arranged above the first line LN1 and is parallel to the first line LN1 and the second line LN2. In other words, the first line LN1 is arranged between the third line LN3 and the second line LN2. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R appearing from the third line LN3 gradually appear from the third line LN3 toward the downward direction of the display screen 7a, and fluctuate (move) toward the downward direction of the display screen 7a, respectively. do. The left decorative symbol 8L appearing from the third line LN3 has a "2" symbol, the middle decorative symbol 8C has a "4" symbol, and the right decorative symbol 8R has a "5" symbol. It has become. That is, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R appearing from the third line LN3 are numerical symbols different from the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R that have reached the second line LN2 and have been erased. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R appearing from the third line LN3 may have the same numerical symbols as the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R that have reached the second line LN2 and have been erased. .. In addition, the character CRA is still continuing the predetermined effect while changing the location or stopping.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (F), the decorative symbol variation effect 4 is performed. In the decorative symbol variation effect 4, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R appearing from the third line LN3 are each moved onto the first line LN1 and stopped and displayed. Specifically, first, the left decorative symbol 8L appearing from the third line LN3 reaches the first line LN1 and is stopped and displayed, and then the intermediate decorative symbol 8C appearing from the third line LN3 reaches the first line LN1. Is reached and the stop display is displayed, and the right decorative symbol 8R appearing from the third line LN3 reaches the first line LN1 and is stopped and displayed.

[Decorative pattern irregular start / stop effect C]
FIG. 67 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol irregular start / stop effect C. The decorative symbol irregular start / stop effect C is an effect performed during one change of the special symbol. In the decorative symbol irregular start / stop effect C, as shown in FIG. 67 (A), first, the decorative symbol start / stop effect is performed. In this pre-starting effect of the decorative symbol, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed at the position of the first line LN1. The first line LN1 is arranged at a position slightly above the center of the display screen 7a. In the figure, the left decorative symbol 8L has a “1” symbol, the middle decorative symbol 8C has a “3” symbol, and the right decorative symbol 8R has a “4” symbol. In addition, the character CRA is performing a predetermined effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (B), the decorative symbol variation start effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation start effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R stopped and displayed at the position of the first line LN1 start to change. Specifically, in the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the left decorative symbol 8L starts to fluctuate, then the middle decorative symbol 8C starts to fluctuate, and then the right decorative symbol 8R starts to fluctuate. do. In this case, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R move downward (in the direction of the arrow in the figure) of the display screen 7a, respectively. The character CRA continues to produce a predetermined effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (C), the decorative symbol variation effect 1 is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect 1, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are an effect of changing (moving) from the first line LN1 to the second line LN2. The second line LN2 is arranged below the first line LN1 and is parallel to the first line LN1. The character CRA still continues to produce a predetermined effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (D), the decorative symbol variation effect 2 is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect 2, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R reach the second line LN2, the reached decorative symbols are gradually erased from the portion reaching the second line LN2. Specifically, first, the decorative symbol 8L reaches the second line LN2, then the intermediate decorative symbol 8C reaches the second line LN2, and then the right decorative symbol 8R reaches the second line LN2. .. The character CRA is still continuing the predetermined effect while changing the location or stopping.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (E), the decorative symbol variation effect 3 is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect 3, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R erased in the second line LN2 gradually appear from the third line LN3. Specifically, first, the decorative symbol 8L appears from the third line LN3, then the intermediate decorative symbol 8C appears from the third line LN3, and then the right decorative symbol 8R appears from the third line LN3. .. The third line LN3 is arranged above the first line LN1 and is parallel to the first line LN1 and the second line LN2. In other words, the first line LN1 is arranged between the third line LN3 and the second line LN2. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R appearing from the third line LN3 gradually appear from the third line LN3 toward the downward direction of the display screen 7a, and fluctuate (move) toward the downward direction of the display screen 7a, respectively. do. The left decorative symbol 8L appearing from the third line LN3 has a "2" symbol, the middle decorative symbol 8C has a "4" symbol, and the right decorative symbol 8R has a "5" symbol. It has become. That is, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R appearing from the third line LN3 are numerical symbols different from the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R that have reached the second line LN2 and have been erased. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R appearing from the third line LN3 may have the same numerical symbols as the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R that have reached the second line LN2 and have been erased. .. In addition, the character CRA is still continuing the predetermined effect while changing the location or stopping.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (F), the decorative symbol variation effect 4 is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect 4, the left decorative symbol 8L appearing from the third line LN3 reaches the first line LN1, is stopped and displayed on the first line LN1, and the lower portion of the stopped displayed left decorative symbol 8L is hidden. The swirl image UZ is displayed as shown above. The swirl image UZ is an image that rotates like a swirl. When the left decorative symbol 8L reaches the first line LN1 and the swirl image UZ is displayed, a bouncing sound, which is a bouncing sound, is notified from the speaker. When the left decorative symbol 8L reaches the first line LN1, the swirl image UZ is displayed so as to hide the lower part of the left decorative symbol 8L, and the bounce sound is notified so that the player can use the left decorative symbol 8L. When the first line LN1 is reached, it feels as if the left decorative symbol 8L is bounced by the first line LN1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (G), the decorative symbol variation effect 5 is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect 5, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C appearing from the third line LN3 reaches the first line LN1, is stopped and displayed on the first line LN1, and the lower portion of the stopped and displayed intermediate decorative symbol 8C is hidden. The swirl image UZ is displayed as described above, and the right decorative symbol 8R appearing from the third line LN3 reaches the first line LN1, is stopped and displayed on the first line LN1, and is below the right decorative symbol 8R that is stopped and displayed. The swirl image UZ is displayed so as to hide the part. The swirl image UZ is an image that rotates like a swirl. When the intermediate decorative symbol 8C reaches the first line LN1 and the spiral image UZ is displayed, a bouncing sound, which is a bouncing sound, is notified from the speaker. When the intermediate decorative symbol 8C reaches the first line LN1, the swirl image UZ is displayed so as to hide the lower part of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the bouncing sound is notified, so that the player can see the intermediate decorative symbol 8C. When the first line LN1 is reached, it feels as if the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is bounced by the first line LN1. Further, when the right decorative symbol 8R reaches the first line LN1 and the spiral image UZ is displayed, a bouncing sound, which is a bouncing sound, is notified from the speaker. When the right decorative symbol 8R reaches the first line LN1, the swirl image UZ is displayed so as to hide the lower part of the right decorative symbol 8R, and the bounce sound is notified so that the player can see the right decorative symbol 8R. When the first line LN1 is reached, it feels as if the right decorative symbol 8R is bounced by the first line LN1. At this time, the swirl image UZ of the left decorative symbol 8L has disappeared.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (H), the decorative symbol variation effect 6 is performed. In the decorative symbol variation effect 6, the spiral images UZ of the decorative symbols 8C and 8R disappear, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R move on the first line LN1 and are stopped and displayed, respectively.

[Modification example]
In the decorative symbol variation effects 4 and 5 of the decorative symbol irregular start / stop effect C, the lower portion of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R was hidden by the swirl image UZ, but the decorative symbol 8L, which is visible to the player, It suffices if the areas of 8C and 8R are changed, and an image such as a character can be substituted for the spiral image UZ. , The left part may be hidden.

In the above decorative symbol irregular start / stop effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R appearing from the third line LN3 were moving toward the first line LN1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first line LN1 and the second are not limited to this. It may move toward the fourth line LN4 different from the line LN2, and stop and display on the fourth line LN4.

In the above decorative symbol irregular start / stop effect, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R move from the first line LN1 to the second line LN2, the left decorative symbol 8L first moves, and then the middle decorative symbol 8C moves, then the right decorative symbol 8R moves, and the left decorative symbol 8L first reaches the second line LN2, then the intermediate decorative symbol 8C reaches the second line LN2, and then The right decorative symbol 8R was configured to reach the second line LN2, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R may be configured to move from the first line LN1 to the second line LN2 at the same time. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R may be configured to reach the second line LN2 at the same time. In this case, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R may or may not disappear at the same time after reaching the second line LN2.

In the above decorative symbol irregular start / stop effect, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R appear in the third line LN3 and move to the first line LN1, the left decorative symbol 8L first appears, and then the middle decorative symbol appears. 8C appears, then the right decorative symbol 8R appears, and the left decorative symbol 8L first reaches the first line LN1, then the intermediate decorative symbol 8C reaches the first line LN1, and then The right decorative symbol 8R was configured to reach the first line LN1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R may be configured to appear from the third line LN3 at the same time, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C may be formed at the same time. , 8R may be configured to reach the first line LN1 at the same time.

In the above decorative symbol irregular start / stop effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R move from the first line LN1 to the second line LN2, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R that reach the second line LN2 are gradually erased. Then, it gradually appears from the third line LN3, moves to the first line LN1, and is stopped and displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the following configuration may be used. For example, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R move from the first line LN1 to the third line LN3, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R that reach the third line LN3 are gradually erased, and from the second line LN2. It may gradually appear, move to the first line LN1, and be stopped and displayed. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R move from the second line LN2 to the third line LN3, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R that reach the third line LN3 are gradually erased, and gradually from the first line LN1. It may appear, move to the second line LN2, and be stopped and displayed. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R move from the second line LN2 to the first line LN1, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R that reach the first line LN1 are gradually erased, and gradually from the third line LN3. It may appear, move to the second line LN2, and be stopped and displayed. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R move from the third line LN3 to the first line LN1, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R that reach the first line LN1 are gradually erased, and gradually from the second line LN2. It may appear, move to the third line LN3, and be stopped and displayed. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R move from the third line LN3 to the second line LN2, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R that reach the second line LN2 are gradually erased, and gradually from the first line LN1. It may appear, move to the third line LN3, and be stopped and displayed.

[Effect example]
In the decorative symbol irregular start / stop effect of the above embodiment, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed on the first line LN1, and then the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are directed from the first line LN1 to the second line LN2. A display effect that fluctuates in the same direction is performed, and then a display effect in which decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R appear from the third line LN3 is performed. According to this configuration, it is possible to add unexpectedness to the fluctuations of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the decorative symbol irregular start / stop effect of the above embodiment, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R appearing from the third line LN3 move toward the first line LN1. According to this configuration, decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R suddenly appear from the third line LN3 and move in the direction of the first line LN1 which is the fluctuation start position, so that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R vary widely. It is possible to give unexpected surprises, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the decorative symbol irregular start / stop effects B and C of the above embodiment, the first line LN1 is arranged at a position between the second line LN2 and the third line LN3. According to this configuration, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R fluctuate in the direction from the first line LN1 to the second line LN2, and then the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R appear from the third line LN3, and further. , When moving toward the first line LN1, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R fluctuate in a direction substantially perpendicular to each line LN, so that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R can be easily recognized by the player. It is possible to make it easier for the player to feel the unexpectedness of the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the decorative symbol irregular start / stop effects B and C of the above embodiment, the third line LN3 is arranged above the first line LN1, and the second line LN2 is arranged below the first line LN1. According to this configuration, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R fluctuate in the direction from the first line LN1 to the second line LN2, and then the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R appear from the third line LN3, and further. , When moving toward the first line LN1, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R fluctuate substantially linearly, so that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R can be easily recognized by the player. It is possible for the player to more easily feel the unexpectedness of the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the decorative symbol irregular start / stop effect of the above embodiment, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R fluctuate in the direction from the first line LN1 to the second line LN2, and then the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are second. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R that have reached the line LN2 and have reached the second line LN2 disappear from the portion that has reached the second line LN2. According to this configuration, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R disappear at the second line LN2 and appear from the third line LN3, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R can be expressed as if they were warped. It is possible to more strongly give the person the unexpectedness of the fluctuation of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect XA-1]
A gaming machine equipped with display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a third display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is a display effect in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed on the first line.
The second display effect is a display effect in which the decorative symbol fluctuates in a predetermined direction, which is a direction from the first line toward a second line different from the first line.
The third display effect is a display effect in which the decorative symbol appears from the first line and a third line different from the second line.
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, then the second display effect is performed, and then the third display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XA-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XA-1.
In the third display effect of the combination effect, the decorative symbol appearing from the third line fluctuates toward the first line.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XA-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XA-2.
The first line is arranged at a position between the second line and the third line.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XA-4]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XA-3.
The third line is arranged above the first line, and the second line is arranged below the first line.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XA-5]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XA-4.
In the second display effect of the combination effect, when the decorative symbol moving in the predetermined direction reaches the second line, it disappears from the reached portion.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

The scroll background effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 68 to 70. This scroll background effect can be executed during the variable effect of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the fluctuation start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the scroll background effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image display device. The image is displayed on the display screen 7a of 7.

[Scroll background effect A]
FIG. 68 is a diagram for explaining the scroll background effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 68 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, the left, middle, and right effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68B, the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbol stops in the reach mode. Here, both the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are stopped at the "9" symbol. At this time, the medium effect symbol 8C continues to fluctuate.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (C), the development effect is executed. The development production is a production that informs the development from the normal reach production to the SP reach production. Here, the message image MSG "development" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Further, the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R are reduced and moved to the upper left portion and the upper right portion of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (D), the background image display effect is executed. The background image display effect is an effect of displaying a dedicated background image on the display screen 7a. Here, the background image SG (shown with hatching) is displayed. The background image SG is displayed on the back side of the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R. That is, a part is covered with the "9" symbols, which are the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R displayed on the front side.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 68 (E) to 68 (K), the scroll display effect is executed. In the scroll display effect, the background image SG is scrolled downward as indicated by the arrow YG. At this time, the middle effect symbol 8C is displayed at a predetermined position of the scrolled background image SG. The displayed middle effect symbol 8C is scrolled and displayed together with the background image SG so as to stick to a predetermined position of the background image SG. Then, the middle effect symbol 8C is framed out from the lower part of the display screen 7a. In the background image SG, the middle effect symbol 8C is displayed in the order of "1" symbol → "2" symbol → "3" symbol → "4" symbol → ... As a result, the variable display of the medium effect symbol 8C accompanied by the scroll display of the background image SG is realized. The reach symbol "9" symbol is not affected by scrolling even when the background image SG is scrolled, and the position is not changed from a predetermined position on the display screen 7a.

In FIG. 68 (E), the “1” symbol, which is the middle effect symbol 8C, is displayed at the upper left position of the scrolled background image SG. The "1" symbol is displayed on the front side of the background image SG. As a result, a part of the background image SG is covered with the "1" symbol. Hereinafter, the same applies to other symbols.

In FIG. 68 (F), the “1” symbol is scrolled to the lower left of the display screen 7a together with the background image SG. Further, the "2" symbol, which is the middle effect symbol 8C, is displayed at the upper right position of the scrolled background image SG.

In FIG. 68 (G), the “2” symbol is scrolled to the lower right of the display screen 7a together with the background image SG. Further, the "3" symbol and the "4" symbol, which are the middle effect symbols 8C, are continuously displayed. The "3" symbol is displayed on the left side of the "2" symbol. Further, the "4" symbol is displayed at the upper center position.

In FIG. 68 (H), after the “2” symbol and the “3” symbol scrolled out together with the background image SG are framed out from the display screen 7a, the “4” symbol is framed out from below the display screen 7a. Shown.

In FIG. 68 (I), the character image CRA is displayed at the upper left position of the scrolled background image SG. The character image CRA is scrolled and displayed together with the background image SG so as to be attached to a predetermined position of the background image SG, similarly to the medium effect symbol 8C. The character image CRA is displayed on the front side of the background image SG and covers a part of the background image SG.

In FIG. 68 (J), the character image CRA is scrolled to the lower part of the display screen 7a together with the background image SG. Further, the "5" symbol and the "6" symbol, which are the middle effect symbols 8C, are continuously displayed. The "5" symbol is displayed so as to overlap the character image CRA at a substantially center position of the background image SG. The "5" symbol is displayed on the front side of the character image CRA and the background image SG, and covers a part of the character image CRA and the background image SG. The "6" symbol is displayed at the upper left position of the background image SG.

In FIG. 68 (K), the character image CRA, the “5” symbol, and the “6” symbol are scrolled to the lower part of the display screen 7a together with the background image SG. Here, the character image CRA and the “5” symbol are shown to be framed out from the lower part of the display screen 7a.

When the scroll display effect is completed, the middle symbol variation effect is then executed as shown in FIG. 68 (L). The medium symbol variation effect is an effect in which the medium effect symbol 8C moves at a relatively low speed. Here, the middle effect symbol 8C is moving downward as indicated by the arrow YG.

[Scroll background effect B]
FIG. 69 is a diagram for explaining the scroll background effect B.
First, as shown in FIG. 69A, the fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, the left, middle, and right effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69B, the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbol stops in the reach mode. Here, both the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are stopped at the "9" symbol. At this time, the medium effect symbol 8C continues to fluctuate.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69 (C), the development effect is executed. The development production is a production that informs the development from the normal reach production to the SP reach production. Here, the message image MSG "development" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Further, the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R are reduced and moved to the upper left portion and the upper right portion of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69 (D), the background image display effect is executed. The background image display effect is an effect of displaying a dedicated background image on the display screen 7a. Here, the background image SG (shown with hatching) is displayed. The background image SG is displayed on the back side of the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R. That is, a part is covered with the "9" symbols, which are the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R displayed on the front side.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 69 (E) to 69 (K), the scroll display effect is executed. In the scroll display effect, the background image SG is scrolled downward as indicated by the arrow YG. At this time, the middle effect symbol 8C is displayed at a predetermined position of the scrolled background image SG. The displayed middle effect symbol 8C is scrolled and displayed together with the background image SG so as to stick to a predetermined position of the background image SG. Then, the middle effect symbol 8C is framed out from the lower part of the display screen 7a. In the background image SG, the middle effect symbol 8C is displayed in the order of "1" symbol → "2" symbol → "3" symbol → "4" symbol → ... As a result, the variable display of the medium effect symbol 8C accompanied by the scroll display of the background image SG is realized. The reach symbol "9" symbol is not affected by scrolling even when the background image SG is scrolled, and the position is not changed from a predetermined position on the display screen 7a.

In FIG. 69 (E), the “1” symbol, which is the middle effect symbol 8C, is displayed at the upper left position of the scrolled background image SG. The "1" symbol is displayed on the front side of the background image SG. As a result, a part of the background image SG is covered with the "1" symbol. Hereinafter, the same applies to other symbols. Further, the "1" symbol is rotated with the vertical axis J1 as the rotation axis in the middle of the scroll display. As a result, it becomes easy to distinguish it from the background image SG, and the "1" symbol stands out.

In FIG. 69 (F), the “1” symbol is scrolled to the lower left of the display screen 7a together with the background image SG. Further, the "2" symbol, which is the middle effect symbol 8C, is framed in from above the display screen 7a in the scroll display. The "2" symbol is rotated with the vertical axis J2 as the rotation axis in the middle of the scroll display. As a result, it becomes easy to distinguish it from the background image SG, and the "2" symbol stands out.

In FIG. 69 (G), the “2” symbol is scrolled to the lower right of the display screen 7a together with the background image SG. Further, the "3" symbol and the "4" symbol, which are the middle effect symbols 8C, are continuously displayed. The "3" symbol is displayed on the left side of the "2" symbol. Further, the "4" symbol is framed in from above the display screen 7a. The "3" symbol and the "4" symbol are also rotated around the vertical axes J3 and J4 in the middle of the scroll display. As a result, it becomes easy to distinguish from the background image SG, and the "3" symbol and the "4" symbol stand out.

In FIG. 69 (H), after the “2” symbol and the “3” symbol scrolled out together with the background image SG are framed out from the display screen 7a, the “4” symbol is framed out from below the display screen 7a. Shown.

In FIG. 69 (I), the character image CRA is displayed at the upper left position of the scrolled background image SG. The character image CRA is scrolled and displayed together with the background image SG so as to be attached to a predetermined position of the background image SG, similarly to the medium effect symbol 8C. The character image CRA is displayed on the front side of the background image SG and covers a part of the background image SG.

In FIG. 69 (J), the character image CRA is scrolled to the lower part of the display screen 7a together with the background image SG. Further, the "5" symbol and the "6" symbol, which are the middle effect symbols 8C, are continuously displayed. The "5" symbol is displayed so as to overlap the character image CRA at a substantially center position of the background image SG. The "5" symbol is displayed on the front side of the character image CRA and the background image SG, and covers a part of the character image CRA and the background image SG. The "6" symbol is displayed at the upper left position of the background image SG. The "5" symbol and the "6" symbol are also rotated around the vertical axes J5 and J6 in the middle of the scroll display. As a result, it becomes easy to distinguish from the background image SG, and the "5" symbol and the "6" symbol stand out.

In FIG. 69 (K), the character image CRA, the “5” symbol, and the “6” symbol are scrolled to the lower part of the display screen 7a together with the background image SG. Here, the character image CRA and the “5” symbol are shown to be framed out from the lower part of the display screen 7a.

When the scroll display effect is completed, the middle symbol variation effect is then executed as shown in FIG. 69 (L). The medium symbol variation effect is an effect in which the medium effect symbol 8C moves at a relatively low speed. Here, the middle effect symbol 8C is moving downward as indicated by the arrow YG.

[Scroll background effect C]
FIG. 70 is a diagram for explaining the scroll background effect C.
First, as shown in FIG. 70 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, the left, middle, and right effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70B, the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbol stops in the reach mode. Here, both the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are stopped at the "9" symbol. At this time, the medium effect symbol 8C continues to fluctuate.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (C), the development effect is executed. The development production is a production that informs the development from the normal reach production to the SP reach production. Here, the message image MSG "development" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Further, the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R are reduced and moved to the upper left portion and the upper right portion of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (D), the background image display effect is executed. The background image display effect is an effect of displaying a dedicated background image on the display screen 7a. Here, the background image SG (shown with hatching) is displayed. The background image SG is displayed on the back side of the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R. That is, a part is covered with the "9" symbols, which are the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R displayed on the front side.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 70 (E) to 70 (J), the scroll display effect is executed. In the scroll display effect, the background image SG is scrolled downward as indicated by the arrow YG. At this time, the middle effect symbol 8C is displayed at a predetermined position of the scrolled background image SG. The displayed middle effect symbol 8C is scrolled and displayed together with the background image SG so as to stick to a predetermined position of the background image SG. Then, the middle effect symbol 8C is framed out from the lower part of the display screen 7a. In the background image SG, the middle effect symbol 8C is displayed in the order of "1" symbol → "2" symbol → "3" symbol → "4" symbol → ... As a result, the variable display of the medium effect symbol 8C accompanied by the scroll display of the background image SG is realized. The reach symbol "9" symbol is not affected by scrolling even when the background image SG is scrolled, and the position is not changed from a predetermined position on the display screen 7a.

In FIG. 70 (E), the “1” symbol, which is the middle effect symbol 8C, is displayed at the upper left position of the scrolled background image SG. The "1" symbol is displayed on the front side of the background image SG. As a result, a part of the background image SG is covered with the "1" symbol. Hereinafter, the same applies to other symbols.

In FIG. 70 (F), the "1" symbol is scrolled to the lower left of the display screen 7a together with the background image SG. Further, the "2" symbol, which is the middle effect symbol 8C, is displayed at the upper right position of the scrolled background image SG. The "2" symbol is displayed so as to overlap with the "9" symbol, which is the right effect symbol 8R, and is displayed on the back side of the "9" symbol. That is, the "9" symbol, which is the reach symbol, is displayed in the foreground. This makes it easier for the player to recognize the reach pattern. This display order is the same for other symbols in relation to the reach symbol.

In FIG. 70 (G), the “2” symbol is scrolled to the lower right of the display screen 7a together with the background image SG. Further, the "3" symbol and the "4" symbol, which are the middle effect symbols 8C, are continuously displayed. The "3" symbol is displayed on the left side of the "2" symbol. Further, the "4" symbol is displayed at the upper center position.

In FIG. 70 (H), after the “2” symbol and the “3” symbol scrolled out together with the background image SG are framed out from the display screen 7a, the “4” symbol is framed out from below the display screen 7a. Shown.

In FIG. 70 (I), the character image CRA is displayed at the upper left position of the scrolled background image SG. The character image CRA is displayed so as to overlap the "9" symbol, which is the left effect symbol 8L. Further, the "5" symbol, which is the middle effect symbol 8C, is displayed so as to overlap the character image SG and the "9" symbol. At this time, the reach symbol "9" symbol is displayed in the foreground, the "5" symbol is displayed on the back side of the "9" symbol, the character image CRA is displayed on the back side of the "5" symbol, and the character. The background image SG is displayed on the back side of the image CRA. As a result, the reach symbol is most easily recognized by the player, and then the "5" symbol, which is the middle effect symbol 8C, is easily recognized. This display order is the same for other symbols in relation to the reach symbol and the character image.

In FIG. 70 (J), the character image CRA and the “5” symbol are scrolled to the lower part of the display screen 7a together with the background image SG. In addition, the "6" symbol, which is the middle effect symbol 8C, is displayed. The "6" symbol is displayed at the upper left position of the background image SG.

In FIG. 70 (K), the scroll display effect ends, the background image SG changes the scroll direction, is scrolled to the left as indicated by the arrow YG, and is framed out from the left side of the display screen 7a. By changing the scroll direction of the background image SG and frame-out, the end of the scroll display effect can be easily understood, and the player can be surprised. At this time, the middle effect symbol 8C fluctuates at high speed in the vertical direction at the center of the reach symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (L), the middle symbol variation effect is executed. The medium symbol variation effect is an effect in which the medium effect symbol 8C moves at a relatively low speed. Here, the middle effect symbol 8C is moving downward as indicated by the arrow YG.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the scroll background effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the variable display of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the background image SG displayed on the back side of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is scrolled and displayed in a scrolled background image SG. A scroll variation effect for displaying the effect symbol 8C at a specific position is executed (FIGS. 68 (E) to (K), FIGS. 69 (E) to (K), and FIGS. 70 (E) to (J)). According to this configuration, the variable display of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R becomes a novel effect, and the fun of the game can be improved. The background image SG corresponds to the "background image", the predetermined position where the middle effect symbol 8C is displayed corresponds to the "specific position", and the scroll background effect corresponds to the "scroll variation effect".

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the medium effect symbol 8C displayed at a predetermined position of the background image SG is scrolled and displayed together with the background image SG (FIGS. 68 (E) to (K), FIGS. 69 (E) to 69 (E). (K), FIGS. 70 (E) to (J). According to this configuration, the movement of the medium production symbol 8C becomes novel, and the fun of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the medium effect symbol 8C is scrolled together with the background image SG and framed out from the display screen 7a (FIGS. 68 (H) (K), 69 (H) (K), FIG. 70 (H)). According to this configuration, the disappearing mode of the middle effect symbol 8C becomes novel, and the fun of the game can be improved.

When the middle effect symbol 8C is displayed at a predetermined position of the background image SG, it may be displayed in the display screen 7a (FIGS. 68 (E) to (G) (J), FIGS. 69 (E) (G). ) (J), FIGS. 70 (E) to (G) (I) (J)), the frame may be framed in from the outside of the display screen 7a (FIGS. 69 (F) (G)).

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a reach forming effect (FIGS. 68 (B), 69 (B), 70) in which a part of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R stops in a predetermined mode to form a reach symbol. After (B)), it is executed for the medium effect symbol 8C other than the reach symbol. According to this configuration, the variable display of the medium-sized production symbol 8C, which is directly connected to the jackpot, becomes novel, and the interest of the game can be improved. The "9" symbols, which are the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R, correspond to the "reach symbol", and the middle effect symbol 8C corresponds to the "final stop symbol".

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the reach symbol "9" symbol is displayed on the front side of the background image SG, covers a part of the background image SG, and is displayed even if the background image SG is scrolled. The position is not changed from the predetermined position on the screen 7a (FIGS. 68 (E) to (K), FIGS. 69 (E) to (K), and FIGS. 70 (E) to (J)). According to this configuration, it becomes easy to recognize the reach pattern, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the medium effect symbol 8C is displayed on the front side of the background image SG and on the back side of the reach symbol “9” symbol (FIG. 70 (F)). (I)). According to this configuration, in relation to the medium effect symbol 8C, the reach symbol can be easily recognized, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the middle effect symbol 8C is displayed at a specific position of the background image SG by rotating it around the vertical axis of the middle effect symbol 8C (FIGS. 69 (E) to (H). ) (J) (K)). According to this configuration, the medium effect symbol 8C that is scrolled and displayed together with the background image SG stands out, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification example]
A modified example of the scroll background effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, the middle effect symbol 8C is scrolled and displayed together with the background image SG, and is framed out from the display screen 7a. On the other hand, the effect of erasing the middle effect symbol 8C (symbol erasure effect) may be performed in the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, the directing symbol 8C stands out while disappearing, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, the background image SG is scrolled downward. In this respect, the scroll direction of the background image SG is not particularly limited. For example, it may be configured to scroll in the upward direction, the left direction, the right direction, or the diagonal direction. Further, the scroll direction may be changed during the scroll display effect.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, the character image CRA is displayed on the display screen 7a, and then scrolled and displayed together with the background image SG. On the other hand, the character image CRA may be scroll-displayed together with the background image SG from the outside of the display screen 7a and framed in the display screen 7a.

[Modification example 4]
In the above embodiment, after the reach formation effect, the middle effect symbol 8C, which is the final stop symbol other than the reach symbol, is scrolled and displayed together with the background image SG. On the other hand, at least one of the left effect symbol 8L, the right effect symbol 8R, and the middle effect symbol 8C may be scrolled and displayed together with the background image SG before the reach formation effect. For example, after the left effect symbol 8L is stopped, the right effect symbol 8R is scrolled and displayed together with the background image SG to perform a reach fanning effect.

[Modification 5]
In the above embodiment, when the middle effect symbol 8C is rotated and displayed, the vertical axis of the middle effect symbol 8C is rotated as a rotation axis. On the other hand, the axis for rotating the middle effect symbol 8C may be any axis. For example, it may be a left-right axis or an oblique axis. Further, the axes J1 to J6 for rotating the middle effect symbol 8C were at an angle with each other. On the other hand, the axes for rotating the middle effect symbol 8C may be in the same direction as each other. Furthermore, the timing of rotating the middle effect symbol 8C is not particularly limited. In the scroll display, it may be rotated continuously, intermittently, or only once at the first display.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect B2-1]
It ’s a pachinko machine,
In the variable display of the effect symbol, it is possible to perform a scroll variable effect in which the background image displayed on the back side of the effect symbol is scrolled and the effect symbol is displayed at a specific position of the scrolled background image. ,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-1.
In the scroll variation effect, the effect symbol displayed at the specific position of the background image is scrolled and displayed together with the background image.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-2.
In the scroll variation effect, the effect symbol is scrolled and displayed together with the background image and framed out from the display screen.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B2-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B2-1 to B2-3.
The scroll variation effect is executed for the final stop symbol other than the reach symbol after the reach formation effect in which a part of the effect symbol stops in a predetermined mode to form a reach symbol.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B2-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-4.
In the scroll variation effect, the reach symbol is displayed on the front side of the background image, covers a part of the background image, and even if the background image is scrolled, the position is changed from a predetermined position on the display screen. No,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B2-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-4 or aspect B2-5.
In the scroll variation effect, the final stop symbol is displayed on the front side of the background image and on the back side of the reach symbol.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B2-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B2-1 to B2-6.
In the scroll variation effect, the effect symbol is displayed at the specific position of the background image by being rotated around an axis in the vertical direction of the effect symbol.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B2-8]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B2-1 to B2-7.
In the scroll variation effect, the effect symbol is scrolled and displayed together with the background image and framed in from the outside of the display screen.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B2-9]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B2-4 to B2-8.
In the scroll variation effect, a special image displayed on the front side of the background image and on the back side of the effect symbol can be displayed, and the special image is scrolled and displayed together with the background image.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B2-10]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-9.
The special image is displayed on the back side of the reach symbol.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

The image superimposition button effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 71 to 73. The image superimposition button effects A to C are executed during a special symbol variation effect or the like. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the image superimposition button effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed by the image display device 7. The image is displayed on the screen 7a.

[Image superimposition button effect A]
FIG. 71 is a diagram for explaining the image superimposition button effect A. The image superimposition button effect A is an effect performed during one change of the special symbol. In the image superimposition button effect A, as shown in FIG. 71 (A), first, a character image display effect is performed. This character image display effect is performed during the reach state, and three action images XB1 are displayed. Each action image XB1 is composed of a character image XB11 and a chance-up image XB12, respectively. Each action image XB1 has the same contour shape. The character image XB11 is composed of the yellow "E" character. The chance-up image XB12 is composed of the characters "chance" in a square frame, which suggests a feeling of expectation for a big hit. Each action image XB1 moves around the display screen 7a so as not to come into contact with each other. Further, in this character image display effect, in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are formed by the same number symbol "7", and the intermediate decorative symbol 8C fluctuates at high speed to change the reach state. It is expressed. Further, in this character image display effect, the character CRA moves around on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (B), the button display effect 1 is performed. In this button display effect 1, three action images XB1 are superimposed to form one action image XB1, and the button image XB2 is displayed on the right side of the action image XB1. The button image XB2 is an image representing the effect button 63, and is an image that urges the player to operate the effect button 63. Inside the button image XB2, the characters "continuous hits!" Are displayed, prompting the player to repeatedly hit the effect button 63. In this button display effect 1, the display of the reach state is continued by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the effect of the character CRA moving around on the display screen 7a is continuously performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (C), the effect effect 1 is performed. This effect effect 1 is an effect performed by the player repeatedly hitting the effect button 63. Specifically, the action image XB1 and the button image XB2 are continuously displayed, and the effect image XB3 is displayed. .. This effect image XB3 is a blue effect, is arranged so as to cover the periphery of the action image XB1, and changes the shape of the outer peripheral portion of the effect image XB3 (the area (area) of the effect image XB3). In the figure, the effect image XB3 is shown by hatching. At this time, the action image XB1 changes from yellow to the same blue color as the effect image XB3 by the player repeatedly hitting the effect button 63. This makes it possible to suggest that the player is expected to win a big hit. In this effect effect 1, the display of the reach state is continued by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the effect of the character CRA moving around on the display screen 7a is continuously performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (D), the effect effect 2 is performed. This effect effect 2 is an effect performed by the player repeatedly hitting the effect button 63. Specifically, the action image XB1, the button image XB2, and the effect image XB3 are continuously displayed, and the player Responds to repeatedly hitting the effect button 63, the colors of the action image XB1 and the effect image XB3 change from blue to green, respectively. This makes it possible to suggest that the player is expected to win a big hit. In this effect effect 2, the display of the reach state is continued by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the effect of the character CRA moving around on the display screen 7a is continuously performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (E), the effect effect 3 is performed. This effect effect 3 is an effect performed by the player repeatedly hitting the effect button 63. Specifically, the action image XB1, the button image XB2, and the effect image XB3 are continuously displayed, and the player Responds to repeatedly hitting the effect button 63, the colors of the action image XB1 and the effect image XB3 change from green to red, respectively. This makes it possible to suggest that the player is expected to win a big hit. In this effect effect 2, the display of the reach state is continued by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the effect of the character CRA moving around on the display screen 7a is continuously performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (F), a development suggestion effect is performed. In this development suggestion effect, a character CRB different from the character CRA appears, and the development suggestion image XB4 is displayed. The development suggestion image XB4 is an image suggesting the development to the super reach production, and the characters "Development!" Are displayed. The display of the reach state is continued by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (G), a jackpot symbol display effect is performed. In this jackpot symbol display effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed in doublets (7 symbols) to notify the jackpot. The display of the character CRB is continued.

[Image superimposition button effect B]
FIG. 72 is a diagram for explaining the image superimposition button effect B. The image superimposition button effect B is an effect performed during one change of the special symbol. In the image superimposition button effect B, as shown in FIG. 72 (A), first, a character image display effect is performed. This character image display effect is performed during the reach state, and three action images XB1 are displayed. Each action image XB1 is composed of a character image XB11 and a chance-up image XB12, respectively. Each action image XB1 has the same contour shape. The character image XB11 is composed of the yellow "E" character. The chance-up image XB12 is composed of the characters "chance" in a square frame, which suggests a feeling of expectation for a big hit. Each action image XB1 moves around the display screen 7a so as not to come into contact with each other. Further, in this character image display effect, in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are formed by the same number symbol "7", and the intermediate decorative symbol 8C fluctuates at high speed to change the reach state. It is expressed. Further, in this character image display effect, the character CRA moves around on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (B), the button display effect 1 is performed. In this button display effect 1, three action images XB1 are superimposed to form one action image XB1, and the button image XB2 is displayed on the action image XB1 (character image XB11 and chance-up image XB12). The button image XB2 is an image representing the effect button 63, and is an image that urges the player to operate the effect button 63. Inside the button image XB2, the characters "continuous hits!" Are displayed, prompting the player to repeatedly hit the effect button 63. In this button display effect 1, the display of the reach state is continued by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the effect of the character CRA moving around on the display screen 7a is continuously performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (C), the effect effect 1 is performed. This effect effect 1 is an effect performed by the player repeatedly hitting the effect button 63. Specifically, the action image XB1 and the button image XB2 are continuously displayed, and the effect image XB3 is displayed. .. This effect image XB3 is a blue effect, is arranged so as to cover the periphery of the action image XB1, and changes the shape of the outer peripheral portion of the effect image XB3 (the area (area) of the effect image XB3). In the figure, the effect image XB3 is shown by hatching. At this time, the action image XB1 changes from yellow to the same blue color as the effect image XB3 by the player repeatedly hitting the effect button 63. This makes it possible to suggest that the player is expected to win a big hit. In this effect effect 1, the display of the reach state is continued by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the effect of the character CRA moving around on the display screen 7a is continuously performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (D), the effect effect 2 is performed. This effect effect 2 is an effect performed by the player repeatedly hitting the effect button 63. Specifically, the action image XB1, the button image XB2, and the effect image XB3 are continuously displayed, and the player Responds to repeatedly hitting the effect button 63, the colors of the action image XB1 and the effect image XB3 change from blue to green, respectively. This makes it possible to suggest that the player is expected to win a big hit. In this effect effect 2, the display of the reach state is continued by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the effect of the character CRA moving around on the display screen 7a is continuously performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (E), the effect effect 3 is performed. This effect effect 3 is an effect performed by the player repeatedly hitting the effect button 63. Specifically, the action image XB1, the button image XB2, and the effect image XB3 are continuously displayed, and the player Responds to repeatedly hitting the effect button 63, the colors of the action image XB1 and the effect image XB3 change from green to red, respectively. This makes it possible to suggest that the player is expected to win a big hit. In this effect effect 2, the display of the reach state is continued by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the effect of the character CRA moving around on the display screen 7a is continuously performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (F), a development suggestion effect is performed. In this development suggestion effect, a character CRB different from the character CRA appears, and the development suggestion image XB4 is displayed. The development suggestion image XB4 is an image suggesting the development to the super reach production, and the characters "Development!" Are displayed. The display of the reach state is continued by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (G), a jackpot symbol display effect is performed. In this jackpot symbol display effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed in doublets (7 symbols) to notify the jackpot. The display of the character CRB is continued.

[Image superimposition button effect C]
FIG. 73 is a diagram for explaining the image superimposition button effect C. The image superimposition button effect C is an effect performed during one change of the special symbol. In the image superimposition button effect C, as shown in FIG. 73 (A), first, a character image display effect is performed. This character image display effect is performed during the reach state, and three action images XB1 are displayed. Each action image XB1 is composed of a character image XB11 and a chance-up image XB12, respectively. Each action image XB1 has the same contour shape. The character image XB11 is composed of the yellow "E" character. The chance-up image XB12 is composed of the characters "chance" in a square frame, which suggests a feeling of expectation for a big hit. Each action image XB1 moves around the display screen 7a so as not to come into contact with each other. Further, in this character image display effect, in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are formed by the same number symbol "7", and the intermediate decorative symbol 8C fluctuates at high speed to change the reach state. It is expressed. Further, in this character image display effect, the character CRA moves around on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (B), the button display effect 1 is performed. In this button display effect 1, three action images XB1 are superimposed to form one action image XB1, and the button image XB2 is displayed on the action image XB1 (character image XB11 and chance-up image XB12). The button image XB2 is an image representing the effect button 63, and is an image that urges the player to operate the effect button 63. Inside the button image XB2, the characters "continuous hits!" Are displayed, prompting the player to repeatedly hit the effect button 63. In this button display effect 1, the display of the reach state is continued by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the effect of the character CRA moving around on the display screen 7a is continuously performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (C), the effect effect 1 is performed. This effect effect 1 is an effect performed by the player repeatedly hitting the effect button 63. Specifically, the action image XB1 and the button image XB2 are continuously displayed, and the effect image XB3 is displayed. .. This effect image XB3 is a blue effect, is arranged so as to cover the periphery of the action image XB1, and changes the shape of the outer peripheral portion of the effect image XB3 (the area (area) of the effect image XB3). In the figure, the effect image XB3 is shown by hatching. At this time, the action image XB1 changes from yellow to the same blue color as the effect image XB3 by the player repeatedly hitting the effect button 63. This makes it possible to suggest that the player is expected to win a big hit. In this effect effect 1, the display of the reach state is continued by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the effect of the character CRA moving around on the display screen 7a is continuously performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (D), the effect effect 2 is performed. This effect effect 2 is an effect performed by the player repeatedly hitting the effect button 63. Specifically, the action image XB1, the button image XB2, and the effect image XB3 are continuously displayed, and the player Responds to repeatedly hitting the effect button 63, the colors of the action image XB1 and the effect image XB3 change from blue to green, respectively. This makes it possible to suggest that the player is expected to win a big hit. In this effect effect 2, the display of the reach state is continued by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the effect of the character CRA moving around on the display screen 7a is continuously performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (E), the effect effect 3 is performed. This effect effect 3 is an effect performed by the player repeatedly hitting the effect button 63. Specifically, the action image XB1, the button image XB2, and the effect image XB3 are continuously displayed, and the player Responds to repeatedly hitting the effect button 63, the colors of the action image XB1 and the effect image XB3 change from green to red, respectively. This makes it possible to suggest that the player is expected to win a big hit. In this effect effect 2, the display of the reach state is continued by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the effect of the character CRA moving around on the display screen 7a is continuously performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (F), a development suggestion effect is performed. In this development suggestion effect, a character CRB different from the character CRA appears, and the development suggestion image XB4 is displayed. The development suggestion image XB4 is an image suggesting the development to the super reach production, and the characters "Development!" Are displayed. The display of the reach state is continued by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (G), the button display effect 2 is performed. This button display effect 2 is an effect in which the button image XB2A and the heart-shaped image XB5 are displayed. The button image XB2A is an image representing the effect button 63, and is an image that urges the player to operate the effect button 63. Inside the button image XB2A, the characters "press!" Are displayed, prompting the player to press the effect button 63 once. The heart-shaped image XB5 is a heart-shaped icon image. The button image XB2A and the heart-shaped image XB5 are arranged so as to overlap each other, and the button image XB2A is arranged closer to the heart-shaped image XB5. The display of the character CRB is continued, and the display of the reach state is continued by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (H), a jackpot symbol display effect is performed. This jackpot symbol display effect is an effect performed by the player pressing the effect button 63 once. Specifically, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed in doublets (7 doublets). , It is a production that notifies the jackpot. The display of the character CRB is continued.

In the image superimposition button effect C, the more the player repeatedly hits the effect button 63, the more the colors of the action image XB1 and the effect image XB3 change, that is, the more the effect effect progresses, the higher the expectation of a big hit is. ing. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot expectation may be lowered as the colors of the action image XB1 and the effect image XB3 change, that is, as the effect effect progresses.

Further, in the image superimposition button effect C, the button image XB2 and the button image XB2A have the same shape as the button, but the button is not limited to this, and the buttons may have different shapes.

[Modification example]
In the image superimposition button effect of the above embodiment, the shape of the outer peripheral portion of the effect image XB3 (the area (area) of the effect image XB3) is changed in the effect effects 1 to 3, but the effect image is not limited to this. The shape of the outer peripheral portion of the XB3 (the area (area) of the effect image XB3) may be fixed without being changed.

In the image superimposition button effect of the above embodiment, the action image XB1 including the character image XB11 and the button image XB2 are displayed, and then the player operates the effect button 63 to change the color of the action image XB1 from yellow. , Blue, green, and red, but not limited to this, for example, the player operates the effect button 63 to change another aspect (for example, shape, pattern) of the action image XB1. You may do it.
Further, in the image superimposition button effect of the above embodiment, the action image XB1 including the character image XB11 and the button image XB2 are displayed, and then, the more the player operates the effect button 63, the more the button image XB2 is displayed. The mode (for example, color, shape, pattern) may be changed stepwise as in the action image XB1 or the effect image XB3 of the effect effects 1 to 3.

In the image superimposition button effect of the above embodiment, the change in the display mode (color) of the action image XB1 and the change in the display mode (color) of the effect image XB3 are the same, but the change is not limited to this. The change in the display mode and the change in the display mode of the effect image XB3 may be different. For example, when the color of the action image XB1 changes from yellow to red, the color of the effect image XB3 may change from blue to purple.

In the image superimposition button effect of the above embodiment, the character image display effect, the button display effect 1, 2, the effect effect 1-3, and the development suggestion effect are performed during the reach state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be performed while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are changing other than the reach state, or while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed (for example, waiting for a customer (during the demo screen)). ..

In the image superimposition button effects B and C of the above embodiment, after the three action images XB1 are superposed, the button image XB2 is arranged on the action image XB1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, three actions. A button image XB2 may be arranged in advance on the image XB1, and in that state, a superimposition effect may be performed to form one image in which the button image XB2 is arranged on the action image XB1.

In the image superimposition button effect C of the above embodiment, the characters (characters included) described inside are different between the button image XB2 and the button image XB2A, but the same configuration may be used. For example, the button image XB2 and the button image XB2A may each include the characters "repeated hits!" Or may contain the characters "press!", Respectively.

[Effect example]
In the image superimposition button effect of the above embodiment, the action image XB1 including the character image XB11 and the button image XB2 are displayed, and then the player operates the effect button 63 to display the action image XB1. Color) is changed from yellow to blue, green, and red. According to this configuration, the player operates the effect button 63 by displaying the character image XB11 and the button image XB2, and the display mode of the action image XB1 is changed stepwise by the operation. , It is possible to give the player a feeling of participating in the game and a feeling of expectation for a big hit. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the image superimposition button effect of the above embodiment, when the player operates the effect button 63 to change the display mode (color) of the action image XB1 from yellow to blue, green, and red, the effect button 63 The effect image XB3 is displayed according to the operation of, and the display mode of the effect image XB3 is also changed to blue, green, and red. According to this configuration, the player operates the button 63, the display mode of the action image XB1 changes stepwise, and the effect image XB3 also changes stepwise, so that a larger player can participate in the game. It is possible to give a feeling of expectation for a larger jackpot while giving a feeling of doing. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the image superimposition button effect of the above embodiment, the action image XB1 whose display mode is changed by the player operating the effect button 63 includes the character image XB11. According to this configuration, the player can change the color of the characters by his / her own operation, and can give the player the feeling of participating in the game. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the image superimposition button effect of the above embodiment, when the player changes the action image XB1 by operating the effect button 63, the effect image XB3 is used as an image to be changed together. According to this configuration, the game When the person is changing the action image by his / her own operation, the effect image XB3 can be changed at the same time, and the player can give the feeling of participating in the game. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect XB-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects and an operation means that can be operated by a player.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a third display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is a display effect for displaying the first image.
The second display effect is a display effect for displaying an operation means image representing the operation means.
The third display effect is a display effect that changes the display mode of the first image from the first mode to the second mode by operating the operating means.
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the first display effect and the second display effect are performed, and then the third display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XB-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XB-1.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a fourth display effect may be performed.
The fourth display effect displays a second image different from the first image, and by operating the operating means, the display mode of the second image is changed from the third aspect to the fourth aspect. It is a display effect that changes
The combination effect may include the fourth display effect, and may include the fourth display effect.
In the combination effect, when the third display effect is performed, the fourth display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XB-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XB-2.
In the combination effect, in the third display effect, the display mode of the first image is changed to the second mode, and then further changed to the fifth mode by the operation of the operation means.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XB-4]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XB-3.
The first image is a character image.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XB-5]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XB-4.
The second image is an effect image.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

The character selection effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 74 to 76. In FIGS. 74 to 76, various movable accessories and various decorative members arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted from the viewpoint of easy viewing of the drawings. 74 is a diagram for explaining the character selection effect A, FIG. 75 is a diagram for explaining the character selection effect B, and FIG. 76 is a diagram for explaining the character selection effect C.

In this character selection effect, the player presses the effect button 63 provided on the front frame 53 and presses the select button 68 having up, down, left, and right pressing buttons (upper pressing operation of the upper pressing button, right pressing of the right pressing button). You can select your favorite character (a specific character preferred by the player) from multiple characters by operating, lower pressing operation of the lower pressing button, left pressing operation of the left pressing button), or randomly on the game machine 1 side. It is an effect that allows you to select a character. When the player selects a character in the character selection effect, a special effect of changing the mode of the variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbol can be executed thereafter. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub control board 90, and when an instruction to execute a character selection effect is included, the image control microcomputer 101 reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image display device 7. The image is displayed on the display screen 7a of.

Here, first, the effect symbol will be briefly described, and the character selection effect A, the character selection effect B, and the character selection effect C will be described in order.

[Direction design]
On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, for example, as shown in FIG. 74 (A), the left effect symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle effect symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right effect symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a. In each fluctuation area extending from the upper side to the lower side of, each effect symbol is number "1"-> number "2"-> number "3"-> number "4"-> number "5"-> number "6"-> number The variation effect (variation display) of the effect symbol is started in the display mode in which the reel is rotated in the order of "7"-> number "8"-> number "9"-> number "1"-> number "2"-> ... NS.

Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are card-type effect symbols as normal effect symbols, and the number symbols (numbers "1" to "9") are included in the card. ”), The symbol of the character corresponding to the symbol of the number is attached. The number "7" has a bright red color. The odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" except the number "7" all have the same bright green color. The even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" all have the same bright blue color. Each of the number symbols (odd number symbol and even number symbol) is composed of various character symbols having a plurality of colors (full color), and the character symbol is displayed in a large size as the main body of the effect symbol. NS. Therefore, the size of the number symbol is smaller than the size of the character symbol attached to the number symbol. The normal effect symbol is not a variable effect (variable display) in the special effect described later, but a variable effect (variable display) in the normal effect. In this way, since the numerical symbols (odd-numbered symbols and even-numbered symbols) each have a color, for example, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are aligned with the same number symbol and temporarily stopped. When the reach is formed and the effect is developed after that, the player develops the color of the number symbol temporarily stopped as the number of experiences of the effect developed via the reach increases. It is possible to get an opportunity to discover the relationship (law) between the production and the player. As a result, the numerical symbols (odd-numbered symbols and even-numbered symbols) each have a color, which can contribute to the improvement of the interest.

Specifically, the number "1" is given a character A, the number "2" is given a character B, the number "3" is given a character C, and the number "4" is given a character D. The number "5" is attached with the character E, the number "6" is attached with the character F, and the number "7" is attached with the character A (a display mode different from the character A attached to the number "1". The number "8" is attached with a character C (the display mode is different from that of the character C attached to the number "3"), and the number "9" is a character. G is attached. In this way, although the character A is attached to the numbers "1" and the number "2" and overlaps, and the character C is attached to the numbers "3" and the number "8" respectively and overlaps, the character's design The display mode of is different.

As described above, the normal effect symbol is a card type effect symbol, but if a special effect different from the normal effect is started after the character selection effect is performed, a special effect different from the normal effect symbol is started. Switch from the normal production design to the design. This special effect symbol is expanded to the extent that the card figures and character symbols that make up the normal effect symbol disappear and the size of the number symbol becomes the size of the character symbol, and only the number symbol is included. However, it is smaller than the size of the card figure (one to two times smaller than the size of the card figure). In other words, the special effect symbol is different from the card type effect symbol, which is a normal effect symbol, and is a single effect symbol of a number. The color of the number symbol in this special effect symbol inherits the color of the number symbol in the normal effect symbol as it is. Therefore, even in the special effect symbol, it has the same color as the normal effect symbol, the number "7" has a bright red color, and the odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "5" excluding the number "7". "9" all have the same bright green color, and even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" all have the same bright blue color.

Fluctuation of effect symbol When the effect (variation display) is started, the stopped-displayed effect symbol once moves slowly (at low speed) in a display mode in which it floats upward by a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 mm) (at a low speed). In other words, since the stop display of the effect symbol is canceled, the effect symbol is set to the display mode in which it is about to move), and then gradually increases from low speed to the lower side and becomes translucent from an opaque state. The display mode changes to a state and fluctuates at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the effect symbol can be visually recognized via the semi-transparent effect symbol during high-speed fluctuation. Immediately before stopping, the effect symbol decelerates and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state where the temporary stop is displayed, the effect symbol has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

To briefly explain the variable icon and the hold icon, for example, as shown in FIGS. 74 (A) and 74 (B), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect that are currently changing as the digestion of the first special figure hold are shown. The variable icon 9C corresponding to the symbol 8R is displayed (placed) at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a first hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold. In this first hold display area, hold icons 9A can be displayed (placed) at each of the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four hold icons 9A are stocked. You can do it. The four hold display positions 9Ad are the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The display positions 9Ad are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a.

Although the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad both have a rectangular shape, they may have the same size or different sizes. In the present embodiment, the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad both have a rectangular shape, and the size of the variable display position 9Cd (horizontal distance dimension) is the size of the hold display position 9Ad (horizontal distance). It is larger than the dimension (dimensions) (the distance dimensions in the vertical direction are the same). This is to make it possible to distinguish between the variable icon 9C displayed at the variable display position 9Cd and the hold icon 9A displayed at the hold display position 9Ad.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbol. In addition to the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21, the first based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20. The special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown). The number of 1st special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 1st start port 20 is on the left side in blue numbers, and the number of 2nd special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 2nd start port 21 is red. The numbers are arranged on the upper right side of the display screen 7a in a state of being separated from each other on the right side and are always displayed. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values of the number of reserved balls, they can be easily discriminated by being mixed with various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. It should be noted that these numbers are always arranged and displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, and further, they are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a and other images are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a. Since it is arranged and displayed at the rear, the visibility is not hindered by other images.

The background image (referred to as "special background image") used in the special effect is a special image that is not usually included in the background image. The normal background image is, for example, a normal image such as a city image, a forest image, a sea image, a seabed image, or an underground image. The special background image is a special image such as a space image, a spacecraft inside image, a base image, and a game hall image. The normal background image and the special background image may be a still image or a moving image.

[Character selection effect A]
Next, the character selection effect A will be described with reference to FIG. 74. As shown in FIG. 74 (A), the city image HG1 is displayed as a normal background image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the variation effect (variation display) of the effect symbol is completed, and the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect. The symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R are stopped and displayed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all card-type effect symbols as normal effect symbols, and the number symbols (numbers "1" to "9") are included in the card. ), The symbol of the character corresponding to the symbol of the number is attached. The character symbol 8Lb is attached to the symbol 8La of the number "2" in which the left effect symbol 8L has a bright blue color, and the character symbol 8Lb is stopped and displayed. The character symbol 8Rb is attached to the symbol 8Ra of the number "6" whose right effect symbol 8R has a bright blue color, and the character symbol 8Rb is attached to the stop display. It has disappeared from 7a.

Here, the hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad to the third hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon is not displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad. That is, the hold icon 9A is not digested and there are only three stocked icons. In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21.

Subsequently, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the change display position 9Cd and becomes the change icon 9C, as shown in FIG. 74 (B), the change effect (variation display) of the effect symbol is obtained. ) Is started. When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad. Then, the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A is not digested and there are only two stocked icons. ..

After that, the character selection effect A is started in a state where the variable effect (variable display) of the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R is continued. When the character selection effect A is started, as shown in FIGS. 74 (C) and 74 (D), the left effect symbol 8L which is a normal effect symbol, the middle effect symbol 8C which is a normal effect symbol, and the right which is a normal effect symbol. The effect symbol 8R is hidden on the display screen 7a (disappears from the display screen 7a), and the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, all the hold icons 9A, the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad are displayed. It is hidden on the display screen 7a (disappears from the display screen 7a), and the character selection image CSG is displayed on the entire display screen 7a. Along with this, the city image HG1 which is a normal background image is hidden on the display screen 7a (disappears from the display screen 7a). Even in the state where the character selection image CSG is displayed on the display screen 7a, the number of the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 with the number of the above-mentioned reserved balls as a numerical value. Is displayed on the left side with blue numbers, and the number of second special figure reservations based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is arranged and displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a with red numbers separated from each other on the right side. ing.

The character selection image CSG is divided into eight regions (plurality of regions) that radiate from the center of the display screen 7a to the outside to form eight selection images. For these eight selection images, seven selection images for selecting each of the seven characters A to G, and one of the characters A to G are randomly selected on the game machine 1 side. There is one option image. The seven characters, characters A to G, are the same as the character symbols (characters A to G) that are touched by the numerical symbols that make up the above-mentioned normal effect symbols.

Of the eight option images, clockwise from the upper option image, "Character A" is an option image for selecting character A, "Character B" is an option image for selecting character B, and character C. "Character C" which is an option image for selecting, "Character D" which is an option image for selecting character D, and "Character D" which is an option image for randomly selecting one character on the game machine 1 side. "Random", "Character E" which is an option image for selecting character E, "Character F" which is an option image for selecting character F, and "Character G" which is an option image for selecting character G. Are allocated and arranged.

As a result, one character is randomly selected on the game machine 1 side for the lower option image which is opposite to the "character A" which is the option image for selecting the character A to be arranged in the upper option image. "Random", which is an option image for the purpose, is arranged, and "Character A" and "Random" are arranged on the same vertical. "Character B", which is an option image for selecting character B, and "Character E", which is an option image for selecting character E, are placed on the option image on the opposite side to "Character B" and "Character E". Are arranged on the same straight line rising to the right. "Character C", which is an option image for selecting character C, and "Character F", which is an option image for selecting character F, are placed on the option image on the opposite side to "Character C" and "Character F". Are placed on the same horizontal line. "Character D", which is an option image for selecting character D, and "Character G", which is an option image for selecting character G, are placed on the option image on the opposite side to "Character D" and "Character G". Are arranged on the same downward-sloping straight line.

An operation of selecting and determining a character will be described on the front side of this option image so that it fits within the "character D" which is the lower right side of the display screen 7a and is an option image for selecting the character D. The operation guide area BS1 for the purpose is provided as a horizontally long rectangular shape. In the operation guidance area BS1, an effect button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is arranged on the left side thereof, and a select button image SG imitating the select button 68 having up, down, left and right pressing buttons is arranged on the right side thereof. There is. Both the effect button image BG and the select button 68 are displayed in a blinking manner.

When the character selection image CSG is displayed, the selection image corresponding to the currently selected character (in other words, the previously selected character) blinks (see FIG. 74 (C)). Here, since the currently selected character is character A, "character A" is blinking. In this state, each time the right pressing button of the select button 68 is pressed, "Character A" blinks "Character B", "Character C" blinks, "Character D" blinks, and "Random". , "Character E", "Character F", "Character G", "Character A", "Character B", and so on. Then, only the selected option image blinks. Each time the left push button of the select button 68 is pressed, the option image is repeatedly selected counterclockwise, and only the selected option image blinks. Each time the upper push button or the lower push button of the select button 68 is pressed, the option image on the opposite side to the currently blinking option image is selected, and only the selected option image blinks. When the player presses the select button 68 to select the player's favorite character and presses the effect button 63, the selected character is determined. When the player presses the select button 68 to select random and presses the effect button 63, the randomness is determined.

It should be noted that the pressing operation of the select button 68 and the pressing operation of the effect button 63 are treated as valid until the character selection determination time (15 seconds in the present embodiment) elapses after the character selection image CSG is displayed. It has become like. If there is no pressing operation of the select button 68 and pressing operation of the effect button 63 before the character selection determination time (15 seconds in the present embodiment) elapses after the character selection image CSG is displayed, the character selection determination time After that, it is considered that the character selected image CSG that blinks when the character selection image CSG is displayed and the corresponding character are selected again and determined (the option image that blinks when the character selection image CSG is displayed is ". If it is "random", it is considered that "random" is selected and determined again).

Further, when the character selection determination time (15 seconds in the present embodiment) elapses after the character selection image CSG is displayed, the select button 68 is pressed, but the effect button 63 is not pressed. When the character selection determination time elapses, it is considered that the character selected and determined by the pressing operation of the select button 68 and the corresponding character are selected and determined (the option image selected and blinking by the pressing operation of the select button 68 is selected and blinked. If it is "random", it is considered that "random" is selected and determined).

When the player selects "Character E" by pressing the select button 68 and presses the effect button 63 to determine, or the player selects "Character E" by pressing the select button 68 and the character When the selection determination time elapses (see FIG. 74 (D)), the character selection effect A ends and the special effect starts as shown in FIG. 74 (E).

In this special effect, the player selects any of "Character A", "Character B", "Character C", "Character D", "Character E", "Character F", and "Character G" in the character selection effect A. This is an effect that starts when you select "Random", and does not start when you select "Random".

When the special effect is started, the character selection image CSG and the operation guidance area BS1 are hidden on the display screen 7a (the character selection image CSG and the operation guidance area BS1 disappear from the display screen 7a), and the normal background image is displayed on the display screen 7a. Instead, it switches to the spacecraft inboard image HG2 as a special background image. At this time, the image CRE of the upper body of the character (here, character E) selected by the player in the character selection image CSG is arranged on the front side of the spacecraft inboard image HG2 and is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a and fluctuates. The icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, all the hold icons 9A, and the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad are arranged in front of the character E and displayed again on the display screen 7a. In this state, although the variable effect (variable display) of the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R is still continued, it is not displayed on the display screen 7a (disappears from the display screen 7a). There is). At this time, the voice of the voice actor in charge of the character E flows from the speaker 67. Examples of the voice include "Character E visit" and "Support".

The character selection image CSG and the operation guidance area BS1 are hidden on the display screen 7a (the character selection image CSG and the operation guidance area BS1 disappear from the display screen 7a), and the display screen 7a is displayed as a special background image instead of the normal background image. Even when the image inside the spacecraft is switched to HG2, the number of reserved balls described above is used as a numerical value, and the number of reserved first special figures based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is shown in blue numbers on the left side and the second. The number of the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port 21 is displayed by being arranged on the upper right side of the display screen 7a in a state of being separated from each other on the right side by a red number.

After that, the character selection image CSG and the operation guidance area BS1 are hidden on the display screen 7a (the character selection image CSG and the operation guidance area BS1 disappear from the display screen 7a), and the display screen 7a displays the spacecraft in-space image HG2 as a special background image. After switching and elapses for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), as shown in FIG. 74 (F), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R in the variation effect (variation display) become the character E. It is arranged in front of the image CRE of the upper body and is displayed again on the display screen 7a. At this time, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are switched from the card type effect symbol to the special effect symbol as the normal effect symbol. As described above, this special effect symbol is expanded to the extent that the card figures and character symbols that make up the normal effect symbol disappear and the size of the number symbol becomes the size of the character symbol, and only the number symbol is present. It has become. In other words, from the time of FIG. 74 (F), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are each subjected to the variable effect (variable display) by the numerical symbols which are the special effect symbols. Further, the size of the image CRE of the upper body of the character E is extremely large compared to the sizes of the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, which are special effect symbols, and the size of the upper body of the character E is extremely large. The display mode is more conspicuous than the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R in which the image CRE is a special effect symbol.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 74 (G) and 74 (H), the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "6" which is the special effect symbol, and the right effect symbol 8R is the number "5" which is the special effect symbol. , And finally the middle effect symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed by the number "7" which is a special effect symbol, the same symbol is not temporarily stopped, and then the stop is displayed and the deviation is confirmed. Along with this, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. Also in FIGS. 74 (G) and 74 (H), the image CRE of the upper body of the character E is displayed on the display screen 7a. In FIGS. 74 (G) and 74 (H), after the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed at the same time, the middle effect symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed on the same symbol. However, the display mode may be such that the display is stopped after that and the disconnection is confirmed.

Subsequently, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the change display position 9Cd and becomes the change icon 9C, as shown in FIG. 74 (I), the change effect (variation display) of the effect symbol is obtained. ) Is started. When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad. However, the hold icon 9A is not digested and only one is in stock.

Further, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the spacecraft in-space image HG2 is displayed as a special background image on the display screen 7a as a base image as a special background image. Switch to HG3. At this time, from the image CRE of the upper body of the character (here, character E) selected by the player in the character selection image CSG, an image different from the images displayed in FIGS. 74 (E) to 74 (H) (here, the character). It is switched to the image CRE of the upper body of the character E without the wings of E), is placed in front of the base image HG3, is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a, and has a variable icon 9C, a hold icon 9A, and a variable. The display position 9Cd, all the hold icons 9A, and the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad are arranged on the front side of the character E and displayed on the display screen 7a. Further, at this time, the left effect symbol 8L which is a special effect symbol, the middle effect symbol 8C which is a special effect symbol, and the right effect symbol 8R which is a special effect symbol are hidden again on the display screen 7a (from the display screen 7a). (Although it disappears again), the variable effect (variable display) of the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R has been started.

After that, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, a special effect is produced accordingly. Is completed, and as shown in FIG. 74 (J), the display screen 7a switches again from the base image HG3, which is a special background image, to the city image HG1 which is a normal background image, and is displayed on the display screen 7a. At this time, the image CRE of the upper body of the character E without the wings of the character E disappears from the display screen 7a, and the character display area BS2 having a horizontally long rectangular shape is displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a. A part of the image CRE of the upper body of the character E (the part from the chest to the face) is enlarged and displayed in the character display area BS2. The character display area BS2 is arranged on the front side of the city image HG1 which is a normal background image, and is arranged on the front side of the fluctuation area of the right effect symbol 8R. As a result, a part of the image CRE of the upper body of the character E displayed in the character display area BS2 (the part from the chest to the face) is blocked by the right effect symbol 8R so that it is not difficult to see.

Further, when the special effect is completed (in other words, a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has passed since the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the change display position 9Cd and becomes the change icon 9C. After a lapse of time), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are switched from the special effect symbol to the card type effect symbol as the normal effect symbol. A predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moved to the change display position 9Cd and became the change icon 9C when the special effect was completed (in other words, the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad). From (the time point of FIG. 74 (J)), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are each subjected to variable effect (variable display) by the normal effect symbol.

First, when the character symbol 8Lb is attached to the symbol 8La of the number "1" in which the left effect symbol 8L has a bright green color and a temporary stop is displayed, then, as shown in FIG. 74 (K), the right effect symbol 8R The character symbol 8Rb is attached to the symbol 8Ra of the number "7" having a bright red color and temporarily stopped, and finally the symbol 8Cb of the character is attached to the symbol 8Ca of the number "6" in which the middle effect symbol 8C has a bright blue color. It is attached and temporarily stopped, and the temporary stop is not displayed on the same symbol, and then the stop is displayed and the deviation is confirmed. Along with this, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. Also in FIG. 74 (K), the character display area BS2 is displayed, and a part of the image CRE of the upper body of the character E (the part from the chest to the face) is also displayed in the character display area BS2. In FIGS. 74 (J) and 74 (K), after the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed at the same time, the middle effect symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed on the same symbol. However, the display mode may be such that the display is stopped after that and the disconnection is confirmed.

Subsequently, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the change display position 9Cd and becomes the change icon 9C, as shown in FIG. 74 (L), the change effect (variation display) of the effect symbol is obtained. ) Is started, and the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, which are the normal effect symbols, change from an opaque state to a translucent state all at once (at the same time), and the display mode changes at high speed. .. When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9A is not digested and there is no stock at all. Also in FIG. 74 (L), the character display area BS2 is displayed, and a part of the image CRE of the upper body of the character E (the part from the chest to the face) is also displayed in the character display area BS2.

After that, when the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, which are the normal effect symbols, are not aligned with the same symbol and are stopped and displayed, the deviation is confirmed, whereas the left effect symbol, which is the normal effect symbol, is displayed. When the effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed with the same symbol, the winning is confirmed, and then the winning game in which the player is given a profit is started. ..

In this way, once the character display area BS2 is displayed on the display screen 7a, a plurality of variable effects (a plurality of variable displays) by the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, which are normal effect symbols, are displayed. ) Is displayed on the display screen 7a. At this time, a part of the image CRE of the upper body of the character E (the part from the chest to the face) is displayed in the character display area BS2.

Further, when a special effect is performed, in FIGS. 74 (F) to 74 (H), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are special effect symbols and constitute a normal effect symbol. Although the card figure and the character pattern disappeared and the size of the number pattern was expanded to the extent that it became the size of the character pattern, it had only the number pattern, but it was smaller than the size of the card figure. (It is one to two times smaller than the size of the figure on the card). Therefore, when the character E selected by the player appears (is displayed) as the image CRE of the upper body of the character E on the display screen 7a, it contributes to making the image CRE of the upper body of the character E stand out. Can be done.

Once the character display area BS2 is displayed on the display screen 7a, a plurality of variable effects (plural variable displays) by the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, which are normal effect symbols, are displayed. Although it is displayed on the display screen 7a straddling, when the character selection effect A is performed again, the player selects the same character as the previous time (here, character E (“character E”)). Then, a special effect is performed, and the character E appears in the above-mentioned effects shown in FIG. 74 (E) and thereafter. Further, when the character selection effect A is performed again, if the player selects and determines a character different from the previous one (for example, character B (“character B”)), a special effect is performed, and the above-mentioned FIG. 74 ( E) Character B will appear in the subsequent production.

Further, once the character display area BS2 is displayed on the display screen 7a, as described above, a plurality of variable effects (plurality) by the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, which are normal effect symbols. It is displayed on the display screen 7a across the variable display). In the present embodiment, when the non-display condition is satisfied (for example, when a plurality of variation effects (plural variation display) reaches 100 times), the character display area BS2 is hidden on the display screen 7a (from the display screen 7a). It disappears). Even if the special effect is performed and then the special effect ends and returns to the normal effect (that is, even if the special effect symbol returns to the normal effect symbol again), the player if the character selection effect A is performed again. When you select a character, a special effect is performed again.

[Character selection effect B]
Next, the character selection effect B will be described with reference to FIG. 75. As shown in FIG. 75 (A), the city image HG1 is displayed as a normal background image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the variation effect (variation display) of the effect symbol is completed, and the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect. The symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R are stopped and displayed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all card-type effect symbols as normal effect symbols, and the number symbols (numbers "1" to "9") are included in the card. ), The symbol of the character corresponding to the symbol of the number is attached. The character symbol 8Lb is attached to the symbol 8La of the number "2" in which the left effect symbol 8L has a bright blue color, and the character symbol 8Lb is stopped and displayed. The character symbol 8Rb is attached to the symbol 8Ra of the number "6" whose right effect symbol 8R has a bright blue color, and the character symbol 8Rb is attached to the stop display. It has disappeared from 7a.

Here, the hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad to the third hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon is not displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad. That is, the hold icon 9A is not digested and there are only three stocked icons. In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21.

Subsequently, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the change display position 9Cd and becomes the change icon 9C, as shown in FIG. 75 (B), the change effect (variation display) of the effect symbol is obtained. ) Is started. When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad. Then, the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A is not digested and there are only two stocked icons. ..

After that, the character selection effect B is started in a state where the variable effect (variable display) of the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R is continued. When the character selection effect B is started, as shown in FIGS. 75 (C) and 75 (D), the left effect symbol 8L which is a normal effect symbol, the middle effect symbol 8C which is a normal effect symbol, and the right which is a normal effect symbol. The effect symbol 8R is hidden on the display screen 7a (disappears from the display screen 7a), and the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, all the hold icons 9A, the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad are displayed. It is hidden on the display screen 7a (disappears from the display screen 7a), and the character selection image CSG is displayed on the entire display screen 7a. Along with this, the city image HG1 which is a normal background image is hidden on the display screen 7a (disappears from the display screen 7a). Even in the state where the character selection image CSG is displayed on the display screen 7a, the number of the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 with the number of the above-mentioned reserved balls as a numerical value. Is displayed on the left side with blue numbers, and the number of second special figure reservations based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is arranged and displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a with red numbers separated from each other on the right side. ing.

The character selection image CSG is divided into eight regions (plurality of regions) that radiate from the center of the display screen 7a to the outside to form eight selection images. For these eight selection images, seven selection images for selecting each of the seven characters A to G, and one of the characters A to G are randomly selected on the game machine 1 side. There is one option image. The seven characters, characters A to G, are the same as the character symbols (characters A to G) that are touched by the numerical symbols that make up the above-mentioned normal effect symbols.

Of the eight option images, clockwise from the upper option image, "Character A" is an option image for selecting character A, "Character B" is an option image for selecting character B, and character C. "Character C" which is an option image for selecting, "Character D" which is an option image for selecting character D, and "Character D" which is an option image for randomly selecting one character on the game machine 1 side. "Random", "Character E" which is an option image for selecting character E, "Character F" which is an option image for selecting character F, and "Character G" which is an option image for selecting character G. Are allocated and arranged.

As a result, one character is randomly selected on the game machine 1 side for the lower option image which is opposite to the "character A" which is the option image for selecting the character A to be arranged in the upper option image. "Random", which is an option image for the purpose, is arranged, and "Character A" and "Random" are arranged on the same vertical. "Character B", which is an option image for selecting character B, and "Character E", which is an option image for selecting character E, are placed on the option image on the opposite side to "Character B" and "Character E". Are arranged on the same straight line rising to the right. "Character C", which is an option image for selecting character C, and "Character F", which is an option image for selecting character F, are placed on the option image on the opposite side to "Character C" and "Character F". Are placed on the same horizontal line. "Character D", which is an option image for selecting character D, and "Character G", which is an option image for selecting character G, are placed on the option image on the opposite side to "Character D" and "Character G". Are arranged on the same downward-sloping straight line.

An operation of selecting and determining a character will be described on the front side of this option image so that it fits within the "character D" which is the lower right side of the display screen 7a and is an option image for selecting the character D. The operation guide area BS1 for the purpose is provided as a horizontally long rectangular shape. In the operation guidance area BS1, an effect button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is arranged on the left side thereof, and a select button image SG imitating the select button 68 having up, down, left and right pressing buttons is arranged on the right side thereof. There is. Both the effect button image BG and the select button 68 are displayed in a blinking manner.

When the character selection image CSG is displayed, the selection image corresponding to the currently selected character (in other words, the previously selected character) blinks (see FIG. 75 (C)). Here, since the currently selected character is character A, "character A" is blinking. In this state, each time the right pressing button of the select button 68 is pressed, "Character A" blinks "Character B", "Character C" blinks, "Character D" blinks, and "Random". , "Character E", "Character F", "Character G", "Character A", "Character B", and so on. Then, only the selected option image blinks. Each time the left push button of the select button 68 is pressed, the option image is repeatedly selected counterclockwise, and only the selected option image blinks. Each time the upper push button or the lower push button of the select button 68 is pressed, the option image on the opposite side to the currently blinking option image is selected, and only the selected option image blinks. When the player presses the select button 68 to select the player's favorite character and presses the effect button 63, the selected character is determined. When the player presses the select button 68 to select random and presses the effect button 63, the randomness is determined.

It should be noted that the pressing operation of the select button 68 and the pressing operation of the effect button 63 are treated as valid until the character selection determination time (15 seconds in the present embodiment) elapses after the character selection image CSG is displayed. It has become like. If there is no pressing operation of the select button 68 and pressing operation of the effect button 63 before the character selection determination time (15 seconds in the present embodiment) elapses after the character selection image CSG is displayed, the character selection determination time After that, it is considered that the character selected image CSG that blinks when the character selection image CSG is displayed and the corresponding character are selected again and determined (the option image that blinks when the character selection image CSG is displayed is ". If it is "random", it is considered that "random" is selected and determined again).

Further, when the character selection determination time (15 seconds in the present embodiment) elapses after the character selection image CSG is displayed, the select button 68 is pressed, but the effect button 63 is not pressed. When the character selection determination time elapses, it is considered that the character selected and determined by the pressing operation of the select button 68 and the corresponding character are selected and determined (the option image selected and blinking by the pressing operation of the select button 68 is selected and blinked. If it is "random", it is considered that "random" is selected and determined).

When the player selects "random" by pressing the select button 68 and presses the effect button 63 to determine, or the player selects "random" by pressing the select button 68 and determines the character selection. When time elapses (see FIG. 75 (D)), the character selection effect B ends, and as shown in FIG. 75 (E), starts in FIG. 74 (E) of the character selection effect A described above. The special effect is not started here, but the normal effect is performed (continued) in the same manner as in FIG. 75 (B), and the character selection image CSG and the operation guidance area BS1 are hidden on the display screen 7a (character selection). The image CSG and the operation guidance area BS1 disappear from the display screen 7a), the display screen 7a is switched again to the city image HG1 which is the original normal background image, and the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, and the first hold display position 9Ad ~ The fourth reserved display position 9Ad is arranged on the front side of the city image HG1 which is a normal background image, and is displayed again on the display screen 7a. At this time, the card type effect symbol is displayed again on the display screen 7a as the normal effect symbol without switching from the card type effect symbol to the special effect symbol as the normal effect symbol, and the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C and the right Each of the effect symbols 8R is subjected to a variable effect (variable display) according to the normal effect symbol.

Further, when the player selects "random" by pressing the select button 68 and presses the effect button 63 to determine the character, or the player selects "random" by pressing the select button 68 to determine the character. When the selection determination time elapses, the character display area BS2 having a horizontally long rectangular shape is displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a. Here, since the player selects "random" in the character selection image CSG, the character is arbitrarily selected (here, in the effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub control board 90) on the game machine 1 side (here, the character). C is selected.), A part of the image CRC of the upper body of the character C (the part from the chest to the face) is enlarged and displayed in the character display area BS2. The character display area BS2 is arranged on the front side of the city image HG1 which is a normal background image, and is arranged on the front side of the fluctuation area of the right effect symbol 8R. As a result, a part of the image CRC of the upper body of the character C displayed in the character display area BS2 (the part from the chest to the face) is blocked by the right effect symbol 8R so that it is not difficult to see.

As described above, in the special effect, the player tentatively performs "Character A", "Character B", "Character C", "Character D", "Character E", and "Character F" in the character selection effect B. , "Character G" is selected, and is not started when "Random" is selected. Here, since the player selects "random" in the character selection effect B, the special effect is not started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 75 (F), when the left effect symbol 8L is first displayed as a temporary stop with the character symbol 8Lb attached to the symbol 8La of the number "1" having a bright green color, then, FIG. 75 As shown in (G), the character symbol 8Rb is attached to the symbol 8Ra of the number "7" in which the right effect symbol 8R has a bright red color, and the character symbol 8Rb is temporarily stopped, and finally the middle production symbol 8C has a bright blue color. The character symbol 8Cb is attached to the symbol 8Ca of "6" and the temporary stop is displayed, the temporary stop is not displayed on the same symbol, and then the stop is displayed and the deviation is confirmed. Along with this, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. Also in FIGS. 75 (F) and 75 (G), the character display area BS2 is displayed, and a part of the image CRC of the upper body of the character C (the part from the chest to the face) is also displayed in the character display area BS2. .. In FIGS. 75 (F) and 75 (G), after the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed at the same time, the middle effect symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed on the same symbol. However, the display mode may be such that the display is stopped after that and the disconnection is confirmed.

Subsequently, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, as shown in FIG. 75 (H), the effect symbol is changed (variable display). ) Is started, and the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, which are the normal effect symbols, change from an opaque state to a translucent state all at once (at the same time), and the display mode changes at high speed. .. When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9A is not digested and only one stock is present. .. Also in FIG. 75 (H), the character display area BS2 is displayed, and a part of the image CRC of the upper body of the character C (the part from the chest to the face) is also displayed in the character display area BS2.

After that, as shown in FIG. 75 (I), first, the left effect symbol 8L is stopped and displayed with the character symbol 8Lb attached to the symbol 8La of the number "3", and then the right effect symbol 8R has a bright blue color. The character symbol 8Rb is attached to the symbol 8Ra of the number "2" and is stopped and displayed, and finally the symbol 8Cb of the character is attached to the symbol 8Ca of the number "7" in which the middle effect symbol 8C has a bright red color and is temporarily stopped. The temporary stop is not displayed on the same symbol, and then the stop is displayed and the deviation is confirmed. Along with this, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. Also in FIG. 75 (I), the character display area BS2 is displayed, and a part of the image CRC of the upper body of the character C (the part from the chest to the face) is also displayed in the character display area BS2. In FIG. 75 (I), after the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed at the same time, the middle effect symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and not displayed on the same symbol, and then. , It may be a display mode in which the display is stopped and the disconnection is confirmed.

Subsequently, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the change display position 9Cd and becomes the change icon 9C, as shown in FIG. 75 (J), the change effect (variation display) of the effect symbol is obtained. ) Is started, and the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, which are the normal effect symbols, change from an opaque state to a translucent state all at once (at the same time), and the display mode changes at high speed. .. When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9A is not digested and there is no stock at all. Although the character display area BS2 is also displayed in FIG. 75 (J), here, a part of the image CRC of the upper body of the character C (the part from the chest to the face) is displayed in the character display area BS2. There is. This is because the player selects "random" when the character selection effect B is performed, so that the character displayed in the character display area BS2 is a part of the image CRC of the upper body of the character C (from the chest to the face). (Part) is switched to a part of the image CRE of the upper body of character E (the part from the chest to the face). Of course, this character CRC is a character arbitrarily selected on the gaming machine 1 side (in the effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90). Therefore, the characters arbitrarily selected on the gaming machine 1 side (in the effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90) in the previous time and this time may happen to be the same character.

After that, when the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, which are the normal effect symbols, are not aligned with the same symbol and are stopped and displayed, the deviation is confirmed, whereas the left effect symbol, which is the normal effect symbol, is displayed. When the effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed with the same symbol, the winning is confirmed, and then the winning game in which the player is given a profit is started. ..

In this way, once the character display area BS2 is displayed on the display screen 7a, a plurality of variable effects (a plurality of variable displays) by the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, which are normal effect symbols, are displayed. ) Is displayed on the display screen 7a. At this time, the character displayed in the character display area BS2 is arbitrarily selected on the game machine 1 side (in the effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub control board 90) every time it straddles a plurality of variation effects (a plurality of variation displays). Image of the upper body of the character C A part of the CRC image (the part from the chest to the face) is displayed. The number of times the variable effect is straddled (the number of times the variable effect is performed (the number of times the variable is displayed)) is also arbitrary on the gaming machine 1 side (in the effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90). Has been decided. Therefore, the period during which the character is displayed in the character display area BS2 can be randomized, and the period during which the character is displayed in the character display area BS2 and the period during which the character is displayed in the character display area BS2 can be varied. You can do it.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the non-display condition is satisfied (for example, when the number of times the character is arbitrarily determined on the gaming machine 1 side (in the effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90) reaches 10 times), the character The display area BS2 is hidden on the display screen 7a (disappears from the display screen 7a).

The characters arbitrarily selected on the gaming machine 1 side (in the effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90) are referred to as a plurality of variation effects (plural variation displays) as FIGS. 75 (E) to 75 (I). It is designed to switch every two fluctuation effects (two fluctuation displays). However, instead of the two variation effects (two variation displays), it may be switched every fixed number of variation effects (fixed number of variation displays) (for example, five variation effects (five times of variation display)). It may be switched every 10 fluctuation effects (10 fluctuation displays), or every 15 fluctuation effects (15 fluctuation displays). (You may do so.), It may be switched by the variation effect of the random number of times (variation display of the random number of times) (for example, 7 times variation effect (7 times variation display) → 3 times variation effect (3 times). (Variation display) → 10 times variation effect (10 times variation display) → 5 times variation effect (5 times variation display) → 5 times variation effect (5 times variation display) → 9 times variation effect ( 9 times variable display) → ... may be switched).

[Character selection effect C]
Next, the character selection effect C will be described with reference to FIG. 76. The character selection effect C is a select button in which the player has up, down, left, and right pressing buttons in a state where all the hold icons 9A are exhausted, the variation effect (variation display) of the effect symbol is completed, the stop display is displayed, and the disengagement is confirmed. This is performed when the 68 is operated, and the enemy character selected by the player in the character selection effect C appears when the battle effect is performed, and the special effect is started. In the present embodiment, after the character selection effect C, the battle effect is always performed in the variable effect (variable display) of the first effect symbol.

As shown in FIG. 76 (A), when the character selection effect C is started, the left effect symbol 8L, which is a normal effect symbol, the middle effect symbol 8C, which is a normal effect symbol, and the right effect symbol 8R, which is a normal effect symbol, are displayed. It is hidden on the display screen 7a (disappears from the display screen 7a), and the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad are hidden on the display screen 7a (disappears from the display screen 7a). , The character selection image CSG is displayed on the entire display screen 7a. Even in the state where the character selection image CSG is displayed on the display screen 7a, the number of the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 with the number of the above-mentioned reserved balls as a numerical value. Is displayed on the left side with blue numbers, and the number of second special figure reservations based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is arranged and displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a with red numbers separated from each other on the right side. ing.

The character selection image CSG allows the enemy character to play against the ally character CRA in the battle production to be selected from a plurality of enemy characters, and three enemy characters (enemy on the left side) are displayed on the same horizontal line on the display screen 7a. The character, the enemy character in the center, and the enemy character on the right side) are arranged at equal intervals as selection images. That is, the three option images are arranged on the same horizontal line at equal intervals. As the plurality of enemy characters, there are seven enemy characters such as enemy character CRB, enemy character CRC, enemy character CRD, enemy character CRE, enemy character CRF, enemy character CRG, and enemy character CRH.

On the lower right side of the display screen 7a, an operation guide area BS1 for explaining an operation of selecting and determining an enemy character is provided as a horizontally long rectangular shape. In the operation guidance area BS1, an effect button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is arranged on the left side thereof, and a select button image SG imitating the select button 68 having up, down, left and right pressing buttons is arranged on the right side thereof. There is. Both the effect button image BG and the select button 68 are displayed in a blinking manner.

Further, an enemy character random selection image, which is an option image for randomly selecting one of a plurality of enemy characters on the game machine 1 side, below the enemy character on the left side and on the lower left side of the display screen 7a. ACB (random selection image ACB) is provided as a horizontally long rectangular shape.

When the character selection image CSG is displayed, the selection image of the enemy character corresponding to the currently selected enemy character (in other words, the previously selected enemy character) blinks. Here, since the currently selected enemy character is the enemy character CRC, the option image arranged in the center of the display screen 7a is displayed and blinks. An option image for selecting the enemy character CRD is arranged and displayed on the left side of the enemy character CRC, and an option image for selecting the enemy character CRB is arranged and displayed on the right side of the enemy character CRC. An arrow image prompting the pressing operation of the left push button of the select button 68 is arranged on the left side of the enemy character CRD and displayed blinking in red, and the right pressing button of the select button 68 is pressed on the right side of the enemy character CRB. An arrow image prompting the operation is arranged and displayed blinking in red. Each of the arrow images is for displaying another enemy character on the display screen 7a.

In this state, each time the right side pressing button of the select button 68 is pressed, three enemy characters (select the left side enemy character) are arranged and displayed on the same horizontal line at equal intervals on the same horizontal line. Of the option image for selecting the enemy character in the center, the option image for selecting the enemy character in the center, and the option image for selecting the enemy character on the right side), the option image for selecting the enemy character on the left side moves to the left. It disappears from the display screen 7a, and the option image for selecting the central enemy character switches from the blinking display mode to the non-blinking display mode, moves to the left, and is placed in the option image for selecting the enemy character on the left side. The option image for selecting the enemy character on the right side moves to the left and is placed in the option image for selecting the enemy character in the center. Then, it newly appears on the display screen 7a from the right side of the display screen 7a, and is arranged and displayed on the option image for selecting the enemy character on the right side. Here, in FIG. 76 (A), each time the right pressing button of the select button 68 is pressed, the enemy character CRB → enemy character CRH → enemy character CRG → enemy is used as a selection image for selecting the central enemy character. The display mode is such that the reel rotates to the left in the order of character CRF → enemy character CRE → enemy character CRD → enemy character CRC → enemy character CRB → enemy character CRH → ... When the effect button 63 is pressed, the enemy character in the center is determined. When the player presses the select button 68 to select the player's favorite enemy character and presses the effect button 63, the selected central enemy character is determined.

On the other hand, each time the left side pressing button of the select button 68 is pressed, three enemy characters (to select the left side enemy character) that are arranged and displayed on the same horizontal line at equal intervals on the same horizontal line. Choice image for selecting the enemy character in the center, choice image for selecting the enemy character on the right side), the choice image for selecting the enemy character on the right side moves to the right and the display screen It disappears from 7a, and the option image for selecting the central enemy character switches from the blinking display mode to the non-blinking display mode, moves to the right, and is placed and displayed on the option image for selecting the enemy character on the right side. The option image for selecting the enemy character on the left side moves to the right and is placed in the option image for selecting the enemy character in the center, and the non-blinking display mode is switched to the blinking display mode. It newly appears on the display screen 7a from the left side of the display screen 7a, and is arranged and displayed on the option image for selecting the enemy character on the left side. Here, in FIG. 76 (A), each time the left pressing button of the select button 68 is pressed, the enemy character CRB → enemy character CRC → enemy character CRD → enemy is used as a selection image for selecting the central enemy character. The display mode is such that the reel rotates to the right in the order of character CRE → enemy character CRF → enemy character CRG → enemy character CRH → enemy character CRB → enemy character CRC → ... When the player presses the select button 68 to select the player's favorite enemy character and presses the effect button 63, the selected central enemy character is determined.

Each time the upper press button or lower press button of the select button 68 is pressed, the selection of the central enemy character is switched to the selection of the enemy character random choice image ACB (random choice image ACB), and the center enemy character does not blink. The display mode is such that the enemy character random choice image ACB (random choice image ACB) is enabled and blinks, or the central enemy character is selected from the selection of the enemy character random choice image ACB (random choice image ACB). The display mode is such that the enemy character random choice image ACB (random choice image ACB) does not blink, and the selection of the central enemy character becomes valid and blinks. When the player presses the select button 68, the player selects the enemy character random choice image ACB (random choice image ACB), and presses the effect button 63, randomness is determined.

It should be noted that the pressing operation of the select button 68 and the pressing operation of the effect button 63 are treated as valid until the character selection determination time (60 seconds in the present embodiment) elapses after the character selection image CSG is displayed. It has become like. If there is no pressing operation of the select button 68 and pressing operation of the effect button 63 before the character selection determination time (60 seconds in the present embodiment) elapses after the character selection image CSG is displayed, the character selection determination time After that, it is considered that the blinking enemy character (that is, the central enemy character) is selected again when the character selection image CSG is displayed (that is, the enemy character random when the character selection image CSG is displayed). When the option image ACB (random option image ACB) is blinking, it is considered that "random" is selected and determined again).

Further, when the character selection determination time (60 seconds in the present embodiment) elapses after the character selection image CSG is displayed, the select button 68 is pressed, but the effect button 63 is not pressed. When the character selection determination time elapses, it is considered that the central enemy character has been selected and determined (when the enemy character random selection image ACB (random selection image ACB) is blinking by pressing the select button 68, "Random selection image ACB" is displayed again. "Random" is considered to have been selected and determined).

In the special effect, the player selects the character in the character selection effect C, "enemy character CRB", "enemy character CRC", "enemy character CRD", "enemy character CRE", "enemy character CRF", "enemy character CRG", " This is an effect that starts when any one of "enemy character CRH" is selected, and is not started when "random" is selected.

First, in FIG. 76 (A), when the player selects the enemy character CRB (that is, when the enemy character CRB is arranged as the central enemy character on the display screen 7a and the display mode is set to blink), then the character is selected. When the character selection determination time (60 seconds in the present embodiment) elapses after the image CSG is displayed, the character selection effect C ends accordingly, and as shown in FIG. 76 (B), the character selection image CSG , Operation guidance area BS1 and enemy character random choice image ACB (random choice image ACB) are hidden on the display screen 7a (character selection image CSG, operation guidance area BS1 and enemy character random choice image ACB (random choice image ACB). (Disappears from the display screen 7a), the city image HG1 is displayed as a normal background image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the state in which the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are stopped and displayed is displayed again. Will be done. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all card-type effect symbols as normal effect symbols, and the number symbols (numbers "1" to "9") are included in the card. ), The symbol of the character corresponding to the symbol of the number is attached. The character symbol 8Lb is attached to the symbol 8La of the number "2" in which the left effect symbol 8L has a bright blue color, and the character symbol 8Lb is stopped and displayed. The character symbol 8Rb is attached to the symbol 8Ra of the number "6" whose right effect symbol 8R has a bright blue color, and the character symbol 8Rb is attached to the stop display. It has disappeared from 7a.

In this state, when only three game balls enter the first starting port in succession, the hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad to the third hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A is displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad. Does not display the hold icon. That is, the hold icon 9A is not digested and there are only three stocked icons. In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21.

Subsequently, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, as shown in FIG. 76 (C), the left effect symbol 8L and the middle effect symbol are displayed. 8C, the variable effect (variable display) of the right effect symbol 8R is started, and the display screen 7a is switched to the spacecraft inboard image HG2 as a special background image instead of the normal background image. At this time, the battle production is started. Along with this, a special production will be started. When the battle effect is started, the ally character CRA appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, and the enemy character (here, the enemy character CRB) selected by the player in the character selection image CSG as the opponent of the ally character CRA is displayed on the display screen. Appearing from the left side of 7a, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight in the center of the display screen 7a. Although the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are arranged in front of the spacecraft image HG2 and displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a, the size of the enemy character CRB is larger than the size of the ally character CRA. , The display mode is such that the enemy character CRB stands out compared to the ally character CRA in the battle production.

The ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are arranged on the front side of the spacecraft image HG2 and are displayed in a large size in the center of the display screen 7a. The symbol 8R is arranged in front of the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB and displayed on the display screen 7a, and the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, all the hold icons 9A, and the first hold display positions 9Ad to the fourth. The hold display position 9Ad is also arranged on the front side of the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB and is displayed on the display screen 7a. As a result, in addition to the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R in the variable effect (variable display), the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, all the hold icons 9A, and the first hold display position 9Ad to the 4th hold display position 9Ad are also blocked by the battle effect by the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB so that they are not difficult to see.

When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad in FIG. 76 (C) moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol are displayed. The 8R switches from a card-type effect symbol to a special effect symbol as a normal effect symbol. As described above, this special effect symbol is expanded to the extent that the card figures and character symbols that make up the normal effect symbol disappear and the size of the number symbol becomes the size of the character symbol, and only the number symbol is present. It has become. That is, from the time of FIG. 76 (C), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are each subjected to the variable effect (variable display) by the numerical symbols which are the special effect symbols. In addition, the size of the enemy character CRB is extremely large compared to the sizes of the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, which are special effect symbols, and the enemy character CRB becomes a special effect symbol. The display mode is more conspicuous than the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R.

After that, as shown in FIG. 76 (D), the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped by the number "6" which is a special effect symbol, and the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped by the number "5" which is a special effect symbol. Finally, the middle effect symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "7" which is a special effect symbol, and is not temporarily stopped displayed on the same symbol, and then stopped and displayed, and the deviation is confirmed. Along with this, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. In FIG. 76 (D), after the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed at the same time, the middle effect symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and not displayed on the same symbol, and then. , It may be a display mode in which the display is stopped and the disconnection is confirmed.

Subsequently, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the special effect ends accordingly, as shown in FIG. 76 (E). The display screen 7a switches again from the base image HG3, which is a special background image, to the city image HG1 which is a normal background image, and is displayed on the display screen 7a. When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad. However, the hold icon 9A is not digested and only one is in stock.

When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are usually changed from the special effect symbol. The effect symbol is switched to the card type effect symbol, and the variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbol is started. That is, from the time of FIG. 76 (E), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are each subjected to variable effect (variable display) by the normal effect symbol.

First, when the character symbol 8Lb is attached to the symbol 8La of the number "1" in which the left effect symbol 8L has a bright green color and a temporary stop is displayed, then, as shown in FIG. 76 (F), the right effect symbol 8R The character symbol 8Rb is attached to the symbol 8Ra of the number "7" having a bright red color and temporarily stopped, and finally the symbol 8Cb of the character is attached to the symbol 8Ca of the number "6" in which the middle effect symbol 8C has a bright blue color. It is attached and temporarily stopped, and the temporary stop is not displayed on the same symbol, and then the stop is displayed and the deviation is confirmed. Along with this, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. In FIG. 76 (F), after the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed at the same time, the middle effect symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and not displayed on the same symbol, and then. , It may be a display mode in which the display is stopped and the disconnection is confirmed.

Subsequently, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbol is started, which is a normal effect symbol. The left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R change from an opaque state to a translucent state all at once (at the same time), resulting in a display mode that fluctuates at high speed. When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9A is not digested and there is no stock at all.

After that, when the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, which are the normal effect symbols, are not aligned with the same symbol and are stopped and displayed, the deviation is confirmed, whereas the left effect symbol, which is the normal effect symbol, is displayed. When the effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed with the same symbol, the winning is confirmed, and then the winning game in which the player is given a profit is started. ..

On the other hand, in FIG. 76 (A), when the player selects the enemy character random choice image ACB (random choice image ACB), the character selection determination time (in the present embodiment, after the character selection image CSG is displayed) is displayed. After 60 seconds), as shown in FIG. 76 (G), the same screen as in FIG. 76 (B) described above is displayed. Here, the description will be omitted.

In this state, when only three game balls enter the first starting port in succession, the hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad to the third hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A is displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad. Does not display the hold icon. That is, the hold icon 9A is not digested and there are only three stocked icons. In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21.

Subsequently, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, as shown in FIG. 76 (H), the left effect symbol 8L and the middle effect symbol are displayed. The variation effect (variation display) of the right effect symbol 8R on 8C is started, and the city image HG1 which is a normal background image is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a without switching to the special background image. At this time, the card type effect symbol is displayed on the display screen 7a as the normal effect symbol without switching from the card type effect symbol to the special effect symbol as the normal effect symbol, and the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect are displayed. Each of the symbols 8R is subjected to a variable effect (variable display) according to the normal effect symbol.

After that, as shown in FIG. 76 (I), the ally character CRA does not appear from the right side of the display screen 7a, and the player selects "random" in the character selection image CSG as the opponent of the ally character CRA. On the game machine 1 side (in the effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub control board 90), only the enemy character arbitrarily selected (here, the enemy character CRD is selected) appears from the left side of the display screen 7a. However, it is not a battle effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRD fight in the center of the display screen 7a. The enemy character CRD is placed in front of the city image HG1, which is a normal background image, and is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a. 8R is placed in front of the enemy character CRD and displayed on the display screen 7a, and the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, all the hold icons 9A, the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad are also enemies. It is arranged on the front side of the character CRD and displayed on the display screen 7a. As a result, in addition to the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R in the variable effect (variable display), the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, all the hold icons 9A, and the first hold display position 9Ad to the 4th hold display position 9Ad are also blocked by the effect of the enemy character CRD so that they are not difficult to see.

In addition, in FIGS. 76 (H) and 76 (I), the ally character CRA does not appear, but the ally character CRA may appear. In this case, when the battle effect is started, the ally character CRA appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, and the player selects "random" as the opponent of the ally character CRA. An arbitrarily selected enemy character (here, the enemy character CRD is selected) appears from the left side of the display screen 7a (in the effect control microcomputer 91 of the control board 90), and the ally character CRA appears in the center of the display screen 7a. And the enemy character CRD will fight. Although the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRD are arranged in front of the city image HG1 which is a normal background image and are displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a, the size of the enemy character CRD is larger than the size of the ally character CRA. The size is increased, and the display mode is such that the enemy character CRD stands out compared to the ally character CRA in the battle effect.

After that, first, when the character symbol 8Lb is attached to the symbol 8La of the number "1" in which the left effect symbol 8L has a bright green color and a temporary stop is displayed, then, as shown in FIG. 76 (J), the right effect is displayed. The character symbol 8Rb is attached to the symbol 8Ra of the number "7" in which the symbol 8R has a bright red color, and is temporarily stopped. Finally, the symbol 8Ca of the number "6" in which the middle effect symbol 8C has a bright blue color is displayed as a character symbol. 8Cb is attached and a temporary stop is displayed, the temporary stop is not displayed on the same symbol, and then the stop is displayed and the disconnection is confirmed. In FIG. 76 (J), after the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed at the same time, the middle effect symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and not displayed on the same symbol, and then. , It may be a display mode in which the display is stopped and the disconnection is confirmed.

Subsequently, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the change display position 9Cd and becomes the change icon 9C, as shown in FIG. 76 (K), the change effect (variation display) of the effect symbol is obtained. ) Is started, and the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, which are the normal effect symbols, change from an opaque state to a translucent state all at once (at the same time), and the display mode changes at high speed. .. When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9A is not digested and only one stock is present. ..

After that, when the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, which are the normal effect symbols, are not aligned with the same symbol and are stopped and displayed, the deviation is confirmed, whereas the left effect symbol 8L, middle When the effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R are aligned and displayed as a stop display, the winning is confirmed, and then the winning game in which the player is given a profit is started.

In this way, when the character selection effect C is performed and the player selects an enemy character, as a special effect, in FIGS. 76 (C) and 76 (D), a special background is displayed on the display screen 7a instead of the normal background image. While switching to the spacecraft in-space image HG2 as an image, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are switched from the card type effect symbol to the special effect symbol as the normal effect symbol, and the variation (variation due to the variation icon 9C). When the effect (variation display)) is completed and the next variation is started (when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variation display position 9Cd and becomes the variation icon 9C), the figure. In 76 (E), the base image HG3 which is a special background image is switched again to the city image HG1 which is a normal background image on the display screen 7a and displayed on the display screen 7a, and the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C and The right effect symbol 8R switches from the special effect symbol to the card type effect symbol as a normal effect symbol, and the variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbol is started.

On the other hand, when the player selects random, one of the plurality of enemy characters is arbitrarily selected on the game machine 1 side (in the effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub control board 90), and FIG. 76 ( In H) to (J), the city image HG1 which is a normal background image is displayed on the display screen 7a without switching to the special background image, and the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are special. When the fluctuation (variation effect (variation display) by the variation icon 9C) is completed and the next variation is started (first hold display position) with the card type effect symbol which is the normal effect symbol without switching to the effect symbol. When the hold icon 9A displayed on 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C), in FIG. 76 (K), the city image HG1 which is a normal background image is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a. At the same time, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are continued as the card type effect symbols, which are normal effect symbols, and the variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbol is started.

Further, in FIGS. 76 (C) and 76 (D) performed as a special effect when the character selection effect C is performed, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are special effect symbols. , Although the card figures and character symbols that make up the normal production symbols have disappeared and the size of the number symbols has been expanded to the extent that they are the size of the character symbols, they have only the number symbols. It is smaller than the size of the figure (it is one to two times smaller than the size of the figure on the card). Therefore, it is possible to contribute to making the enemy character CRB stand out when the enemy character CRB selected by the player appears (is displayed) on the display screen 7a.

In the present embodiment, even if the special effect is performed, and then the special effect ends and the normal effect is returned again (that is, the special effect symbol is returned to the normal effect symbol again), as described above, the character If the player selects a character when the selection effect C is performed again, the special effect is performed again.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the character selection effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the character selection effect A of FIG. 74, the character selection effect B of FIG. 75, and the character selection effect C of FIG. 76, the game ball enters the first starting port 20. A lottery of "hits" or "misses" (based on being accepted at the ball entrance), and the lottery result of this lottery "hits" or "misses" can be notified of the lottery results. An image display device 7 (display means) for displaying the right effect symbol 8R (a set of effect symbols) is provided, and a plurality of optional images including a plurality of character images are displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) for a game. A person can operate the select button 68 (operation means) and the effect button 63 (operation means) to execute the first effect of selecting one option image from a plurality of option images. (FIGS. 74 (C) and (D) for the character selection effect A, FIGS. 75 (C) and (D) for the character selection effect B, and FIG. 76 (A) for the character selection effect C). When the one option image selected in the first effect is one of a plurality of character images, it is possible to execute a second effect that executes a special effect different from the normal effect. (In the character selection effect A, FIGS. 74 (E) to (I) are shown as special effects, and in the character selection effect C, FIGS. 76 (C) and (D) are shown as special effects). According to this configuration, the player can operate the select button 68 (operation means) and the effect button 63 (operation means) to select one option image from a plurality of option images. Therefore, the player can select the character image that he / she likes. Furthermore, since the special effect is executed only when the player selects the character image that he / she likes, the player can use the select button 68 (operation means) or the effect when he / she sees the special effect. The button 63 (operating means) is actively operated, and the motivation for operating the select button 68 (operating means) and the effect button 63 (operating means) can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the second effect in the character selection effect B in FIG. 75 and the character selection effect C in FIG. 76, one of the plurality of character images selected in the first effect is one of the plurality of character images. The normal effect can be executed when the character image is not the same (the character selection effect B is the normal effect after FIG. 75 (E), and the character selection effect C is the normal effect after FIG. 76 (H)). ). According to this configuration, the player operates the select button 68 (operation means) and the effect button 63 (operation means) to select another image (the character image as one option image from the plurality of option images) without selecting the character image. When the character selection effect B selects "random" in FIG. 75 (D) and the character selection effect C selects "enemy character random option image ACB (random option image ACB)" in FIG. 76 (A), a special effect is executed. Since the normal effect is executed instead, the player will actively operate the select button 68 (operation means) and the effect button 63 (operation means) when he sees the special effect. , The operation motivation for the select button 68 (operation means) and the effect button 63 (operation means) can be further improved.

[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the special effect in the character selection effect A in FIG. 74 and the character selection effect C in FIG. When displayed on the display means), it is displayed larger than the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R (each effect symbol in a set of effect symbols) (Fig. 74 (E) in the character selection effect A). The image CRE of the upper body of the character E of (I) and the character selection effect C are shown in FIGS. 76 (C) and 76 (D). According to this configuration, the character image preferred by the player himself is displayed larger than the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R (each effect symbol in one set of effect symbols). The image can be displayed in a more conspicuous manner than the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R (each effect symbol in one set of effect symbols), and the left effect symbol 8L and the middle effect symbol tend to be monotonous. Since it is possible to give a change to the variable effect (variable display) of the 8C and the right effect symbol 8R, the monotonousness of the variable effect (variable display) of the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R can be obtained. It can be mitigated.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first effects in the character selection effect A in FIG. 74, the character selection effect B in FIG. 75, and the character selection effect C in FIG. 76 are the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right. When the effect symbol 8R (each effect symbol in a set of effect symbols) is within the period from the variable effect (variable display) to the stop display, or when the game ball enters the first start port 20. Execute when the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R (each effect symbol in one set of effect symbols) are not changed (variably displayed). You can do it. According to this configuration, if the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R (each effect symbol in one set of effect symbols) are in the variable effect (variable display), the player selects the select button 68 (variable display). Since there is a case where the first effect of selecting one option image from a plurality of option images is executed by operating the operation means) or the effect button 63 (operation means), the player's own favorite character image can be selected. You can increase your chances of choosing. Further, the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 (it is not accepted by the ball receiving port), and the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R (each effect symbol in one set of effect symbols) are displayed. When the variable effect (variable display) is not performed, the gaming ball does not easily enter the first starting port 20 even if the player is actually playing the game, or the gaming machine 1 is in a state of waiting for customers. Occasionally, when starting a game, the player can be given an opportunity to select a character image of the player's own preference.

[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the normal effect in the character selection effect B of FIG. 75 and the character selection effect C of FIG. 76 (after FIG. 75 (E) in the character selection effect B, FIG. In the following), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R (each effect symbol in one set of effect symbols) are represented by the numbers "1" (number symbols) to the numbers "9" (number symbols). A character symbol (decorative image) is attached to the number symbol) to display it in a variable manner as a normal effect symbol, and then stop and display it. Special effects in the character selection effect A of FIG. 74 and the character selection effect C of FIG. 76 (FIGS. 74 (E) to (I) as special effects in the character selection effect A, FIGS. 76 (C), (D) in the character selection effect C. )), The left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R (each effect symbol in one set of effect symbols) are the number "1" (number symbol) which is a number symbol constituting the normal effect symbol. ~ Number "1" (number pattern) ~ Number "9" (number pattern), which is a number pattern among the number "9" (number pattern) and the character pattern (decorative image), is enlarged and the character It is designed to be displayed in a variable manner as a special effect symbol that is composed without the symbol (decorative image) of, and then stopped and displayed. The size of the special effect symbol is smaller than the size of the normal effect symbol. According to this configuration, the variable effect (variable display) of the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R (each effect symbol in one set of effect symbols) is performed by the normal effect symbol or the special effect symbol. In this respect as well, it is possible to reduce the monotonousness of the variable effect (variable display) of the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a special effect is executed in the second effect in the character selection effect A in FIG. 74 and the character selection effect C in FIG. 76, and the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R ( When each effect symbol in a set of effect symbols) is variablely displayed as a special effect symbol, then stopped and displayed, and the lottery result of "hit" or "miss" is notified of "missing (loss)", the first The left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R (each effect symbol in one set of effect symbols) are normally performed by executing the normal effect without executing the special effect until the effect of is executed. It is possible to execute a third effect of displaying a variable display as an effect symbol and then stopping the display to notify the lottery result of "hit" or "missing" (in the character selection effect A, FIG. 74 (E). )-(L), FIGS. 76 (C)-(F) in the character selection effect C. According to this configuration, when the special effect is executed, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R (each effect symbol in one set of effect symbols) are used as special effect symbols for variable effect (variation). (Display) is not continued, but once the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R (each effect symbol in one set of effect symbols) are variablely displayed as special effect symbols, and then stopped and displayed. Then, in the next variation effect (variation display) (that is, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variation display position 9Cd and becomes the variation icon 9C), the special effect symbol is normally displayed. Since it is designed to switch to the production design, it is possible to make it difficult to lose the freshness of the special production design.

[Modification example]
A modified example of the character selection effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
The character selection effect A in FIG. 74, the character selection effect B in FIG. 75, and the character selection effect C in FIG. 76 are performed based on the fact that the game ball enters the first starting port 20 which is the ball receiving port. there were. In other words, it was performed in a so-called left-handed gaming state (normal gaming state). However, the game ball may be played based on the ball entering the second starting port 210, which is the ball receiving port. In other words, it may be performed in a so-called right-handed gaming state (a specific gaming state different from the normal gaming state). Further, the game ball may be played when it passes through the gate 28 which is the ball receiving port.

[Modification 2]
In the character selection effect A of FIG. 74 and the character selection effect B of FIG. 75, a part of the image CRE of the upper body of the character E (the portion from the chest to the face) was displayed in the character display area BS2. The character E, which is the image CRE of the upper body, may perform an operation that causes a change in the variable icon 9C and the hold icon 9A. For example, the character E, which is the image CRE of the upper body, may shoot a photosphere from the sword toward the variable icon 9C and change the variable icon 9C to the variable icon 9C', which has a higher expectation. As a so-called look-ahead effect, the hold icon 9A may be released toward the hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9A may be changed to the hold icon 9A'with a high degree of expectation. Further, in the character selection effect B of FIG. 75, a part of the image CRC of the upper body of the character C (the portion from the chest to the face) was displayed in the character display area BS2. The character C, which is the image CRC of the upper body, may perform an operation that causes a change in the variable icon 9C and the hold icon 9A. For example, the character C, which is the image CRC of the upper body, may shoot a light bulb from the sword toward the variable icon 9C and change to the variable icon 9C'with a high expectation by hitting the variable icon 9C. Then, as a so-called look-ahead effect, the hold icon 9A may be released toward the hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9A may be changed to the hold icon 9A'with a high degree of expectation.

[Modification 3]
In the character selection effect A of FIG. 74 and the character selection effect B of FIG. 75, a part of the image CRE of the upper body of the character E (the portion from the chest to the face) was displayed in the character display area BS2. The character E, which is the image CRE of the upper body, may be a moving image that moves around in the character display area BS2, or may be a moving image that jumps out of the character display area BS2 and moves around the display screen 7a. For example, as a moving image in which the character E, which is the image CRE of the upper body, jumps out of the character display area BS2 and moves around the display screen 7a, it moves toward the variable icon 9C, cuts the variable icon 9C with a sword, and the expectation is high. The hold icon 9A is changed to the variable icon 9C', or moved toward the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A is torn with a sword and the expectation is high. Of the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R (the middle effect symbol 8C is in the variable effect (variable display)), which is changed to'or is displayed as a temporary stop because the symbols with the same number are not aligned. In order to align with one of the symbols of one number, it is possible to move to the other effect symbol, tear it with a sword, align it with the symbol of the same number, and form a reach. Further, in the character selection effect B of FIG. 75, a part of the image CRC of the upper body of the character C (the portion from the chest to the face) was displayed in the character display area BS2. The character C, which is the image CRC of the upper body, may be a moving image that moves around in the character display area BS2, or may be a moving image that jumps out of the character display area BS2 and moves around the display screen 7a. For example, as a moving image in which the character C, which is the image CRC of the upper body, jumps out of the character display area BS2 and moves around the display screen 7a, it moves toward the variable icon 9C, cuts the variable icon 9C with a sword, and the expectation is high. The hold icon 9A is changed to the variable icon 9C', or moved toward the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A is torn with a sword and the expectation is high. Of the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R (the middle effect symbol 8C is in the variable effect (variable display)), which is changed to'or is displayed as a temporary stop because the symbols with the same number are not aligned. In order to align with one of the symbols of one number, it is possible to move to the other effect symbol, tear it with a sword, align it with the symbol of the same number, and form a reach.

[Modification example 4]
In the character selection effect A of FIG. 74 and the character selection effect B of FIG. 75, a part of the image CRE of the upper body of the character E (the portion from the chest to the face) was displayed in the character display area BS2. The character E, which is the image CRE of the upper body, may be able to change by throwing an item from the character display area BS2 toward the variable icon 9C, the hold icon 9A, and various effect symbols. For example, items include swords, treasure chests, photospheres, and icons. When an item collides with the variable icon 9C, the variable icon 9C becomes difficult to see due to the collided effect image, and as the effect image disappears, the variable icon 9C appears and changes or changes to the variable icon 9C with higher expectation. Instead, the current variable icon 9C may remain. When an item collides with the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A becomes difficult to see due to the collided effect image, and the hold icon 9A appears as the effect image disappears, increasing the expectation of hitting. It may change to the hold icon 9A, or it may remain unchanged as the current hold icon 9A. When an item collides with the left effect symbol 8L that is temporarily stopped, for example, the left effect symbol 8L becomes difficult to see due to the collision effect image, and the left effect symbol 8L appears as the effect image disappears, which is the same as the right effect symbol 8L. It changes to a numerical symbol, forms a reach, does not change to a symbol with the same number as the right effect symbol 8L, and remains the current left effect symbol 8L.

[Modification 5]
In the character selection effect A of FIG. 74, the character selection effect B of FIG. 75, and the character selection effect C of the addition figure X3, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are card-type effects as normal effect symbols. It is a symbol, and a symbol of a character corresponding to the symbol of a number is attached to a symbol of a number (number "1" to "9") in the card. The number "1" is given a character A, the number "2" is given a character B, the number "3" is given a character C, the number "4" is given a character D, and the number "4" is given a character ". A character E is attached to "5", a character F is attached to the number "6", and a display mode different from that of the character A (the character A attached to the number "1") is attached to the number "7". ) Is attached, the number "8" is attached with the character C (the display mode is different from the character C attached to the number "3"), and the number "9" is attached with the character G. rice field. In this way, the character A is attached to the number "1" and the number "2" and overlaps, and the character C is attached to the number "3" and the number "8" and overlaps. The seven characters A to G may be divided into two groups, and symbols representing each group may be attached to the normal effect symbol. For example, four characters, character A, character C, character E, and character G, belong to group A (in other words, the character attached to an odd numbered symbol), and the group symbol "A" is used. It is usually attached to the lower left side of the production symbol, and three characters, character B, character D, and character F, belong to the B group (in other words, the character attached to the symbol with an even number), and it is a group symbol. A certain "B" is usually attached to the lower left side of the production pattern.

[Modification 6]
The character selection effect A in FIG. 74, the character selection effect B in FIG. 75, and the character selection effect C in FIG. 76 are the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are card-type effect symbols as normal effect symbols. In contrast to the number symbols (numbers "1" to "9") with the character symbols corresponding to the number symbols on the card, the special production symbols As a result, the figures of the cards and the symbols of the characters that normally constitute the effect symbols disappeared, and the size of the number symbols was expanded to the extent that it became the size of the character symbols, and only the number symbols were held. However, the configuration of the normal effect symbol and the configuration of the special effect symbol may be interchanged. That is, as a special effect symbol, it is a card type effect symbol, and a number symbol (number "1" to number "9") is configured to have a character symbol corresponding to the number symbol. On the other hand, as a normal effect symbol, the card figures and character symbols that make up the special effect symbol disappear, and the size of the number symbol is expanded to the extent that it becomes the size of the character symbol, and only the number symbol is held. It may be configured.

[Modification 7]
The character selection effect A in FIG. 74, the character selection effect B in FIG. 75, and the character selection effect C in FIG. 76 may not include a part of the described effects, or may have other effects added. ..

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect D1-1]
It is a gaming machine provided with a display means for displaying a set of production symbols capable of drawing a lottery based on the fact that the game ball is accepted at the ball entrance and notifying the lottery result of the lottery.
A first effect in which a plurality of option images including a plurality of character images are displayed on the display means and a player operates the operation means to select one option image from the plurality of option images.
When the one option image selected in the first effect is any of the plurality of character images, a second effect that executes a special effect different from the normal effect is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect D1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-1.
The second effect executes the normal effect when the one option image selected in the first effect is not one of the plurality of character images.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect D1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-2.
When the character image, which is the one-choice image selected in the first effect, is displayed on the display means, the special effect is displayed larger than each effect symbol in the set of effect symbols.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect D1-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-2 or aspect D1-3.
The first effect is when the effect symbols in the set of effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner to when they are stopped and displayed, or when the game ball is not accepted by the ball receiving port. This can be executed when each effect symbol in a set of effect symbols is not displayed in a variable manner.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect D1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D1-2 to D1-4.
In the normal effect, each effect symbol in the set of effect symbols is variablely displayed as a normal effect symbol composed of a number symbol with a decorative image, and then stopped and displayed.
In the special effect, each effect symbol in the set of effect symbols is provided with the decorative symbol by enlarging the size of the number symbol among the number symbol and the decorative image constituting the normal effect symbol. After changing the display as a special effect pattern that is composed of no characters, it is stopped and displayed.
The size of the special effect symbol is smaller than the size of the normal effect symbol.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect D1-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-5.
When the special effect is executed in the second effect, each effect symbol in the set of effect symbols is variablely displayed as the special effect symbol, then stopped and displayed, and the lottery result is notified of the loss, the above-mentioned Until the first effect is executed, by executing the normal effect without executing the special effect, each effect symbol in the set of effect symbols is variablely displayed as the normal effect symbol, and then stopped and displayed. A third effect of notifying the lottery result is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

The display effects A to C by the effect device will be described below with reference to FIGS. 77 to 79. 77 to 79, various movable accessories and various decorative members arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and arranged on the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 may be omitted for the sake of legibility of the drawing. 77 is a diagram for explaining the display effect A by the effect device, FIG. 78 is a diagram for explaining the display effect B by the effect device, and FIG. 79 is a diagram for explaining the display effect C by the effect device. It is a figure.

Here, a case where the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 formed of the colorless transparent member which is a transparent flat plate member is not attached to the central opening of the front frame 53 but is attached to the game board 2 will be described. The illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 is attached to the game board 2 so as to be arranged between the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the decorative member 10 formed of the colored opaque member. As a result, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 → the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 → the decorative member 10 are arranged on the game board 2 in this order from the front. Further, although the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 is arranged on the front side of the image display device 7, the size of the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 is one compared to the size of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Since it is formed to be about two times smaller than the surroundings, it does not cover the entire area of the display screen 7a, but covers a part of the display screen 7a.

Further, here, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R of the first movable accessory 14 are formed of a colorless transparent member, and the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R of the first movable accessory 14 are formed. By irradiating the light of an LED (a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors) from each end face, it is possible to change its own light emitting mode. The left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R of the first movable accessory 14 have light guide portions formed along the outer periphery thereof, respectively, and the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 and the right movable accessory 14R are formed. The light guide portion emits light by irradiating the light of an LED (a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors) from each end face of the object 14R, so that the outer shape (contour) of the object 14R emits light.

In the display effect by this effect device, various movable accessories (first movable accessory 14, second movable accessory 15, third) are covered so as to cover a part of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 that displays various images. The movable accessory 17), the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18, the decorative member 10, and the like are arranged in front of the display screen 7a, and among the various movable accessories, the first specific movable accessory (first movable accessory 14, second). Of the images displayed on the display screen 7a via the movable accessory 15), the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18, and the like, the first specific movable accessory (first movable accessory 14, second movable accessory 15). ), Illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 and the like, it may be possible to perform an effect that allows the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a corresponding to the rear to be visually recognized. Of the images displayed on the display screen 7a via the movable accessory (third movable accessory 17), the decorative member 10, and the like, the display screen corresponding to the rear of the second specific movable accessory, the decorative member 10, and the like. In some cases, it is possible to perform an effect that can make the image displayed in the area 7a difficult to see.

That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute a display effect by the effect device, the image control microcomputer 101 reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7, an image is displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 15a provided in the second movable accessory 15, and the sub liquid crystal device provided in the third movable accessory 17. The image is displayed on the display screen of the (liquid crystal panel) 17a, or the image is displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided in the decorative member 10.

Further, when the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute a display effect by the effect device, the position of the second movable accessory 15 provided in the game board 2 is included. The left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 formed by the colorless transparent member provided in the game board 2 can be changed, or the position of the third movable accessory 17 provided in the game board 2 can be changed. LED (multicolor light emission) from each end face of the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R of the first movable accessory 14 formed by changing the position of the accessory 14R or the colorless transparent member provided in the game board 2. It is possible to change its own light emission mode by irradiating the light of a possible full-color LED), or from the end face of an illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 formed by a colorless transparent member provided in the game board 2, an LED (a full-color LED capable of multicolor light emission). ) Is used to display an image on the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18.

The structure of the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 15a provided in the second movable accessory 15, the structure of the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 17a provided in the third movable accessory 17, and the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal) provided in the decorative member 10. The structure of the panel) 13 is the same as that of the image display device 7. That is, various images displayed on the display screen 7a can be visually recognized by the built-in backlight of the image display device 7 emitting light. By emitting light from the built-in backlight of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 15a provided in the second movable accessory 15, various images displayed on the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 15a can be visually recognized. ing. By emitting light from the built-in backlight of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 17a provided in the third movable accessory 17, various images displayed on the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 17a can be visually recognized. ing. The built-in backlight in the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided in the decorative member 10 emits light so that various images displayed on the display screen can be visually recognized.

The display effect by the effect device is the image display device 7, the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15 (sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 15a provided in the second movable accessory 15), and the third movable accessory 17. (Sub liquid crystal display (liquid crystal panel) 17a provided in the third movable accessory 17, illumination panel (light guide plate) 18, decorative member 10 (sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided in the decorative member 10), etc. It is designed to be used.

Further, the plurality of movable accessories (plurality of movable bodies) such as the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the third movable accessory 17 are among the plurality of movable accessories (plurality of movable bodies). When any one movable accessory (one movable body) or two movable accessories (two movable bodies) is activated during the variable effect (variable display) of the plurality of effect symbols, the plurality of movable accessories (variable display) Compared to when all of the multiple movable bodies are not activated, the hit occurs after the variable effect (variable display) of the multiple effect symbols ends (that is, after the multiple effect symbols are stopped and displayed). It suggests to the player that the degree of expectation is high. Therefore, the player is highly interested in the operation of the first movable accessory 14, the operation of the second movable accessory 15, and the operation of the third movable accessory 17.

When a predetermined image is displayed on the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 by irradiating the light of the LED (full-color LED capable of multicolor light emission) from the end face of the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18, the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 Compared to the case where the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 is not displayed with the light of the LED (full-color LED capable of multicolor emission) from the end face, the variation effect (variation display) of a plurality of effect symbols It suggests to the player that there is a high degree of expectation that a hit will occur after the end (that is, after a plurality of effect symbols are stopped and displayed). Therefore, the player is highly interested in displaying a predetermined image on the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18.

Here, first, the effect design will be briefly described, and the display effect A by the effect device, the display effect B by the effect device, and the display effect C by the effect device will be described in order.

[Direction design]
On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, for example, as shown in FIG. 77 (H), the left effect symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle effect symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right effect symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are card type. It is a directing symbol, and a number symbol (number "1" to number "9") is attached with a character symbol corresponding to the number symbol in the card. The number "7" has a bright red color. The odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" except the number "7" all have the same bright green color. The even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" all have the same bright blue color. Each of the number symbols (odd number symbol and even number symbol) is composed of various character symbols having a plurality of colors (full color), and the character symbol is displayed in a large size as the main body of the effect symbol. NS. Therefore, the size of the number symbol is smaller than the size of the character symbol attached to the number symbol. In this way, since the numerical symbols (odd-numbered symbols and even-numbered symbols) each have a color, for example, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are aligned with the same number symbol and temporarily stopped. When the reach is formed and the effect is developed after that, the player develops the color of the number symbol temporarily stopped as the number of experiences of the effect developed via the reach increases. It is possible to get an opportunity to discover the relationship (law) between the production and the player. As a result, the numerical symbols (odd-numbered symbols and even-numbered symbols) each have a color, which can contribute to the improvement of the interest.

Specifically, the number "1" is given a character A, the number "2" is given a character B, the number "3" is given a character C, and the number "4" is given a character D. The number "5" is attached with the character E, the number "6" is attached with the character F, and the number "7" is attached with the character A (a display mode different from the character A attached to the number "1". The number "8" is attached with a character C (the display mode is different from that of the character C attached to the number "3"), and the number "9" is a character. G is attached. In this way, although the character A is attached to the numbers "1" and the number "2" and overlaps, and the character C is attached to the numbers "3" and the number "8" respectively and overlaps, the character's design The display mode of is different.

The left effect symbol 8L of the three-dimensional image, the middle effect symbol 8C of the three-dimensional image, and the right effect symbol 8R of the three-dimensional image are each variable region extending from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a, and each effect symbol is a number "1". → Number "2" → Number "3" → Number "4" → Number "5" → Number "6" → Number "7" → Number "8" → Number "9" → Number "1" → Number "2" The variation effect (variation display) of the effect symbol is started in the display mode in which the reels are rotated in the order of "→ ...".

Fluctuation of effect symbol When the effect (variation display) is started, the stopped-displayed effect symbol once moves slowly (at low speed) in a display mode in which it floats upward by a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 mm) (at a low speed). In other words, since the stop display of the effect symbol is canceled, the effect symbol is set to the display mode in which it is about to move), and then gradually increases from low speed to the lower side and becomes translucent from an opaque state. The display mode changes to a state and fluctuates at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the effect symbol can be visually recognized via the semi-transparent effect symbol during high-speed fluctuation. Immediately before stopping, the effect symbol decelerates and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state where the temporary stop is displayed, the effect symbol has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

To briefly explain the variable icon and the hold icon, for example, as shown in FIG. 77 (A), it corresponds to the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R that are currently changing as the digestion of the first special figure hold. The variable icon 9C is displayed (placed) at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a first hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold. In this first hold display area, hold icons 9A can be displayed (placed) at each of the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four hold icons 9A are stocked. You can do it. The four hold display positions 9Ad are the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The display positions 9Ad are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a.

Although the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad both have a rectangular shape, they may have the same size or different sizes. In the present embodiment, the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad both have a rectangular shape, and the size of the variable display position 9Cd (horizontal distance dimension) is the size of the hold display position 9Ad (horizontal distance). It is larger than the dimension (dimensions) (the distance dimensions in the vertical direction are the same). This is to make it possible to distinguish between the variable icon 9C displayed at the variable display position 9Cd and the hold icon 9A displayed at the hold display position 9Ad.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbol. In addition to the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21, the first based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20. The special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown). The number of 1st special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 1st start port 20 is on the left side in blue numbers, and the number of 2nd special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 2nd start port 21 is red. The numbers are arranged on the upper right side of the display screen 7a in a state of being separated from each other on the right side and are always displayed. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values of the number of reserved balls, they can be easily discriminated by being mixed with various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. It should be noted that these numbers are always arranged and displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, and further, they are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a and other images are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a. Since it is arranged and displayed at the rear, the visibility is not hindered by other images.

[Display effect A by effect device]
Next, the display effect A by the effect device will be described with reference to FIG. 77. As shown in FIG. 77 (A), the city image HG1 is displayed as a background image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the variation effect (variation display) of the effect symbol is started. At this time, both the second movable accessory 15 and the third movable accessory 17 are in a stationary state at the retracted position, and the display screen and the second display screen of the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 15a provided in the second movable accessory 15. 3 The image is not displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 17a provided in the movable accessory 17.

After that, as shown in FIG. 77 (B), the second movable accessory 15 starts moving from the retracted position to the advanced position (center position of the display screen 7a), and accordingly, the second movable accessory 15 moves to the second movable accessory 15. An image is displayed on the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 15a provided. This image is the same as the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the second movable accessory 15 based on the position of the second movable accessory 15. There is. That is, among the images displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the image is displayed in the area of the display screen 7a corresponding to the second movable accessory 15 moving in front of the display screen 7a. Since one image is blocked by the second movable accessory 15, the first image, which is the blocked image, is displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 15a provided in the second movable accessory 15. The first image displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 can be visually recognized via the display screen of the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 15a provided in the second movable accessory 15. There is. When the second movable accessory 15 starts moving from the retracted position to the advanced position, the first image displayed on the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 15a provided in the second movable accessory 15 is a background image. A certain city image HG1 becomes a medium effect symbol 8C in a variable effect (variable display).

The arm is moved via the arm member 15b (the arm member 15b is colored opaque and has a design) that moves the second movable accessory 15 from the retracted position to the advanced position (center position of the display screen 7a). The image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the member 15b is difficult to see.

After that, when the second movable accessory 15 is moving from the retracted position to the advanced position (center position of the display screen 7a), one lightning bolt runs from the upper right to the lower left of the display screen 7a and blinks. The flash image IG1 is displayed on the display screen 7a for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) (the flash image IG1 displayed in the display mode in which one lightning bolt runs is a moving image (moving image)). At this time, the first image displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 15a provided in the second movable accessory 15 is the city image HG1 which is the background image, and the medium effect symbol in the variation effect (variation display). 8C, flash image IG1.

After that, when the second movable accessory 15 reaches the advance position (center position of the display screen 7a) from the retracted position and becomes stationary, the third movable accessory 17 retracts as shown in FIG. 77 (C). When the movement starts from the position to the advance position, the image is displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the third movable accessory 17 based on the position of the third movable accessory 17. The image being displayed is blocked by the third movable accessory 17. That is, among the images displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a corresponding to the third movable accessory 17 moving in front of the display screen 7a. The two images will be blocked by the third movable accessory 17. The second image, which is the blocked image, is not displayed at all on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 17a provided in the third movable accessory 17, and the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) provided in the third movable accessory 17 is not displayed at all. ) The second image can be made difficult to see through the display screen of 17a. At this time, the second image is the city image HG1 which is the background image and the left effect symbol 8L in the variation effect (variation display).

After that, as a display mode in which two lightning bolts run from the upper left to the lower right of the display screen 7a, the blinking flash images IG2 and IG2 are displayed on the display screen 7a for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) (two lightning bolts). The flash images IG2 and IG2 displayed in the display mode in which the image is running are moving images (moving images)). At this time, the first image (that is, that is, the first image displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 15a provided in the second movable accessory 15 that is stationary at the advanced position (center position of the display screen 7a)). The image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the second movable accessory 15) is the urban image HG1 which is the background image, and the medium effect symbol 8C in the variation effect (variation display). There are two flash images IG2 and IG2. On the other hand, no image is still displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 17a provided in the third movable accessory 17 moving toward the advance position. , The second image (that is, the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the third movable accessory 17) is still obstructed by the third movable accessory 17 and is difficult to see. It has become. The second image is the city image HG1 which is the background image and the left effect symbol 8L in the variation effect (variation display) in FIG. 77 (C).

After that, when the flash images IG2 and IG2 disappear from the display screen 7a and the third movable accessory 17 reaches the advance position from the retracted position and becomes stationary (the advance position of the third movable accessory 17 is the second. In a state where the movable accessory 15 is stopped at its own advance position (center position of the display screen 7a), the position where the third movable accessory 17 and the second movable accessory 15 do not overlap (do not interfere with each other) in the front-rear direction. As shown in FIG. 77 (D), the right end of the third movable accessory 17 and the left end of the second movable accessory 15 are separated by a predetermined distance dimension (for example, 10 mm). The display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 17a provided in the third movable accessory 17 instead of the display screen 7a of the display device 7 is displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 17a. As a display mode in which one lightning bolt runs, a blinking flash image IG3 is displayed as a third image on the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal display (liquid crystal panel) 17a for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) (a display mode in which one lightning bolt runs). The flash image IG3 displayed in is a moving image (moving image)). Even at this point, since the flashing flash image IG3 is displayed on the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 17a provided in the third movable accessory 17, the image display corresponding to the rear of the third movable accessory 17 is displayed. The second image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the device 7 is in a state where it is difficult to see through the third movable accessory 17. In FIG. 77 (D), the second image is the city image HG1 which is the background image, the left effect symbol 8L in the variation effect (variation display), the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold display position 9Ad. (If there is a hold icon 9A at the third hold display position 9Ad and the fourth hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A is also included). As described above, the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 17a provided in the third movable accessory 17 is displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the third movable accessory 17. The second image is not displayed, and a third image called the flashing flash image IG3, which is completely different from the second image, is displayed.

The third image was a flash image IG3, but depending on the type of image, the degree of expectation for hitting the fluctuation (in the fluctuation effect (variation display) by the variation icon 9C, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right) It suggests the degree of expectation of hitting the effect symbol 8R). The type of image is different from the second image, and includes flash image, item image, mini character image, intense heat character image, etc. Flash image → item image → mini character image → intense heat character image (rich per hit) The degree of expectation is getting higher in this order.

After that, the flash image IG3 disappears from the display screen of the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 17a, and as shown in FIG. 77 (E), the second movable accessory 15 is retracted from the advanced position (center position of the display screen 7a). The movement starts toward the position, and the third movable accessory 17 also starts moving from the advance position to the evacuation position. At this time, the first image displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 15a provided in the second movable accessory 15 moving toward the retracted position (that is, behind the second movable accessory 15). The image) displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the corresponding image display device 7 is the city image HG1 which is the background image and the medium effect symbol 8C in the variation effect (variation display). On the other hand, no image is displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 17a provided in the third movable accessory 17 moving toward the evacuation position. The second image (that is, the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the third movable accessory 17) is still obstructed by the third movable accessory 17 and is difficult to see. It has become. The second image is the city image HG1 which is the background image and the left effect symbol 8L in the variation effect (variation display) in FIG. 77 (E).

After that, when the second movable accessory 15 returns to the retracted position and becomes stationary, and the third movable accessory 17 returns to the retracted position and becomes stationary, first, as shown in FIG. 77 (F), the left effect is produced. When the character symbol 8Lb is attached to the symbol 8La of the number "1" in which the symbol 8L has a bright green color and the temporary stop is displayed, then the right effect symbol 8R becomes the symbol 8La of the number "1" having a bright green color. The character symbol 8Lb is attached and temporarily stopped, the middle effect symbol 8C is in the variable effect (variable display), and the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are aligned with the same symbol and temporarily stopped to form a reach. Will be done. The left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed at the same time, so that the middle effect symbol 8C is in the variable effect (variable display), and the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are the same symbol. It may be temporarily stopped at the same time to form a reach.

When the reach is formed, it develops into a battle production as shown in FIG. 77 (G). In the battle production, the ally character CRA appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, the enemy character CRB appears from the left side of the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight in the center of the display screen 7a. The degree is set high in advance. In the battle effect, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are hidden on the display screen 7a (disappears from the display screen 7a), and the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the hold icon are displayed. 9A is hidden on the display screen 7a (disappears from the display screen 7a), and the background image is switched from the city image HG1 to the battle-dedicated background image HG4. Even in the state of developing into a battle production, the number of reserved balls described above is used as a numerical value, and the number of reserved first special figures based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 20 is shown in blue numbers on the left side and the second. The number of the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port 21 is arranged and displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a in a state of being separated from each other on the right side by a red number.

After that, when the ally character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins in the battle production, the background image returns (switches) from the battle-dedicated background image HG4 to the city image HG1 again (switches) as shown in FIG. 77 (H), and the left production. The symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed again on the display screen 7a, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C and the hold icon 9A are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the left effect symbol 8L. The character symbol 8Lb is attached to the symbol 8La of the number "1" having a bright green color and temporarily stopped, and the symbol 8Cb of the character is attached to the symbol 8Ca of the number "2" in which the middle effect symbol 8C has a bright blue color. Temporary stop is displayed, and the character symbol 8Lb is attached to the symbol 8La of the number "1" in which the right effect symbol 8R has a bright green color, and the character symbol 8Lb is temporarily stopped. , The middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R are not aligned with the same symbol (here, the number "1"), and the deviation is confirmed. Along with this, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. When the ally character CRA defeats the enemy character CRB in the battle effect, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (here, the number "1"). , The stop display is displayed at the same timing, and the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are aligned with the same symbol (here, the number "1"), and the hit is confirmed. Along with this, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a, and then the winning game in which the player is given a profit is started.

Subsequently, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the change display position 9Cd and becomes the change icon 9C, as shown in FIG. 77 (I), the change effect (variation display) of the effect symbol is obtained. ) Is started, and the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R change from an opaque state to a translucent state all at once (at the same time), and the display mode changes at high speed. When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad. However, the hold icon 9A is not digested and only one is in stock.

After that, when the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are not aligned with the same symbol and are stopped and displayed, the deviation is confirmed, whereas the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right When the effect symbols 8R are aligned and stopped and displayed with the same symbol, the winning is confirmed, and then the winning game in which the player is given a profit is started.

In this way, when the second movable accessory 15 starts moving in the display effect A by the effect device, the second movable accessory 15 is moved to the rear of the second movable accessory 15 based on the position of the second movable accessory 15. The first image, which is an image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the corresponding image display device 7, is now displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 15a provided in the second movable accessory 15. Therefore, the first image, which is an image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the second movable accessory 15, is visually recognized via the second movable accessory 15. You can do it. On the other hand, when the third movable accessory 17 starts moving, the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the third movable accessory 17 is based on the position of the third movable accessory 17. Since the second image, which is an image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a, is not displayed at all on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 17a provided in the third movable accessory 17, the third movable The second image, which is an image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the accessory 17, can be made difficult to see through the third movable accessory 17. It has become.

Further, the image display device 7 displays an image on the display screen 7a when its own built-in backlight emits light, and the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 15a provided in the second movable accessory 15 emits its own built-in backlight. By doing so, the image is displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 15a, and further, the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the second movable accessory 15. A certain first image is displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 15a by emitting light from the built-in backlight of the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 15a provided in the second movable accessory 15. Therefore, the first image, which is an image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the second movable accessory 15, can be visually recognized via the second movable accessory 15. You can do it.

On the other hand, the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 17a provided in the third movable accessory 17 emits light from its own built-in backlight so that an image is displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 17a. However, the second image, which is an image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the third movable accessory 17, is a sub liquid crystal display provided in the third movable accessory 17. Since the built-in backlight of the (liquid crystal panel) 17a is not displayed at all on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 17a regardless of whether or not it emits light, it corresponds to the rear of the third movable accessory 17. The second image, which is an image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, can be made difficult to see through the third movable accessory 17.

[Display effect B by effect device]
Next, the display effect B by the effect device will be described with reference to FIG. 78. As shown in FIG. 78 (A), the city image HG1 is displayed as a background image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the variation effect (variation display) of the effect symbol is started. At this time, the image by the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 formed of the colorless transparent member is hidden. Further, an image is displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided in the decorative member 10 arranged on the lower right front side of the image display device 7 and covering the lower right region (a part of the display screen 7a) of the display screen 7a. It is not displayed at all. The decorative member 10 is arranged on the lower right front side of the image display device 7 and is fixed so as to cover the lower right region (a part of the display screen 7a) of the display screen 7a.

Although the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 is arranged on the front side of the image display device 7 as described above, the size of the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 is the size of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Since it is formed to be about one to two times smaller than its size, it does not cover the entire area of the display screen 7a, but covers a part of the display screen 7a. Further, since the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 is formed of a colorless transparent member, the illumination panel (guide) is irradiated with light from an LED (full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors) from the end face of the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18. Even when a predetermined image is displayed on the light plate) 18, the image displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 can be visually recognized via the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18. It has become.

The decorative member 10 is formed of a colored opaque member and is arranged on the lower right front side of the image display device 7, and is further arranged in front of the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18. That is, since the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 → the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 → the decorative member 10 are arranged on the game board 2 in the order of the front, the image display device corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10. The image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of 7 is obscured by the decorative member 10 and is difficult to see, and is displayed in the area of the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10. The image may be obstructed by the decorative member 10 and difficult to see.

After that, as shown in FIG. 78 (B), the ally character CRA, which is an image, is irradiated from the end face of the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 by the light of the LED (full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors) to the illumination panel (light guide plate). It is displayed at 18. Although the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 is arranged on the front side of the image display device 7, it is formed of a colorless transparent member, so that the ally character CRA is displayed on the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18. Even if there is, the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 can be visually recognized via the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18. It has become like. That is, among the images displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a corresponding to the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 arranged in front of the display screen 7a. Even if the ally character CRA is displayed on the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 in which a first image is formed of a colorless transparent member, the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 does not completely block the first image. One image can be visually recognized via the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18.

At this time, the first image that can be visually recognized through the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 on which the ally character CRA is displayed is the city image HG1 that is the background image and the left effect symbol in the variation effect (variation display). 8L, medium effect symbol 8C during variable effect (variable display), right effect symbol 8R during variable effect (variable display), variable display position 9Cd, hold display position 9Ad, variable icon 9C and hold icon 9A, above-mentioned hold ball The number of the first special figure based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is on the left side in blue numbers, and the second special figure based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 The number of holds is displayed in red numbers on the upper right side of the display screen 7a in a state of being separated from each other on the right side).

On the other hand, since the decorative member 10 is formed of a colored opaque member, is arranged on the lower right side in front of the image display device 7, and covers the lower right region (a part of the display screen 7a) of the display screen 7a. The image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10 is blocked by the decorative member 10. That is, among the images displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a decorative member arranged on the lower right front side of the image display device 7 and covering the lower right area (a part of the display screen 7a) of the display screen 7a. The second image, which is an image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a corresponding to 10, is blocked by the decorative member 10. The second image, which is the blocked image, may not be displayed at all on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided in the decorative member 10, and the second image may be difficult to see through the decorative member 10. You can do it. At this time, the second image is the city image HG1 which is the background image and the right effect symbol 8R in the variation effect (variation display). Even at the time of FIG. 78 (B), no image is displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided in the decorative member 10.

Since the decorative member 10 is further arranged in front of the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18, the image displayed in the area of the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10 is decorated. It may be blocked by the member 10. The illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 is configured to be able to display a predetermined image on the main surface by irradiating the end surface with LED light. The illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 is configured to be capable of displaying a plurality of types of images in a plurality of types of colors depending on the irradiation direction and color of the LED light. Therefore, the image displayed on the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 may be blocked by the decorative member 10.

After that, as shown in FIG. 78 (C), the ally character CRA, which is an image, is irradiated from the end face of the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 by the light of the LED (full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors) to the illumination panel (light guide plate). The upper body of the ally character CRA in the form of a wing man is displayed large as a third image on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided in the decorative member 10 while being displayed in the state of 18. Even at this point, the second image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10 is blocked by the decorative member 10 and is difficult to see through the decorative member 10. On the other hand, on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided in the decorative member 10, the upper body of the ally character CRA in the form of a wing man, which is the third image, is displayed in a large size. Further, when the image displayed in the area of the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10 is blocked by the decorative member 10, it is difficult to see. The second image is the city image HG1 which is a background image and the right effect symbol 8R in the variation effect (variation display) in FIG. 78 (C). As described above, on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided in the decorative member 10, the second image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10 is displayed. It is not displayed, and the third image of the upper body of the ally character CRA in the form of a wing man, which is completely different from the second image, is displayed.

The third image was a mini character image which is a ally character CRA in the form of a wing man, but depending on the type of image, the hit expectation for the fluctuation (the left effect symbol in the variation effect (variation display) by the variation icon 9C). 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R (expectation of hit) is suggested. The type of image is different from the second image, and includes flash image, item image, mini character image, intense heat character image, etc. Flash image → item image → mini character image → intense heat character image (rich per hit) The degree of expectation is getting higher in this order.

After that, as shown in FIG. 78 (D), the ally character CRA, which is an image, is irradiated from the end face of the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 by the light of the LED (full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors) to the illumination panel (light guide plate). While still displayed on 18, the flash FL jumps into the display screen 7a from the outside of the lower side of the display screen 7a and slightly to the right of the center of the lower side so as to draw a counterclockwise elliptical orbit, and heads toward the right side of the display screen 7a. When it passes through and jumps out to the outside of the right side of the display screen 7a, it jumps into the display screen 7a from the outside of the upper side of the display screen 7a and slightly to the right of the center of the upper side, and stops near the center of the display screen 7a to explode. (The flash FL is a moving image (moving image)). The flash FL is arranged in front of the city image HG1 which is a background image, and is arranged and displayed behind various effect symbols in the variation effect (variation display). The first image that can be visually recognized through the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 on which the ally character CRA is displayed while the flash FL is displayed on the display screen 7a is a background image of the city image HG1 and the flash FL. , Left effect symbol 8L during variable effect (variable display), medium effect symbol 8C during variable effect (variable display), right effect symbol 8R during variable effect (variable display), variable display position 9Cd, hold display position 9Ad, The variable icon 9C and the hold icon 9A, the number of the above-mentioned hold balls is a numerical value (the number of the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 is a blue number on the left side, to the second start port 21. The number of the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball is displayed in red numbers on the upper right side of the display screen 7a in a state of being separated from each other on the right side).

On the other hand, the second image, which is an image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10, is a background image such as a city image HG1, a flash FL, and a variation effect ( It becomes the right effect symbol 8R in the variable display). Even at this point, the second image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10 is blocked by the decorative member 10 and is difficult to see through the decorative member 10. On the other hand, on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided in the decorative member 10, the upper body of the ally character CRA in the form of a wing man, which is the third image, remains displayed in a large size. There is. Since the decorative member 10 is further arranged in front of the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18, the image displayed in the area of the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10 is decorated. It may be blocked by the member 10. As described above, even at this time, the display screen of the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided in the decorative member 10 is displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10. The second image is not displayed, and the third image of the upper body of the ally character CRA in the form of a wing man, which is completely different from the second image, is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 78 (E), the ally character CRA, which is an image, is irradiated from the end face of the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 by the light of the LED (full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors) to the illumination panel (light guide plate). When the character symbol 8Lb is attached to the symbol 8La of the number "1" in which the left effect symbol 8L has a bright green color and the character symbol 8Lb is temporarily stopped while being displayed in 18, the right production symbol 8R is subsequently bright. The character symbol 8Rb is attached to the blue number "2" symbol 8Ra and temporarily stopped, and then the character symbol 8Cb is attached to the number "3" symbol 8Ca in which the middle effect symbol 8C has a bright green color. It is displayed as a temporary stop. After the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed at the same time, the middle effect symbol 8C may be temporarily stopped and displayed.

When the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a, they can be visually recognized through the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 on which the ally character CRA is displayed. The first images that can be created are the city image HG1 which is a background image, the left effect symbol 8L which is temporarily stopped, the middle effect symbol 8C which is temporarily stopped, the right effect symbol 8R which is temporarily stopped, and the variable display position. 9Cd, hold display position 9Ad, variable icon 9C and hold icon 9A, the number of hold balls mentioned above is a numerical value (the number of first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 is on the left side in blue numbers , The number of 2nd special figure reservations based on the entry of the game ball into the 2nd starting port 21 is displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a in a state of being separated from each other on the right side by red numbers). ..

On the other hand, the second image, which is an image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10, is the city image HG1 which is a background image. Even at this point, the second image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10 is blocked by the decorative member 10 and is difficult to see through the decorative member 10. On the other hand, on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided in the decorative member 10, the upper body of the ally character CRA in the form of a wing man, which is the third image, is displayed in a large size. Since the decorative member 10 is further arranged in front of the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18, the image displayed in the area of the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10 is decorated. It may be blocked by the member 10. As described above, even at this time, the display screen of the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided in the decorative member 10 is displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10. The second image is not displayed, and the third image of the upper body of the ally character CRA in the form of a wing man, which is completely different from the second image, is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 78 (F), the ally character CRA, which is an image, is illuminated by stopping the irradiation of the light of the LED (full-color LED capable of multicolor emission) from the end face of the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18. It is a third image that is not displayed on the panel (light guide plate) 18 (disappears from the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18) and is displayed large on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided in the decorative member 10. The upper body of the ally character CRA in the form of a wing man is hidden (the third image disappears from the display screen of the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided in the decorative member 10), and then, at the same timing, the left effect symbol 8L, The middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, and the symbols are not aligned with each other, and the deviation is confirmed. Along with this, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

At this time, since the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 is formed of a colorless transparent member, the first image that can be visually recognized through the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 is a background image, the city image HG1, and the stop. The left effect symbol 8L displayed, the middle effect symbol 8C stopped and displayed, the right effect symbol 8R stopped and displayed, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A, and the number of hold balls described above. Numerical value (the number of 1st special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 1st start port 20 is on the left side in blue numbers, and the number of 2nd special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 2nd start port 21 Is displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a in a state of being separated from each other on the right side by a red number). On the other hand, the second image, which is an image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10, is the city image HG1 which is a background image.

Subsequently, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, as shown in FIG. 78 (G), the effect symbol is changed (variable display). ) Is started, and the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R change from an opaque state to a translucent state all at once (at the same time), and the display mode changes at high speed. When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad. However, the hold icon 9A is not digested and only one is in stock.

After that, when the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are not aligned with the same symbol and are stopped and displayed, the deviation is confirmed, whereas the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right When the effect symbols 8R are aligned and stopped and displayed with the same symbol, the winning is confirmed, and then the winning game in which the player is given a profit is started.

In this way, in the display effect B by the effect device, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 → the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 → the decorative member 10 are arranged in the order of the display screen 7a → the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 → the decorative member 10 on the game board 2 in this order. When the ally character CRA is displayed on the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18, the first image is an image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18. Since the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 is formed of a colorless transparent member, the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 can be visually recognized through the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18. On the other hand, since the decorative member 10 is formed of a colored opaque member, the second image, which is an image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10. It is possible to make it difficult to see through the decorative member 10.

Further, the image display device 7 displays an image on the display screen 7a by emitting light from its own built-in backlight, and the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 emits light from an LED (full-color LED capable of multicolor emission) from its end face. An image is displayed on the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 (by emitting light from an LED (a full-color LED capable of multicolor light emission)), and the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 The first image, which is an image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a, is displayed on the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 because the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 is formed of a colorless transparent member. Even so, it can be visually recognized through the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18.

On the other hand, the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided in the decorative member 10 emits light from its own built-in backlight, so that an image is displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13. However, the second image, which is an image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10, is the built-in backlight in the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided in the decorative member 10. Is not displayed on the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal display device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided in the decorative member 10 regardless of whether or not the light is emitted. Therefore, the display screen of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10 Since the decorative member 10 is formed of a colored opaque member, the second image, which is an image displayed in the region 7a, can be made difficult to see through the decorative member 10.

[Display effect C by effect device]
Next, the display effect C by the effect device will be described with reference to FIG. 79. As shown in FIG. 79 (A), the city image HG1 is displayed as a background image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the variation effect (variation display) of the effect symbol is started. At this time, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R of the first movable accessory 14 formed by the colorless transparent member provided in the game board 2 are both stationary in the retracted position, and the first movable accessory 14 is in a stationary state. The light irradiation of the LED (full-color LED capable of multicolor emission) is stopped from the end face of the left movable accessory 14L of the object 14, the left movable accessory 14L itself is turned off, and the first movable object 14 is movable. The light irradiation of the LED (full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors) is stopped from the end surface of the right movable accessory 14R of the accessory 14, and the right movable accessory 14R itself is turned off. Further, an image is displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided in the decorative member 10 arranged on the lower right front side of the image display device 7 and covering the lower right region (a part of the display screen 7a) of the display screen 7a. It is not displayed at all. The decorative member 10 is arranged on the lower right front side of the image display device 7 and is fixed so as to cover the lower right region (a part of the display screen 7a) of the display screen 7a.

As described above, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R of the first movable accessory 14 have a light guide portion formed along the outer periphery thereof, and the left movable accessory 14 of the first movable accessory 14 is movable. The light guide unit emits light from the end faces of the accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R by irradiating the light of an LED (full-color LED capable of multicolor emission), so that its own outer shape (contour) emits light. It has become.

Further, although the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R of the first movable accessory 14 can advance to the front of the image display device 7, they are formed of colorless and transparent members. The image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R is displayed on the left movable accessory 14L and the right side of the first movable accessory 14. It can be visually recognized via the movable accessory 14R. The decorative member 10 is formed of a colored opaque member and is arranged on the lower right front side of the image display device 7, and is further arranged in front of the movable accessory 14R on the right side of the first movable accessory 14. That is, they are arranged on the game board 2 in the order of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the right movable accessory 14R of the first movable accessory 14, and the decorative member 10. As a result, the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10 is not the right movable accessory 14R of the first movable accessory 14 formed of the colorless transparent member. It is obstructed by the decorative member 10 and difficult to see.

After that, as shown in FIG. 79 (B), the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are respectively toward (close to each other) the front (front) center advance position of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Start moving (in the direction). Even at this point, the irradiation of the light of the LED (full-color LED capable of multicolor emission) is stopped from the end face of the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14, and the left movable accessory 14L itself is turned off. In addition, the light irradiation of the LED (full-color LED capable of multicolor emission) is stopped from the end face of the right movable accessory 14R of the first movable accessory 14, and the right movable accessory 14R itself is turned off. It is in a state. Since the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are formed of a colorless transparent member, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R start moving and appear on the display screen 7a. Also, the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R is displayed via the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R. It can be visually recognized. That is, among the images displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the images are displayed in the area of the display screen 7a corresponding to the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R arranged in front of the display screen 7a. The first image, which is the image being displayed, can be visually recognized via the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R formed of the colorless transparent member. At this time, the first image that can be visually recognized via the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R is the city image HG1 which is a background image, the left effect symbol 8L in the variation effect (variation display), and the variation effect. The middle effect symbol 8C in (variable display) and the right effect symbol 8R in the variable effect (variable display). If the size of the variable icon 9C or the size of the hold icon 9A is one or two times larger than the normal size in order to indicate the degree of expectation, the variable icon 9C or the hold icon 9A is the first image. May be included in. In the present embodiment, since the variable icon 9C and the hold icon 9A have normal sizes, they do not suggest a hit expectation and are not included in the first image.

On the other hand, since the decorative member 10 is formed of a colored opaque member, is arranged on the lower right side in front of the image display device 7, and covers the lower right region (a part of the display screen 7a) of the display screen 7a. The image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10 is blocked by the decorative member 10. That is, among the images displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a decorative member arranged on the lower right front side of the image display device 7 and covering the lower right area (a part of the display screen 7a) of the display screen 7a. The second image, which is an image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a corresponding to 10, is blocked by the decorative member 10. The second image, which is the blocked image, may not be displayed at all on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided in the decorative member 10, and the second image may be difficult to see through the decorative member 10. You can do it. At this time, the second image is the city image HG1 which is the background image and the right effect symbol 8R in the variation effect (variation display). Even at the time of FIG. 79 (B), no image is displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided in the decorative member 10.

After that, as shown in FIG. 79 (C), at the front (front) center position (advanced position) of the display screen 7a, the left side becomes half of the ring-shaped decorative portion attached to the tip side of the left movable accessory 14L. The decorative part and the right decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip side of the right movable accessory 14R, are united, and the left decorative part of the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are combined. One decorative member (combined accessory) having an annular shape with the right decorative portion is formed. Along with this, the outer shape (contour) of the left movable accessory 14L itself becomes a predetermined color by irradiating the light of the LED (full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors) from the end face of the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14. In addition to being lit, the outer shape of the right movable accessory 14R itself (the outer shape of the right movable accessory 14R itself is emitted from the end face of the right movable accessory 14R of the first movable accessory 14 by irradiating the light of an LED (full-color LED capable of multicolor emission). The outline) is lit and displayed in a predetermined color. The "predetermined color" suggests the hit expectation in the fluctuation, and the hit expectation is set higher in the order of blue → green → red → purple → yellow (gold) → rainbow color (rich hit). ing. In the present embodiment, the "predetermined color" is blue. When the combined accessory of the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R is formed, the entire accessory has a predetermined color (that is, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R have the same color). It is designed to be lit. Instead of this, when a combined accessory of the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R is formed, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are lit in different colors. You may do it. As a result, it is possible to suggest to the player that the hit expectation has changed by performing the discomfort effect using the colors of the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R.

Even when a united accessory is formed by the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R and the whole is lit in a predetermined color (blue), the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are colorless and transparent members. The image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the left movable accessory 14L and the rear of the right movable accessory 14R is displayed on the left movable accessory 14L or the right side. It can be visually recognized via the movable accessory 14R. That is, among the images displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the images are displayed in the area of the display screen 7a corresponding to the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R arranged in front of the display screen 7a. The first image, which is the image shown in the image, is formed by the colorless transparent member even when the combined accessory 14L of the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are formed and the whole is lit in a predetermined color (blue). It can be visually recognized through the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R. At this time, the first image that can be visually recognized via the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R is the city image HG1 which is a background image, the left effect symbol 8L in the variation effect (variation display), and the variation effect. The middle effect symbol 8C in (variable display) and the right effect symbol 8R in the variable effect (variable display).

Further, when a combined accessory formed by the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R is formed, a third image is displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided in the decorative member 10. The upper body of the ally character CRA in the form of a wing man is displayed large. Even at this point, the second image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10 is blocked by the decorative member 10 and is difficult to see through the decorative member 10. On the other hand, on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided in the decorative member 10, the upper body of the ally character CRA in the form of a wing man, which is the third image, is displayed in a large size. The second image is the city image HG1 which is the background image and the right effect symbol 8R in the variation effect (variation display) in FIG. 79 (C). As described above, on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided in the decorative member 10, the second image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10 is displayed. It is not displayed, and the third image of the upper body of the ally character CRA in the form of a wing man, which is completely different from the second image, is displayed.

The third image was a mini character image which is a ally character CRA in the form of a wing man, but depending on the type of image, the hit expectation for the fluctuation (the left effect symbol in the variation effect (variation display) by the variation icon 9C). 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R (expectation of hit) is suggested. The type of image is different from the second image, and includes flash image, item image, mini character image, intense heat character image, etc. Flash image → item image → mini character image → intense heat character image (rich per hit) The degree of expectation is getting higher in this order.

After that, as shown in FIG. 79 (D), the flash FL jumps into the display screen 7a from the outside of the lower side of the display screen 7a and slightly to the right of the center of the lower side so as to draw a counterclockwise elliptical orbit. When it passes toward the right side and jumps out to the outside of the right side of the display screen 7a, it jumps into the display screen 7a from the outside of the upper side of the display screen 7a and slightly to the right of the center of the upper side, and stops and explodes near the center of the display screen 7a. It becomes a display mode (the flash FL is a moving image (moving image)). The flash FL is arranged in front of the city image HG1 which is a background image, and is arranged and displayed behind various effect symbols in the variation effect (variation display). When the flash FL is displayed on the display screen 7a, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R form a combined accessory, and the left movable accessory 14L is lit in a predetermined color (blue) as a whole. The first image that can be visually recognized via the movable accessory 14R on the right side is the background image HG1, the flash FL, the left effect symbol 8L during the variation effect (variation display), and the variation effect (variation display). The middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R during the variable effect (variable display).

On the other hand, the second image, which is an image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10, is a background image such as a city image HG1, a flash FL, and a variation effect ( It becomes the right effect symbol 8R in the variable display). Even at this point, the second image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10 is blocked by the decorative member 10 and is difficult to see through the decorative member 10. On the other hand, on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided in the decorative member 10, the upper body of the ally character CRA in the form of a wing man, which is the third image, is displayed in a large size. As described above, even at this time, the display screen of the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided in the decorative member 10 is displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10. The second image is not displayed, and the third image of the upper body of the ally character CRA in the form of a wing man, which is completely different from the second image, is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 79 (E), when the left effect symbol 8L is first displayed with the character symbol 8Lb attached to the symbol 8La of the number "1" having a bright green color, then the right effect is displayed. The character symbol 8Rb is attached to the symbol 8Ra of the number "2" in which the symbol 8R has a bright blue color and is temporarily stopped, and then the symbol 8Ca of the number "3" in which the middle effect symbol 8C has a bright green color is displayed. A symbol 8Cb is attached and a temporary stop is displayed. After the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed at the same time, the middle effect symbol 8C may be temporarily stopped and displayed.

When the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a, a combined accessory is formed by the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R, and the whole is predetermined. The first image that can be visually recognized via the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R even in the state of being lit in the color (blue) of is the background image, the city image HG1, and the temporary stop display. The left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C with the temporary stop display, and the right effect symbol 8R with the temporary stop display.

On the other hand, the second image, which is an image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10, is the city image HG1 which is a background image. Even at this point, the second image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10 is blocked by the decorative member 10 and is difficult to see through the decorative member 10. On the other hand, on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided in the decorative member 10, the upper body of the ally character CRA in the form of a wing man, which is the third image, is displayed in a large size. As described above, even at this time, the display screen of the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided in the decorative member 10 is displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10. The second image is not displayed, and the third image of the upper body of the ally character CRA in the form of a wing man, which is completely different from the second image, is displayed.

After that, a combined accessory is formed by the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R, and the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are separated from each other from a state in which the entire accessory is lit in a predetermined color (blue). In the direction, the left movable accessory 14L starts moving from the advance position at the center of the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 toward each evacuation position. At this time, the first image displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R moving toward the respective retracted positions is moved to the retracted position. In the left movable accessory 14L moving toward, the background image is the city image HG1, the temporary stop display is the left effect symbol 8L, and the temporary stop display is the middle effect symbol 8C, and the image is moving toward the retracted position. In the right movable accessory 14R, which is the background image, the city image HG1, the medium effect symbol 8C that is temporarily stopped, and the right effect symbol 8R that is temporarily stopped are displayed.

On the other hand, the second image, which is an image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10, is the city image HG1 which is a background image. Even at this point, the second image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10 is blocked by the decorative member 10 and is difficult to see through the decorative member 10. On the other hand, on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided in the decorative member 10, the upper body of the ally character CRA in the form of a wing man, which is the third image, is displayed in a large size.

After that, as shown in FIG. 79 (F), when the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R return to their respective retracted positions and become stationary, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R become stationary. From the state where each lights are lit in a predetermined color (blue), the light irradiation of the LED (full-color LED capable of multicolor emission) is stopped from the end face of the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14, and the left movable accessory 14 is turned on. The object 14L itself is turned off, and the light irradiation of the LED (full-color LED capable of multicolor emission) is stopped from the end face of the right movable accessory 14R of the first movable accessory 14, and the right movable accessory 14R is turned off. The light is turned off, and the upper body of the wing-human-shaped ally character CRA, which is the third image large displayed on the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided in the decorative member 10, is hidden (decorative member 10). The third image disappears from the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided in the above), and then, at the same timing, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are stopped and displayed to the same symbol. Not aligned, the loss is confirmed. Along with this, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

When the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R return to their respective retracted positions and become stationary, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are formed of colorless and transparent members, so that the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are movable on the left side. The image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R is visually recognized via the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R. The first image that can be created is the city image HG1, which is a background image (not shown). The second image, which is an image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10, is the city image HG1 which is a background image.

Subsequently, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the change display position 9Cd and becomes the change icon 9C, as shown in FIG. 79 (G), the change effect (variation display) of the effect symbol is obtained. ) Is started, and the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R change from an opaque state to a translucent state all at once (at the same time), and the display mode changes at high speed. When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9A is not digested and there is no stock at all.

After that, when the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are not aligned with the same symbol and are stopped and displayed, the deviation is confirmed, whereas the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right When the effect symbols 8R are aligned and stopped and displayed with the same symbol, the winning is confirmed, and then the winning game in which the player is given a profit is started.

In this way, in the display effect C by the effect device, when the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are lit in a predetermined color (blue), the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are rearward. The first image, which is an image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the above, is shown on the left side because the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are formed of a colorless transparent member. It can be visually recognized via the movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R. On the other hand, since the decorative member 10 is formed of a colored opaque member, the second image, which is an image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10. It is possible to make it difficult to see through the decorative member 10.

Further, the image display device 7 displays an image on the display screen 7a by emitting light from its own built-in backlight, and an LED (full-color LED capable of multicolor emission) is displayed from the end face of the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14. The outer shape (contour) of the left movable accessory 14L itself is lit and displayed in a predetermined color by the irradiation of the light of) (the LED (full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors) emits light), and the first Right side of movable accessory 14 Right side of movable accessory 14R by irradiation of LED (full-color LED capable of multicolor emission) from the end face of movable accessory 14R (by emitting light from LED (full color LED capable of multicolor emission)) An image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R in a state in which the outer shape (contour) of itself is lit and displayed in a predetermined color. In the first image, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are formed of colorless and transparent members, so that the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R have their own outer shapes (contours). Even in a state of being lit and displayed in a predetermined color, it can be visually recognized via the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R.

On the other hand, the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided in the decorative member 10 emits light from its own built-in backlight, so that an image is displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13. However, the second image, which is an image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10, is the built-in backlight in the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided in the decorative member 10. Is not displayed at all on the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal display device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided in the decorative member 10, regardless of whether or not the light is emitted. Therefore, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative device Since the decorative member 10 is formed of a colored opaque member, the second image, which is an image displayed in the area of, can be made difficult to see through the decorative member 10.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the display effect by the effect device is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the display effect A by the effect device of FIG. 77, the display effect B by the effect device of FIG. 78, and the display effect C of the effect device of FIG. 79, the background image such as the city image HG1 and the left effect are produced. It is equipped with an image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying various images (multiple types of images) such as a symbol 8L, a medium effect symbol 8C, a right effect symbol 8R, a hold icon 9A, and a variable icon 9C on a display screen 7a. The left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R (a set of effect symbols) that can notify the winning result of "hit" or "miss" can be displayed on the display screen 7a.

In the display effect A by the effect device of FIG. 77, the second movable accessory 15 (first effect device) is arranged in front of the display screen 7a so as to cover a part of the display screen 7a, and a part of the display screen 7a is covered. The third movable accessory 17 (second effect device) is arranged at a position different from that of the second movable accessory 15 (first effect device) so as to cover it. The image displayed on the display screen 7a can be visually recognized via the second movable accessory 15 (first effect device), and the image displayed on the display screen 7a can be viewed on the third movable accessory 17 (third). It is possible to execute an effect (FIGS. 77 (C) to (E) in the display effect A by the effect device) that makes it difficult to see through the effect device). According to this configuration, the image can be visually recognized on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 via the second movable accessory 15 (first effect device), whereas the third movable accessory 17 (1st effect device) can be visually recognized. Since it is possible to make it difficult to see through the second effect device), the second movable is possible while displaying the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 without having to bother to create a visible image and a difficult-to-see image. Using the accessory 15 (first effect device) and the third movable accessory 17 (second effect device), a visible image and a difficult-to-see image can be easily created and provided to the player as a novel effect. You can do it. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest.

In the display effect B by the effect device of FIG. 78, the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 (first effect device) is arranged in front of the display screen 7a so as to cover a part of the display screen 7a, and is a part of the display screen 7a. The decorative member 10 (second effect device) is arranged at a position different from that of the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 (first effect device) so as to cover the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18. The image displayed on the display screen 7a can be visually recognized via the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 (first effect device), and the image displayed on the display screen 7a can be displayed on the decorative member 10 (second effect device). It is possible to execute an effect (FIGS. 78 (B) to (E) in the display effect B by the effect device) that makes it difficult to see. According to this configuration, an image can be visually recognized on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 via the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 (first effect device), whereas the decorative member 10 (second effect device) can be visually recognized. Since it can be made difficult to see through the effect device), the illumination panel (light guide plate) is displayed while displaying the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 without having to bother to create a visible image and a difficult-to-see image. ) 18 (first effect device) and decorative member 10 (second effect device) can be used to easily create a visible image and a difficult-to-see image and provide the player with a novel effect. It has become. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest.

In the display effect C by the effect device of FIG. 79, the left movable accessory 14L (first effect device) and the right movable accessory 14R (first effect device) are displayed on the display screen 7a so as to cover a part of the display screen 7a. Decorative members 10 (second effect device) are arranged at different positions on the right side movable accessory 14R (first effect device) so as to cover a part of the display screen 7a (first effect device). Has been done. The image displayed on the display screen 7a can be visually recognized via the left movable accessory 14L (first effect device) and the right movable accessory 14R (first effect device), and the image displayed on the display screen 7a can be displayed. , The effect (FIGS. 79 (B) to (E) in the display effect B by the effect device) that makes it difficult to see can be executed through the decorative member 10 (second effect device). According to this configuration, the image can be visually recognized on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 via the left movable accessory 14L (first effect device) and the right movable accessory 14R (first effect device). On the other hand, since it is possible to make it difficult to see through the decorative member 10 (second effect device), it is possible to display the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 without having to bother to create a visible image and a difficult-to-see image. While displaying an image, a visible image and difficult to see using the left movable accessory 14L (first effect device), the right movable accessory 14R (first effect device), and the decorative member 10 (second effect device). Images can be easily created and provided to players as a novel production. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the effect in the display effect A by the effect device of FIG. 77 is in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the second movable accessory 15 (first effect device). The displayed first image (for example, in FIG. 77 (C), the city image HG1, the medium effect symbol 8C in the variation effect (variation display), the two flash images IG2, IG2) is displayed on the second movable accessory 15. A second image (a second image) that is visible via (first effect device) and is displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 that corresponds to the rear of the third movable accessory 17 (second effect device). For example, in FIG. 77 (C), it is difficult to visually recognize the city image HG1 which is the background image and the left effect symbol 8L in the variation effect (variation display) via the third movable accessory 17 (second effect device). It is possible to do. According to this configuration, among the images displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the first image can be visually recognized via the second movable accessory 15 (first effect device). On the other hand, since the second image can be made difficult to see through the third movable accessory 17 (second effect device), the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 Even the image displayed on the screen is provided to the player as an image having a different impression through the second movable accessory 15 (first effect device) and the third movable accessory 17 (second effect device). be able to.

The effect in the display effect B by the effect device of FIG. 78 is the first image (1st image) displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 (first effect device). For example, in FIG. 78 (C), the city image HG1, the left effect symbol 8L in the variable effect (variable display), the medium effect symbol 8C in the variable effect (variable display), and the right effect symbol in the variable effect (variable display). 8R, variable display position 9Cd, hold display position 9Ad, variable icon 9C, hold icon 9A, etc.) are made visible via the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 (first effect device), and the decorative member 10 (second). The second image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the effect device) (for example, in FIG. 78 (C), the city image HG1 and the right effect in the variable effect (variable display)). The symbol 8R) can be made difficult to see through the decorative member 10 (second effect device). According to this configuration, among the images displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the first image can be visually recognized via the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 (first effect device). On the other hand, since the second image can be made difficult to see through the decorative member 10 (second effect device), it is displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Even if the image is displayed, it can be provided to the player as an image having a different impression through the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 (first effect device) and the decorative member 10 (second effect device).

Display by the effect device of FIG. 79 The effect in the effect C is the display of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the left movable accessory 14L (first effect device) and the right movable accessory 14R (first effect device). The first image displayed in the area of the screen 7a (for example, in FIG. 79 (C), the city image HG1, the left effect symbol 8L in the variation effect (variation display), and the middle effect symbol in the variation effect (variation display)). 8C, right effect symbol 8R during variable effect (variable display), variable display position 9Cd, hold display position 9Ad, variable icon 9C, hold icon 9A, etc.) A second image (visible in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10 (second effect device), which is visible via the accessory 14R (first effect device) ( For example, in FIG. 79 (C), the city image HG1 and the right effect symbol 8R in the variation effect (variation display) can be made difficult to see through the decorative member 10 (second effect device). It has become. According to this configuration, among the images displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the first image is the left movable accessory 14L (first effect device) and the right movable accessory 14R (first). The image can be made visible through the effect device), whereas the second image can be made difficult to see through the decorative member 10 (second effect device). Even if the image is displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the display device 7, the left movable accessory 14L (first effect device), the right movable accessory 14R (first effect device), and the decorative member 10 (second effect device) It can be provided to the player as an image having a different impression through the effect device).

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the display effect A by the effect device of FIG. 77, the second movable accessory 15 (first effect device) is a sub liquid crystal display provided in the second movable accessory 15 (first effect device). The device (liquid crystal panel) 15a has a built-in backlight (first light emitting means). In the effect of the display effect A by the effect device of FIG. 77, the built-in backlight (first light emitting means) in the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 15a provided in the second movable accessory 15 (first effect device) emits light. Sometimes, the first image can be visually recognized via the second movable accessory 15 (first effect device). Specifically, it is displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the second movable accessory 15 (first effect device) blocked by the second movable accessory 15 (first effect device). When the first image is displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 15a provided in the second movable accessory 15 (first effect device), the second movable accessory 15 (first effect device) is displayed. The built-in backlight (first light emitting means) in the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 15a provided is made visible. According to this configuration, when the built-in backlight (first light emitting means) in the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 15a provided in the second movable accessory 15 (first effect device) is made to emit light, the second movable is accompanied by the light emission. A sub liquid crystal display provided in the second movable accessory 15 (first effect device) with the first image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the accessory 15 (first effect device). Since it can be displayed on the display screen of the device (liquid crystal panel) 15a, the player corresponds to the rear of the second movable accessory 15 (first effect device) through the second movable accessory 15 (first effect device). It is possible to visually recognize the first image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

In the display effect B by the effect device of FIG. 78, the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 (first effect device) is an LED (full-color LED capable of multicolor light emission) that irradiates light from the end face of the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18. It has (first light emitting means). The effect in the display effect B by the effect device of FIG. 78 is illumination when the LED (full-color LED capable of multicolor light emission) (first light emitting means) emitted from the end face of the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 is emitting light. The first image can be visually recognized via the panel (light guide plate) 18 (first effect device). Specifically, an LED (a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors) is emitted from the end face of an illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 formed of a colorless and transparent member, and the ally character CRA, which is an image, is illuminated by the illumination panel. Even if it is displayed on the (light guide plate) 18, the image displayed in the area corresponding to the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 arranged in front of the display screen 7a (in other words, the illumination panel (guide)). The first image, which is the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the light plate) 18, is displayed on the first image without being blocked by the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18. It is visible through the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18. According to this configuration, an LED (a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors) (first light emitting means) that irradiates light from the end face of an illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 (first effect device) formed of a colorless transparent member. When the light is emitted, the ally character CRA is displayed on the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 accordingly, but the image display corresponding to the rear of the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 (first effect device) is displayed. The first image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the device 7 is passed through the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 (first effect device) formed of the colorless transparent member, and the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 (first). It is possible to visually recognize the first image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the effect device).

In the display effect C by the effect device of FIG. 79, the left movable accessory 14L (first effect device) and the right movable accessory 14R (first effect device) are the left movable accessory 14L (first effect device) and the right side. It has LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of multicolor emission) (first light emitting means) that irradiate light from their respective end faces with the movable accessory 14R (first effect device). The effect in the display effect C by the effect device shown in FIG. 79 is an LED (multicolor light emission) emitted from the end faces of the left movable accessory 14L (first effect device) and the right movable accessory 14R (first effect device). When the possible full-color LED) (first light emitting means) is emitting light, the first image is visually recognized via the left movable accessory 14L (first effect device) and the right movable accessory 14R (first effect device). You can do it. Specifically, LEDs from the end faces of the left movable accessory 14L (first effect device) formed of the colorless transparent member and the right movable accessory 14R (first effect device) formed of the colorless transparent member. Even in a state where (a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors) is made to emit light and its outer shape (contour) is emitted by irradiation with light, the left movable accessory 14L (first effect device) and the right side The display screen of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the left movable accessory 14L (first effect device) and the right movable accessory 14R (first effect device) blocked by the movable accessory 14R (first effect device). The first image displayed in the area 7a is movable on the left side without being blocked by the left movable accessory 14L (first effect device) and the right movable accessory 14R (first effect device). It is visible through the accessory 14L (first effect device) and the right movable accessory 14R (first effect device). According to this configuration, from the end faces of the left movable accessory 14L (first effect device) formed of the colorless transparent member and the right movable accessory 14R (first effect device) formed of the colorless transparent member. When the LED (full-color LED capable of multicolor light emission) (first light emitting means) is made to emit light, the outer shape (contour) of the left movable accessory 14L (first effect device) itself and the right movable accessory 14R (first) Although the outer shape (contour) of the 1 effect device itself is in a state of emitting light, the left movable accessory 14L (first effect device) and the right movable accessory 14R (first effect device) The first image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear is formed by the left movable accessory 14L (first effect device) formed of the colorless transparent member and the colorless transparent member. The display screen of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the left movable accessory 14L (first effect device) and the right movable accessory 14R (first effect device) through the right movable accessory 14R (first effect device). It is possible to visually recognize the first image displayed in the area of 7a.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the display effect A by the effect device of FIG. 77, the third movable accessory 17 (second effect device) is a sub liquid crystal display provided in the third movable accessory 17 (second effect device). The device (liquid crystal panel) 17a has a built-in backlight (second light emitting means). In the effect in the display effect A by the effect device of FIG. 77, is the built-in backlight (second light emitting means) in the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 17a provided in the third movable accessory 17 (second effect device) emitting light? Regardless of whether or not, the second image can be made difficult to see through the third movable accessory 17 (second effect device). Specifically, the second image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the third movable accessory 17 (second effect device) is the third movable accessory 17 (second effect device). The built-in backlight (second light emitting means) in the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 17a provided in the third movable accessory 17 (second effect device) is made to emit light. Also, a third image is displayed instead of the second image, and this third image is visible. In this way, regardless of whether or not the built-in backlight (second light emitting means) in the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 17a provided in the third movable accessory 17 (second effect device) is emitting light, the third movable object 17 (second effect device) is movable. The second image can be made difficult to see through the accessory 17 (second effect device). According to this configuration, the second image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the third movable accessory 17 (second effect device) is displayed on the third movable accessory 17 (second effect device). It can be made difficult to see at all times through the second effect device).

In the display effect B by the effect device of FIG. 78 and the display effect C by the effect device of FIG. 79, the decorative member 10 (second effect device) is a sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) provided in the decorative member 10 (second effect device). 13 has a built-in backlight (second light emitting means). The effect in the display effect B by the effect device of FIG. 78 and the effect in the display effect C by the effect device of FIG. 79 are the built-in backlight (the third) in the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided in the decorative member 10 (second effect device). Regardless of whether or not the two light emitting means) emits light, the second image can be made difficult to see through the decorative member 10 (second effect device). Specifically, the second image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10 (second effect device) is blocked by the decorative member 10 (second effect device). Further, even if the built-in backlight (second light emitting means) in the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided in the decorative member 10 (second effect device) is made to emit light, the third image is not the second image. Is displayed, and this third image is visible. In this way, regardless of whether or not the built-in backlight (second light emitting means) in the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided in the decorative member 10 (second effect device) is emitting light, the decorative member 10 (second light emitting means) is emitting light. The second image can be made difficult to see through the effect device). According to this configuration, the second image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10 (second effect device) is displayed on the decorative member 10 (second effect device). Through this, it can be made difficult to see at all times.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the display effect A by the effect device of FIG. 77, the third movable accessory 17 (second effect device) can display a third image different from the second image. It has become. In the effect of the display effect A by the effect device of FIG. 77, the built-in backlight (second light emitting means) in the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 17a provided in the third movable accessory 17 (second effect device) emits light. Sometimes the third image can be made visible. According to this configuration, the second image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the third movable accessory 17 (second effect device) is displayed on the third movable accessory 17 (second effect device). A third image instead of the second image is displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 17a provided in the third movable accessory 17 (second effect device) while making it difficult to see at all times via the second effect device). Since the third image can be displayed and visually recognized, the player can display a new image called the third image (in other words, an image not displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7). Can be provided to. Further, by displaying the third image, the degree of expectation of hitting the fluctuation (that is, the fluctuation effect (variation display) of the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R (a set of effect symbols) by the variation icon 9C). Because it is possible to suggest, it is also possible to increase the variation of the production.

In the display effect B by the effect device of FIG. 78 and the display effect C of the effect device of FIG. 79, the decorative member 10 (second effect device) can display a third image different from the second image. There is. The effect in the display effect B by the effect device of FIG. 78 and the display effect C by the effect device of FIG. 79 is the built-in backlight (second light emission) in the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided in the decorative member 10 (second effect device). The third image can be made visible when the means) is emitting light. According to this configuration, the second image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10 (second effect device) is displayed on the decorative member 10 (second effect device). Through the display screen of the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided in the decorative member 10 (second effect device), a third image is displayed instead of the second image, and the third image is visually recognized. Therefore, a new image called a third image (in other words, an image not displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7) can be provided to the player. Further, by displaying the third image, the degree of expectation of hitting the fluctuation (that is, the fluctuation effect (variation display) of the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R (a set of effect symbols) by the variation icon 9C). Because it is possible to suggest, it is also possible to increase the variation of the production.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the display effect A by the effect device of FIG. 77, the second movable accessory 15 (first effect device) is a movable body that moves between the retracted position and the advanced position, and is the third. The movable accessory 17 (second effect device) is a movable body that moves between the retracted position and the advanced position. The second movable accessory 15 (first effect device) is provided with a sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 15a having a display screen, and the third movable accessory 17 (second effect device) is provided with a sub liquid crystal device having a display screen. (Liquid crystal panel) 17a is provided. Since the movable body can suggest to the player that the hit expectation is higher than when it is not operated, the player is highly interested in the operation of the movable body. Therefore, the first image, which is an image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the second movable accessory 15 (first effect device) which is a movable body, is a movable body. Visible via the second movable accessory 15 (first effect device) (that is, by displaying the first image on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 15a provided in the second movable accessory 15). By doing so, the expectation for hitting can be fueled by the effect of the operation of the second movable accessory 15 (first effect device), which is a movable body.

Further, in the display effect C by the effect device shown in FIG. 79, the left movable accessory 14L (first effect device) and the right movable accessory 14R (first effect device) move between the retracted position and the advanced position, respectively. On the other hand, the decorative member 10 (second effect device) is arranged on the lower right front side of the image display device 7 and fixed so as to cover the lower right area (a part of the display screen 7a) of the display screen 7a. It is different from the left movable accessory 14L (first effect device) and the right movable accessory 14R (first effect device) in that the decorative member 10 is not provided on the movable body. Since the movable body can suggest to the player that the hit expectation is higher than when it is not operated, the player is highly interested in the operation of the movable body. Therefore, it is displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the left movable accessory 14L (first effect device) and the rear of the right movable accessory 14R (first effect device), which are movable bodies. Since the left movable accessory 14L (first effect device) and the right movable accessory 14R (first effect device), which are movable bodies, are formed of colorless and transparent members in the first image, which is the image shown in the image. The left movable accessory 14L (first effect), which is a movable body, is made visible through the left movable accessory 14L (first effect device) and the right movable accessory 14R (first effect device), which are movable bodies. The expectation for hitting can be fueled by the effect of the operation of the device) and the right movable accessory 14R (first effect device).

[Modification example]
An example of modification of the display effect by the effect device is shown below.
[Modification 1]
The display effect A by the effect device of FIG. 77, the display effect B of the effect device of FIG. 78, and the display effect C of the effect device of FIG. 79 are performed based on the game ball entering the first starting port 20. Met. In other words, it was performed in a so-called left-handed gaming state (normal gaming state). However, the game ball may be played based on the ball entering the second starting port 210. In other words, it may be performed in a so-called right-handed gaming state (a specific gaming state different from the normal gaming state). Further, the game ball may be played when it passes through the gate 28.

[Modification 2]
The decorative member 10 in the display effect B by the effect device of FIG. 78 and the display effect C by the effect device of FIG. 79 is stationary as a third image displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided in the decorative member 10. It may be an image (still image) or a moving image (moving image). Further, the content may be a combination of a still image (still image) and a moving image (moving image) as the third image. In this way, it is possible to increase the variation of the production by the third image.

[Modification 3]
The decorative member 10 in the display effect B by the effect device of FIG. 78 and the display effect C by the effect device of FIG. 79 includes a sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13. However, instead of the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13, a production device including a printing member on which a third image is printed and a built-in backlight (second light emitting means) arranged behind the printing member. A third image display device may be provided. As a result, the third image can be displayed by causing the built-in backlight (second light emitting means) to emit light. A plurality of printing members on which the third image is printed may be provided so that the third image corresponding to the emission color of the built-in backlight (second light emitting means) is displayed. In this case, the third images printed on the plurality of printing members are different images. In this way, when the built-in backlight (second light emitting means) emits light, for example, red, green, blue, or white, when the built-in backlight (second light emitting means) emits red light, it emits red light. The third image printed on the first printing member is displayed, and when the built-in backlight (second light emitting means) emits green light, the third image printed on the second printing member is displayed by green light emission and built-in. When the backlight (second light emitting means) emits blue light, the third image printed on the third printing member is displayed by blue light emission, and when the built-in backlight (second light emitting means) emits white light, it is white. The third image printed on the fourth printing member is displayed by light emission. Further, an effect lamp (a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors) is arranged along the outer circumference of the decorative member 10 provided with the third image display device, and the effect lamp emits light so as to emit its own outer shape (contour). It may be configured. In this case, when the effect lamp (full-color LED capable of multicolor light emission) emits light from the built-in backlight (second light emitting means) of the third image display device along the outer circumference of the decorative member 10 including the third image display device. It emits light in conjunction with this.

[Modification example 4]
Display by the effect device of FIG. 77 The third movable accessory 17 (second effect device) in the effect A, the decorative member 10 (second effect device) in the display effect B by the effect device of FIG. 78, and the display by the effect device of FIG. 79. An effect lamp (a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors) is arranged along the outer periphery of the decorative member 10 (second effect device) in the effect C, and the effect lamp emits light so as to emit its own outer shape (contour). It may be configured. In this case, the effect lamp (full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors) arranged along the outer periphery of the third movable accessory 17 (second effect device) in the display effect A by the effect device of FIG. 77 is the third movable accessory. When the built-in backlight (second light emitting means) of the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 17a provided in 17 (second effect device) emits light, the light is emitted in conjunction with this. Further, the effect lamps arranged along the outer periphery of the decorative member 10 (second effect device) in the display effect B by the effect device of FIG. 78 and the decorative member 10 (second effect device) in the display effect C by the effect device of FIG. 79. (Full-color LED capable of multicolor light emission) emits light in conjunction with the built-in backlight (second light emitting means) of the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided in the decorative member 10 (second effect device). do.

[Modification 5]
The decorative member 10 (second effect device) in the display effect B by the effect device of FIG. 78 and the display effect C of the effect device of FIG. 79 is arranged on the lower right front side of the image display device 7 and is located in the lower right area of the display screen 7a. It was fixed so as to cover (a part of the display screen 7a). However, the position where the decorative member 10 (second effect device) is arranged and fixed on the lower right front side of the image display device 7 described above is set as the retracted position, and the image display device is horizontally oriented from this retracted position to the left. It may be configured as a movable body that can move to the central position (advanced position) of 7 and can move between the retracted position and the advanced position. Since the movable body can suggest to the player that the hit expectation is higher than when it is not operated, the player is highly interested in the operation of the movable body. Therefore, while displaying the third image on the decorative member 10 (second effect device), it is possible to arouse the expectation of hitting by the effect of the operation of the movable body.

[Modification 6]
In the display effect A by the effect device of FIG. 77, when the third movable accessory 17 reaches the advance position from the retracted position and stands still, the second movable accessory 15 itself is in the advance position of the third movable accessory 17. The third movable accessory 17 and the second movable accessory 15 do not overlap (do not interfere with each other) in the front-rear direction when stopped at the advanced position (center position of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7). The right end of the third movable accessory 17 and the left end of the second movable accessory 15 were separated by a predetermined distance dimension (for example, 10 mm). However, when the third movable accessory 17 is configured to be able to move in the space between the second movable accessory 15 and the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the third movable accessory 17 is movable. The accessory 17 may be moved behind the second movable accessory 15 and in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In this case, the first image, which is an image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a corresponding to the rear of the second movable accessory 15, moves behind the second movable accessory 15 and further to the rear of the second movable accessory 15. Since it will be blocked by the third movable accessory 17, the third movable accessory that is moving behind the second movable accessory 15 to the front (front) of the first image, which is the blocked image. An image of an object 17 and an image displayed on the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 17a provided in the third movable accessory 17 (flash image IG3 in FIG. 77 (D)) are arranged. It will be displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 15a provided in the second movable accessory 15.

[Modification 7]
In the display effect A by the effect device of FIG. 77, both the second movable accessory 15 and the third movable accessory 17 are in a stationary state at the retracted position, and the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) provided in the second movable accessory 15 is provided. ) The image was not displayed on the display screen of 15a and the display screen of the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 17a provided in the third movable accessory 17. However, when the second movable accessory 15 is stationary in the retracted position and there is an area of the display screen 7a corresponding to the rear of the second movable accessory 15, it corresponds to the rear of the second movable accessory 15. The image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a may be displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 15a provided in the second movable accessory 15, or another effect image (for example, the variation) may be displayed. (An image suggesting the degree of expectation for hitting (variation effect (variation display) by the variation icon 9C), an image showing the world view of the game board 2, an effect image, etc.) may be displayed. On the other hand, in a state where the third movable accessory 17 is stationary at the retracted position, even if there is an area of the display screen 7a corresponding to the rear of the third movable accessory 17, it is still behind the third movable accessory 17. The image displayed in the area of the corresponding display screen 7a is not displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 17a provided in the third movable accessory 17, and another effect image (for example, the variation (variation icon 9C)) is not displayed. An image suggesting the degree of expectation of hitting the variable effect (variable display)), an image showing the world view of the game board 2, an effect image, etc.) may be displayed.

[Modification 8]
In the display effect A by the effect device of FIG. 77, the display effect B by the effect device of FIG. 78, and the display effect C by the effect device of FIG. 79, the left effect symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle effect symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the stereoscopic image The right effect symbol 8R is a card-type effect symbol, and the number symbols (numbers "1" to "9") are attached with the symbols of the characters corresponding to the number symbols in the card. However, the left effect symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle effect symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right effect symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are not from the card type effect symbol but from the number symbols (numbers "1" to "9"). It may be configured. In this case, the size of the effect symbol composed of the number symbols is the same as (including substantially the same) the size of the card type effect symbol.

[Modification 9]
The display effect B by the effect device of FIG. 78 was performed by attaching an illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 (first effect device) formed of a colorless transparent member which is a transparent flat plate member to the game board 2. However, instead of this, an illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 formed of a colorless transparent member which is a transparent flat plate member may be attached to the central opening of the front frame 53. When the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 is attached to the game board 2, as described above, the size of the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 is one to two turns compared to the size of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Since it is formed so small, it does not cover the entire area of the display screen 7a, but covers a part of the display screen 7a. On the other hand, when the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 is attached to the central opening of the front frame 53, the size of the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 is compared with the size of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Since it becomes large, it covers the entire area of the display screen 7a.

Therefore, when the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 is attached to the central opening of the front frame 53, the size of the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 is smaller than the size of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It should be formed about twice as small as possible so as not to cover the entire area of the display screen 7a but to cover a part of the display screen 7a. In this way, in the first image (for example, FIG. 78 (C)) displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 (first effect device), City image HG1, left effect symbol 8L in variable effect (variable display), medium effect symbol 8C in variable effect (variable display), right effect symbol 8R in variable effect (variable display), variable display position 9Cd, hold display The position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, the hold icon 9A, etc.) are made visible through the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 (first effect device), and the image corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10 (second effect device). The second image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the display device 7 (for example, in FIG. 78 (C), the city image HG1, the right effect symbol 8R in the variation effect (variation display)) is attached to the decorative member 10 (for example, It can be made difficult to see through the second effect device). According to this configuration, among the images displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the first image can be visually recognized via the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 (first effect device). On the other hand, since the second image can be made difficult to see through the decorative member 10 (second effect device), the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is used. Even if there is, it can be provided to the player as an image having a different impression through the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 (first effect device) and the decorative member 10 (second effect device).

[Modification 10]
The display effect A by the effect device of FIG. 77, the display effect B by the effect device of FIG. 78, and the display effect C by the effect device of FIG. 79 may not include a part of the described effects, and other effects may be provided. It may have been added.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect E1-1]
A gaming machine provided with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images on a display screen, and displaying a set of production symbols capable of notifying a lottery result on the display screen.
The first effect device is arranged in front of the display screen so as to cover a part of the display screen.
The second effect device is arranged at a position different from that of the first effect device so as to cover a part of the display screen.
It is possible to perform an effect of making the image displayed on the display screen visible through the first effect device and making the image displayed on the display screen difficult to see through the second effect device. ,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect E1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect E1-1.
The effect corresponds to the rear of the second effect device by making the first image displayed in the area of the display screen corresponding to the rear of the first effect device visible through the first effect device. The second image displayed in the area of the display screen is made difficult to see through the second effect device.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect E1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect E1-2.
The first effect device has a first light emitting means, and has a first light emitting means.
The effect makes the first image visible through the first effect device when the first light emitting means is emitting light.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect E1-4]
The gaming machine according to the aspect E1-2 or the aspect E1-3.
The second effect device has a second light emitting means, and has a second light emitting means.
The effect makes the second image difficult to see through the second effect device regardless of whether or not the second light emitting means emits light.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect E1-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect E1-4.
The second effect device can display a third image different from the second image, and can display a third image.
The effect makes the third image visible when the second light emitting means is emitting light.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect E1-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E1-1 to E1-5.
At least one of the first effect device and the second effect device is provided on a movable body that moves between a retracted position and an advanced position.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Other variants]
In the various display effects described above, a configuration that does not include a part of the effects or an effect other than the above may be included.

The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is configured as a so-called type 1 type 2 mixing machine, but the gaming machine 1 may have a configuration other than this. For example, the gaming machine 1 may be an ST machine, a VST machine, a loop machine, or the like. Further, the above-described embodiment has been described by taking a pachinko gaming machine as an example, but the present embodiment is not limited to this. For example, instead of the pachinko gaming machine, the present invention may be applied to a spinning machine such as a slot machine, an arrange ball gaming machine, or a sparrow ball gaming machine. When the game machine 1 is used as a slot machine, the game medium may be changed from a game ball to a game medal.

The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment includes the effect button 63 as an operation unit operated by the player, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a lever, a trigger, or the like may be used as the operation unit operated by the player. .. Further, in the display effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display effect may be executed by using the button image representing the effect button 63, but instead of this, the display effect is performed by using the image representing the select button 68. It may be executed, or the display effect may be executed using an image representing a lever or a trigger.

The gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a payout device for paying out balls, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of the above-mentioned gaming machine 1, the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine that is not equipped with a payout device, such as a so-called enclosed gaming machine.

The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment uses the image display device 7 to perform various effects. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, these effects may be combined with each other to form one display effect. That is, two or more production examples and / or modification examples may be combined among the plurality of production examples and / or modification examples described above. Further, the gaming machine 1 may include a sub display device in addition to the image display device 7 (display screen 7a). Then, at least a part of the display effect performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 may be performed on the display screen of the sub display device.

Although the present embodiment has been described above based on the embodiments and modifications, the embodiments of the above-described embodiments are for facilitating the understanding of the present embodiment, and do not limit the present embodiment. This aspect may be modified or improved without departing from its spirit and claims, and this aspect includes its equivalents.

1 ... Game machine 3 ... Game area 5 ... Board lamp 7 ... Image display device 9A, 9B ... Hold image (hold icon)
9C ... The hold image (the hold icon)
14 ... 1st movable accessory 15 ... 2nd movable accessory 20, 30 ... 1st start port 21 ... 2nd start port 66 ... Frame lamp 81 ... Game control microcomputer 91 ... Production control microcomputer 101 ... Image control microcomputer

Claims (6)

A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is an icon indicating that the game ball has entered the starting port.
If the game ball enters the starting port during the first period, the icon is displayed, and in the second period after the first period, the game ball enters the starting port. However, the icon may not be displayed,
A gaming machine characterized by that. The gaming machine according to claim 1.
In the second period, the icon may not be additionally displayed even if the game ball enters the starting port while the display of the icon displayed in the first period is maintained.
A gaming machine characterized by that. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2.
In the second period, the icon may disappear after the corresponding winning lottery has been performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3.
In the second period, if the hold icon is won in the corresponding winning lottery, it may be continuously displayed even during the winning game.
A gaming machine characterized by that. The gaming machine according to claim 4.
In the second period, when the hold icon is won in the corresponding winning lottery, depending on the winning type, the holding icon may be continuously displayed even during the winning game execution, or may disappear without being continuously displayed. be,
A gaming machine characterized by that. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5.
In the first period, when the game ball enters the starting port, the icon may be displayed at a timing delayed from the entry.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images